2011 Chevrolet Malibu Owner Manual M · PDF file2011 Chevrolet Malibu Owner Manual M Service and Maintenance ... Chevrolet Malibu Owner Manual - 2011 Black plate ... slogans, vehicle

Black plate (1,1)Chevrolet Malibu Owner Manual - 2011

2011 Chevrolet Malibu Owner Manual M

In Brief . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-1Instrument Panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-2Initial Drive Information . . . . . . . . 1-4Vehicle Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-15Performance andMaintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-20

Keys, Doors and Windows . . . 2-1Keys and Locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-2Doors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-9Vehicle Security. . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-11Exterior Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-13Interior Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-14Windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-15Roof . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-18

Seats and Restraints . . . . . . . . . 3-1Head Restraints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-2Front Seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-3Rear Seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-8Safety Belts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-9Airbag System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-25Child Restraints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-39

Storage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-1Storage Compartments . . . . . . . . 4-1Additional Storage Features . . . 4-3

Instruments and Controls . . . . 5-1Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-2Warning Lights, Gauges, andIndicators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-8

Information Displays . . . . . . . . . . 5-22Vehicle Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-25Vehicle Personalization . . . . . . . 5-30

Lighting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-1Exterior Lighting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-1Interior Lighting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-5Lighting Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-5

Infotainment System . . . . . . . . . 7-1Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-1Radio . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-7Audio Players . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-15Phone . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-25

Climate Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-1Climate Control Systems . . . . . . 8-1Air Vents . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-9

Driving and Operating . . . . . . . . 9-1Driving Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-2Starting and Operating . . . . . . . 9-16Engine Exhaust . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-22Automatic Transmission . . . . . . 9-24Brakes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-27Ride Control Systems . . . . . . . . 9-29Cruise Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-32Fuel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-35Towing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-41Conversions and Add-Ons . . . 9-47

Vehicle Care . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-1General Information . . . . . . . . . . 10-2Vehicle Checks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-4Headlamp Aiming . . . . . . . . . . . 10-29Bulb Replacement . . . . . . . . . . 10-30Electrical System . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-35Wheels and Tires . . . . . . . . . . . 10-42Jump Starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-84Towing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-88Appearance Care . . . . . . . . . . . 10-90


2011 Chevrolet Malibu Owner Manual M

Service and Maintenance . . . 11-1General Information . . . . . . . . . . 11-1Scheduled Maintenance . . . . . . 11-2Recommended Fluids,Lubricants, and Parts . . . . . . . 11-6

Maintenance Records . . . . . . . . 11-8

Technical Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-1Vehicle Identification . . . . . . . . . 12-1Vehicle Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-2

Customer Information . . . . . . . 13-1Customer Information . . . . . . . . 13-1Reporting Safety Defects . . . . 13-16Vehicle Data Recording andPrivacy. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-17

Index . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . i-1


Introduction iii

The names, logos, emblems,slogans, vehicle model names, andvehicle body designs appearing inthis manual including, but not limitedto, GM, the GM logo, CHEVROLET,the CHEVROLET Emblem,MALIBU, and the MALIBU Emblemare trademarks and/or servicemarks of General Motors LLC, itssubsidiaries, affiliates, or licensors.

This manual describes features thatmay or may not be on your specificvehicle either because they areoptions that you did not purchase ordue to changes subsequent to theprinting of this owner manual.Please refer to the purchasedocumentation relating to yourspecific vehicle to confirm each ofthe features found on your vehicle.For vehicles first sold in Canada,substitute the name “GeneralMotors of Canada Limited” forChevrolet Motor Division wherever itappears in this manual.

Keep this manual in the vehicle forquick reference.

Canadian Vehicle Owners

Propriétaires Canadiens

A French language copy of thismanual can be obtained from yourdealer or from:

On peut obtenir un exemplaire dece guide en français auprès duconcessionnaire ou à l'adressesuivante:

Helm, IncorporatedP.O. Box 07130Detroit, MI 48207

1-800-551-4123Numéro de poste 6438 de languefrançaisewww.helminc.com

Litho in U.S.A.Part No. 20786885 B Second Printing ©2010 General Motors LLC. All Rights Reserved.


iv Introduction

Using this ManualTo quickly locate information aboutthe vehicle, use the Index in theback of the manual. It is analphabetical list of what is in themanual and the page number whereit can be found.

Danger, Warnings, andCautionsWarning messages found on vehiclelabels and in this manual describehazards and what to do to avoid orreduce them.

Danger indicates a hazard with ahigh level of risk which will result inserious injury or death.

Warning or Caution indicates ahazard that could result in injury ordeath.

{ WARNING

These mean there is somethingthat could hurt you or otherpeople.

Notice: This means there issomething that could result inproperty or vehicle damage. Thiswould not be covered by thevehicle's warranty.

A circle with a slash through it is asafety symbol which means “DoNot,” “Do not do this,” or “Do not letthis happen.”

SymbolsThe vehicle has components andlabels that use symbols instead oftext. Symbols are shown along withthe text describing the operation orinformation relating to a specificcomponent, control, message,gauge, or indicator.

M : This symbol is shown whenyou need to see your owner manualfor additional instructions orinformation.

* : This symbol is shown whenyou need to see a service manualfor additional instructions orinformation.


Introduction v

Vehicle Symbol Chart

Here are some additional symbolsthat may be found on the vehicleand what they mean. For moreinformation on the symbol, refer tothe Index.

9 : Airbag Readiness Light

# : Air Conditioning

! : Antilock Brake System (ABS)

% : Audio Steering Wheel Controlsor OnStar®

$ : Brake System Warning Light

" : Charging System

I : Cruise Control

B : Engine Coolant Temperature

O : Exterior Lamps

# : Fog Lamps

. : Fuel Gauge

+ : Fuses

3 : Headlamp High/Low-BeamChanger

j : LATCH System ChildRestraints

* : Malfunction Indicator Lamp

: : Oil Pressure

} : Power

/ : Remote Vehicle Start

> : Safety Belt Reminders

7 : Tire Pressure Monitor

d : Traction Control

M : Windshield Washer Fluid


vi Introduction

2 NOTES


In Brief 1-1

In Brief

Instrument PanelInstrument Panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-2

Initial Drive InformationInitial Drive Information . . . . . . . . 1-4Remote Keyless Entry (RKE)System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-4

Remote Vehicle Start . . . . . . . . . 1-4Door Locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-5Trunk Release . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-5Windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-5Seat Adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-6Second Row Seats . . . . . . . . . . . 1-8Heated Seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-8Head Restraint Adjustment . . . . 1-9Safety Belts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-9

Sensing System for PassengerAirbag . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-9

Mirror Adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-10Steering WheelAdjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-11

Interior Lighting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-11Exterior Lighting . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-12Windshield Wiper/Washer . . . . 1-12Climate Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-13Transmission . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-15

Vehicle FeaturesRadio(s) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-15Satellite Radio . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-17Portable Audio Devices(Auxiliary Input orUSB Port) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-17

Bluetooth® . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-17Steering Wheel Controls . . . . . 1-18

Cruise Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-18Driver InformationCenter (DIC) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-19

Power Outlets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-19

Performance and MaintenanceTraction ControlSystem (TCS) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-20

Electronic StabilityControl (ESC) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-20

Tire Pressure Monitor . . . . . . . . 1-20Tire Sealant andCompressor Kit . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-21

Engine Oil Life System . . . . . . 1-21Fuel E85 (85% Ethanol) . . . . . 1-21Driving for Better FuelEconomy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-21

Roadside AssistanceProgram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-22

OnStar® . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-23


1-2 In Brief

Instrument Panel


In Brief 1-3

A. Air Vents on page 8‑9.

B. Turn and Lane‐Change Lever.See Turn and Lane-ChangeSignals on page 6‑4.

C. Instrument Cluster on page 5‑9.

D. Windshield Wiper/Washer onpage 5‑3.

E. Instrument Panel Storage onpage 4‑1.

F. Infotainment on page 7‑1.

G. Instrument Panel IlluminationControl on page 6‑5.

H. Driver Compartment Storage.See Front Storage on page 4‑2.

I. Hood Release. See Hood onpage 10‑5.

J. Cruise Control on page 9‑32.

Driver Information Center (DIC)Buttons. See Driver InformationCenter (DIC) on page 5‑22.

K. Data Link Connector (DLC) (Outof View). See MalfunctionIndicator Lamp on page 5‑15.

L. Steering Wheel Adjustment onpage 5‑2.

M. Horn on page 5‑3.

N. Steering Wheel Controls onpage 5‑2 (If Equipped).

O. Ignition Positions on page 9‑16.

P. Climate Control Systems onpage 8‑1 (If Equipped).

Automatic Climate ControlSystem on page 8‑5 (IfEquipped) .

Q. Hazard Warning Flashers onpage 6‑4.

R. Shift Lever. See AutomaticTransmission on page 9‑24.

S. Front Storage on page 4‑2.

Power Outlets on page 5‑7.

T. Passenger Sensing System onpage 3‑32.

U. Traction Control System (TCS)on page 9‑29.

V. Glove Box on page 4‑1.


1-4 In Brief

Initial DriveInformationThis section provides a briefoverview about some of theimportant features that may or maynot be on your specific vehicle.

For more detailed information, referto each of the features which can befound later in this owner manual.

Remote Keyless Entry(RKE) SystemThe RKE transmitter is used toremotely lock and unlock the doorsfrom up to 60 m (195 ft) away fromthe vehicle.

Press K to unlock the driver door.Press again within five seconds tounlock all remaining doors.

Press Q to lock all doors.

Lock and unlock feedback can bepersonalized. See VehiclePersonalization on page 5‑30 foradditional information.

Press and holdV forapproximately one second to openthe trunk.

PressL and release to locate thevehicle.

PressL and hold for more thantwo seconds to sound the panicalarm.

PressL again to cancel the panicalarm.

See Keys on page 2‑2 and RemoteKeyless Entry (RKE) SystemOperation on page 2‑3.

Remote Vehicle StartWith this feature the engine can bestarted from outside of the vehicle.

Starting the Vehicle

1. Aim the RKE transmitter at thevehicle.

2. Press Q.3. Immediately after completing

Step 2, press and hold/ untilthe turn signal lamps flash.


In Brief 1-5

When the vehicle starts, the parkinglamps will turn on and remain on aslong as the engine is running. Thedoors will be locked and the climatecontrol system may come on.

The engine will continue to run for10 minutes. Repeat the steps for a10-minute time extension. Remotestart can be extended only once.

Canceling a Remote Start

To cancel a remote start:. Aim the RKE transmitter at the

vehicle and press and hold/until the parking lamps turn off.

. Turn on the hazard warningflashers.

. Turn the ignition on and thenback off.

See Remote Vehicle Start onpage 2‑5.

Door Locks

Manual Locks

From inside the vehicle slide thedoor lock knob to unlock or locka door.

Power Door Locks

On vehicles with power door locks,the switches are on the front doors.

" : Press to unlock the doors.

Q : Press to lock the doors.

For more information, see:. Door Locks on page 2‑7.. Power Door Locks on page 2‑7.

Trunk ReleaseIn addition to the trunk releasebutton on the RKE transmitter, thereis a remote releaseV buttonlocated on the driver door near themap pocket.

The trunk can only be opened whenthe vehicle is in P (Park), or whenthe ignition is off.

See Trunk on page 2‑9.

Windows

On vehicles with power windows,the switches are on the driver doorarmrest. Each passenger door has aswitch that controls only thatwindow.

Press the front of the switch to openthe window. Pull the switch up toclose it.

See Power Windows on page 2‑16.


1-6 In Brief

Seat Adjustment

Manual Seats

Seat Position

To adjust the seat position:

1. Lift the bar under the front of theseat cushion to unlock the seat.

2. Slide the seat to the desiredposition and release the bar.

3. Try to move the seat back andforth to make sure it is locked inplace.

Height Adjustment

If available, press and hold the topor bottom of the switch to raise orlower the seat. Release the switchwhen the desired height is reached.

See Seat Adjustment on page 3‑3.

Seatback Adjustment

To recline the seatback:

1. Lift the lever.

2. Move the seatback to thedesired position, and thenrelease the lever to lock theseatback in place.

3. Push and pull on the seatback tomake sure it is locked.


In Brief 1-7

To return the seatback to the uprightposition:

1. Lift the lever fully withoutapplying pressure to theseatback, and the seatback willreturn to the upright position.


See “Manual Reclining Seatbacks”under Reclining Seatbacks onpage 3‑5.

Power Seats

Seat Position

To adjust a power seat, if available:. Move the seat forward or

rearward by sliding the controlforward or rearward.

. Raise or lower the front or rearpart of the seat cushion bymoving the front or rear of thehorizontal control up or down.

. Raise or lower the entire seat bymoving the entire control upor down.

See Power Seat Adjustment onpage 3‑4.

Seatback Adjustment

To adjust a power seatback,if equipped:. Tilt the top of the control

rearward to recline.. Tilt the top of the control forward

to raise.

See “Power Reclining Seatbacks”under Reclining Seatbacks onpage 3‑5.


1-8 In Brief

Lumbar Adjustment

A. Increase Lumbar SupportControl

B. Decrease Lumbar SupportControl

If available, press the front (A) orrear (B) of the control to increase ordecrease lumbar support. Releasethe control when the desired level ofsupport is reached.

See Lumbar Adjustment onpage 3‑4.

Second Row SeatsWith this feature, either side of theseatback can be folded down formore cargo space. Before folding aseatback, make sure the front seatis not reclined. If it is, the rearseatback will not fold down allthe way.

To lower the rear seatback, pull upon the seatback strap while foldingthe seatback down. This allowsaccess to the trunk. To raise therear seatback pull the seatback upand make sure it latches.

Push and pull on the seatback to besure it is locked in position. Makesure that the safety belts areproperly stowed over the seatbackin all three positions.

See Rear Seats on page 3‑8 formore information.

Heated Seats

If available, press the top of theswitch to turn the heat feature on tothe high heat setting. The indicatorlight “2” will be lit.


In Brief 1-9

Press the top of the switch again togo to the low heat setting. Theindicator light “1” will be lit.

Press the bottom of the switch toturn the feature off.

The heated seats are canceledwhen the ignition is turned off.

For more information, see HeatedFront Seats on page 3‑7.

Head RestraintAdjustmentDo not drive until the head restraintsfor all occupants are installed andadjusted properly.

To achieve a comfortable seatingposition, change the seatbackrecline angle as little as necessarywhile keeping the seat and the headrestraint height in the properposition.

For more information see HeadRestraints on page 3‑2 and SeatAdjustment on page 3‑3.

Safety Belts

Refer to the following sections forimportant information on how to usesafety belts properly.. Safety Belts on page 3‑9.. How to Wear Safety Belts

Properly on page 3‑13.. Lap-Shoulder Belt on page 3‑18.. Lower Anchors and Tethers for

Children (LATCH System) onpage 3‑48.

Sensing System forPassenger AirbagThe passenger sensing system willturn off the right front passengerfrontal airbag under certainconditions. The driver airbags arenot affected by this.

The passenger airbag statusindicator will be visible on theinstrument panel when the vehicle isstarted.


1-10 In Brief

United States

Canada and Mexico

See Passenger Sensing System onpage 3‑32 for important information.

Mirror Adjustment

Exterior Mirrors

Controls for the outside powermirrors are located on thedriver door.

1. Move the selector switch locatedbelow the four-way control padto the left or right to chooseeither the driver side orpassenger side mirror.

2. Press one of the four arrowslocated on the control pad tomove the mirror to the desireddirection.

Keep the selector switch in thecenter position when not adjustingeither outside mirror.

See Power Mirrors on page 2‑14.

Interior Mirror

Vehicles with an automatic dimmingrearview mirror will automaticallyreduce the glare from theheadlamps of the vehicle behind.The dimming feature comes on andthe indicator light illuminates eachtime the ignition is turned to start.

See Manual Rearview Mirror onpage 2‑14.


In Brief 1-11

Steering WheelAdjustment

The lever is located on the left sideof the steering wheel column.

To adjust the steering wheel:

1. Pull the lever down.

2. Move the steering wheel upor down.

3. Pull or push the steering wheelcloser or away from you.

4. Pull the lever up to lock thesteering wheel in place.

Do not adjust the steering wheelwhile driving.

Interior LightingDome Lamps

The dome lamps come on when anydoor is opened. They turn off afterall the doors are closed.

To turn the dome lamps onmanually, turn the instrument panelbrightness knob, located on theinstrument panel to the left of thesteering column, clockwise to thefarthest position. The dome lampswill remain on whether a door isopened or closed.

Reading Lamps

The front reading lamps are locatedin the front overhead console. Therear reading lamps are near thedome lamp overhead near the rearpassenger seats.

For vehicles with front and/or rearreading lamps, press the lens toturn the lamp on and off, while thedoors are closed. These lampscome on automatically when anydoor is opened.

For more information on interiorlighting, see:. Instrument Panel Illumination

Control on page 6‑5.. Entry/Exit Lighting on page 6‑5.. Parade Dimming on page 6‑6.


1-12 In Brief

Exterior Lighting

P: Briefly turn to this position tomanually turn the automatic lampcontrol off or on.

In Canada, this position only workswhen a vehicle is in the P (Park)position. When the vehicle is putinto D (Drive) the lights come on.

AUTO: Automatically turns on theDaytime Running Lamps duringdaytime, and the headlamps,parking lamps, and taillamps atnight.

;: Manual operation of the parkinglamps and taillamps.

2: Manual operation of theheadlamps, parking lamps, andtaillamps.

For more information, see:. Exterior Lamp Controls on

page 6‑1.. Delayed Headlamps on

page 6‑3.. Daytime Running Lamps (DRL)

on page 6‑2.. Automatic Headlamp System on

page 6‑3.. Fog Lamps on page 6‑4.

Windshield Wiper/Washer

The windshield wiper lever islocated on the right side of thesteering column.

9: Turns the wipers off.

&: For intermittent or speedsensitive operation. While in thisposition, turn thex band up ordown to vary frequency.

The amount of delay time variesbetween wiping cycles due to thedelay setting selected or the speedof the vehicle. As vehicle speed isincreased or decreased, the wiperinterval also increases ordecreases.

6 : Slow wipes.

1 : Fast wipes.

8: Use for a single wiping cycle.

Windshield Washer: Press thebutton at the end of the lever untilthe washers begin.

See Windshield Wiper/Washer onpage 5‑3.


In Brief 1-13

Climate Controls

A. Fan Control

B. Air Recirculation

C. Temperature Control

D. Outside Air

E. Air Delivery Mode Control

F. Air Conditioning

G. Rear Window Defogger

See Climate Control Systems onpage 8‑1 (If Equipped).


1-14 In Brief

Automatic Climate Control System (If Equipped)

A. Fan Control

B. Air Conditioning

C. Air Recirculation

D. Outside Air

E. Rear Window Defogger

F. Air Delivery Mode Control

G. Display

H. Temperature Control

See Automatic Climate ControlSystem on page 8‑5 (If Equipped).


In Brief 1-15

Transmission

Driver Shift Control (DSC)

This position allows you to changegears similar to a manualtransmission. To use this feature:

1. Move the shift lever fromD (Drive) rearward toM (Manual).

2. Press the + (plus) end of thebutton on the side of the shifterto upshift, or push the − (minus)end of the button to downshift.

See Manual Mode on page 9‑25.

Vehicle Features

Radio(s)

Radio with CD (MP3) and USB Port shown

O : Press to turn the system onand off. Turn to increase ordecrease the volume.

BAND: Press to choose betweenFM, AM, or XM™, if equipped.

f : Select radio stations.


1-16 In Brief

© ¨ : Seek or scan stations.

4 : For vehicles with XM, MP3,WMA, or RDS features, press todisplay additional text informationrelated to the current FM-RDS orXM station; or CD, MP3, WMAsong. Song title information will bedisplayed on the top line of thedisplay while the artist informationwill be displayed on the bottom line,if the information is available duringXM, CD, MP3, or WMA playback.When information is not available,"No Info" displays.

For more information about theseand other radio features, seeInfotainment on page 7‑1 andOperation on page 7‑3.

Storing a Favorite Station

Depending on which radio thevehicle has, radio stations arestored as either favorites or presets.

For radios with a FAV button, amaximum of 36 stations can bestored as favorites using the sixsoftkeys located below the radiostation frequency tabs and by usingthe radio FAV button. Press FAV togo through up to six pages offavorites, each having six favoritestations available per page. Eachpage of favorites can contain anycombination of AM, FM, or XM™stations.

For radios without a FAV button, upto 18 stations (6 FM1, 6 FM2, and6 AM), can be programmed on the6 numbered buttons.

See Operation on page 7‑3.

Setting the Clock

To set the time and date for theRadio with CD (MP3) and USB portor Radio with a Single CD (MP3)player:

1. Turn the ignition key to ACC/ACCESSORY or ON/RUN.

2. Press O to turn the radio on.

3. Press H and the HR, MIN, MM,DD, YYYY (hour, minute, month,day, and year) displays.

4. Press the softkey located belowany one of the tabs that youwant to change.

5. Increase or decrease the time ordate by turning f clockwise orcounterclockwise.

For detailed instructions on settingthe clock for your specific audiosystem, see Clock on page 5‑5.


In Brief 1-17

Satellite RadioXM is a satellite radio service basedin the 48 contiguous United Statesand 10 Canadian provinces.XM satellite radio has a widevariety of programming andcommercial-free music, coast tocoast, and in digital-quality sound.

A fee is required to receive theXM service.

For more information, refer to:. www.xmradio.com or call

1-800-929-2100 (U.S.). www.xmradio.ca or call

1-877-438-9677 (Canada)

See Satellite Radio on page 7‑10.

Portable Audio Devices(Auxiliary Input orUSB Port)This vehicle may have an 3.5 mm(1/8 in) auxiliary input jack and aUSB port, located on the audiofaceplate. Some portable audiodevices such as iPods®, MP3players, and USB storage devicescan be connected to the vehicleusing a 3.5 mm (1/8 in) cable or aUSB cable.

For more information, see AuxiliaryDevices on page 7‑20.

Bluetooth®

For vehicles with a Bluetoothsystem, it allows users with aBluetooth‐enabled cell phone tomake and receive hands-free callsusing the vehicle’s audio systemand controls.

The Bluetooth‐enabled cell phonemust be paired with the Bluetoothsystem before it can be used in thevehicle. Not all phones will supportall functions. For more information,visit www.gm.com/bluetooth.

For more information, see Bluetoothon page 7‑25.


1-18 In Brief

Steering Wheel Controls

If equipped, some audio controlscan be adjusted using the controlson the right side of the steeringwheel.

e + / e : Increases or decreasesvolume.

w /xc : Press to change radiostations, select tracks on a CD, or toselect tracks and navigate folderson an iPod® or USB device.

b g : Press to silence the vehiclespeakers only. Press again to turnthe sound on. Press and hold longerthan two seconds to interact withthe OnStar® or Bluetooth systems.

xc : Press to reject anincoming call, or to end a call.

For more information, see SteeringWheel Controls on page 5‑2.

Cruise Control

The cruise control buttons arelocated on the left side of thesteering wheel.

J: Press to turn the cruise controlsystem on and off.

RES+: Press briefly to make thevehicle resume a previously setspeed or press and hold toaccelerate.

SET−: Press to set the speed andactivate cruise control or make thevehicle decelerate.

For more information, see CruiseControl on page 9‑32.


In Brief 1-19

Driver InformationCenter (DIC)The DIC display is located at thebottom of the instrument panelcluster. It shows the status of manyvehicle systems and enablesaccess to the personalization menu.

The DIC buttons are located on theleft side of the steering wheel.

INFO: Press to scroll through thevehicle information displays.

r : Press to reset some vehicleinformation displays, select apersonalization setting,or acknowledge a warningmessage.

For more information, see DriverInformation Center (DIC) onpage 5‑22.

Vehicle Personalization

Some vehicle features can beprogrammed by using the DICbuttons on the left side of thesteering wheel. These featuresinclude:. Oil Life Reset. Units. RKE Lock and Unlock Feedback. Door Lock and Unlock Settings. Language

See Vehicle Personalization onpage 5‑30.

Power OutletsAccessory power outlets can beused to plug in electrical equipment,such as a cell phone or MP3 player.

There are two accessory poweroutlets. One accessory power outletis located inside the storage binbelow the climate controls and theother outlet is on the rear of thecenter storage console.

Remove the cover to access andreplace when not in use.

See Power Outlets on page 5‑7.


1-20 In Brief

Performance andMaintenance

Traction ControlSystem (TCS)The traction control system limitswheel spin. The system turns onautomatically every time the vehicleis started.. To turn off traction control, press

and releaset on the

instrument panel. F illuminatesand the appropriate DICmessage is displayed. See RideControl System Messages onpage 5‑27.

. Press and release the buttonagain to turn on traction control.

For more information, see TractionControl System (TCS) onpage 9‑29.

Electronic StabilityControl (ESC)The Electronic Stability Controlsystem assists with directionalcontrol of the vehicle in difficultdriving conditions. The system turnson automatically every time thevehicle is started.. To turn off both traction control

and Electronic Stability Control,press and holdt until Filluminates and the appropriateDIC message is displayed. SeeRide Control System Messageson page 5‑27.

. Press and release the buttonagain to turn on both systems.

For more information, see ElectronicStability Control (ESC) onpage 9‑31.

Tire Pressure MonitorThis vehicle may have a TirePressure Monitor System (TPMS).

The TPMS warning light alerts youto a significant loss in pressure ofone of the vehicle's tires. If thewarning light comes on, stop assoon as possible and inflate thetires to the recommended pressureshown on the Tire and LoadingInformation label. See Vehicle LoadLimits on page 9‑12. The warninglight will remain on until the tirepressure is corrected.

During cooler conditions, the low tirepressure warning light may appearwhen the vehicle is first started andthen turn off. This may be an early


In Brief 1-21

indicator that the tire pressures aregetting low and the tires need to beinflated to the proper pressure.

The TPMS does not replace normalmonthly tire maintenance. It is thedriver’s responsibility to maintaincorrect tire pressures.

See Tire Pressure Monitor Systemon page 10‑53.

Tire Sealant andCompressor KitThis vehicle may come with a jackand spare tire or a tire sealant andcompressor kit. The kit can be usedto temporarily seal small puncturesin the tread area of the tire.

See Tire Sealant and CompressorKit on page 10‑67 for completeoperating information.

If the vehicle came with a jack andspare tire, see If a Tire Goes Flat onpage 10‑65.

Engine Oil Life SystemThe engine oil life system calculatesengine oil life based on vehicle useand displays the “Change Oil Soon”DIC message when it is necessaryto change the engine oil and filter.The oil life system should be resetto 100% only following an oilchange.

Resetting the Oil Life System

1. Turn the ignition to ON/RUN,with the engine off.

2. Press and hold the DIC INFOand reset buttons, on the leftside of the steering wheel,at the same time to enter thepersonalization menu. The “OilLife Reset” message displays.

3. Press and hold the reset buttonuntil the DIC display shows“Acknowledged.”

4. Turn the key to LOCK/OFF.

See Engine Oil Life System onpage 10‑13.

Fuel E85 (85% Ethanol)Vehicles that have a FlexFuel badgeand a yellow fuel cap can use eitherunleaded gasoline or ethanol fuelcontaining up to 85% ethanol (E85).See Fuel E85 (85% Ethanol) onpage 9‑37. For all other vehicles,use only the unleaded gasolinedescribed under RecommendedFuel on page 9‑35.

Driving for Better FuelEconomyDriving habits can affect fuelmileage. Here are some driving tipsto get the best fuel economypossible.. Avoid fast starts and accelerate

smoothly.. Brake gradually and avoid

abrupt stops.. Avoid idling the engine for long

periods of time.


1-22 In Brief

. When road and weatherconditions are appropriate, usecruise control.

. Always follow posted speedlimits or drive more slowly whenconditions require.

. Keep vehicle tires properlyinflated.

. Combine several trips into asingle trip.

. Replace the vehicle's tires withthe same TPC Spec numbermolded into the tire's sidewallnear the size.

. Follow recommended scheduledmaintenance.

Roadside AssistanceProgramU.S.: 1-800-243-8872

TTY Users (U.S.): 1-888-889-2438

Canada: 1-800-268-6800

Mexico: 01-800-466-0800

As the owner of a new Chevrolet,you are automatically enrolled in theRoadside Assistance program.

See Roadside Assistance Program(U.S. and Canada) on page 13‑8 orRoadside Assistance Program(Mexico) on page 13‑10 for moreinformation.

Roadside Assistance and OnStar(U.S. and Canada)

If you have an active OnStarsubscription, press theQ buttonand the current GPS location will besent to an OnStar advisor who willassess your problem, contactRoadside Assistance, and relayyour exact location to get the helpyou need.

Online Owner Center (U.S. andCanada)

The Online Owner Center is acomplimentary service that includesonline service reminders, vehiclemaintenance tips, online ownermanual, special privileges,and more.

Sign up today at:www.chevyownercenter.com(U.S.) or www.gm.ca (Canada).


In Brief 1-23

OnStar®

For vehicles with an active OnStarsubscription, OnStar uses severalinnovative technologies and liveAdvisors to provide a wide range ofsafety, security, navigation,diagnostics, and calling services.

Automatic Crash Response

In a crash, built‐in sensors canautomatically alert an OnStarAdvisor who is immediatelyconnected to the vehicle to see ifyou need help.

How OnStar Service Works

Q : Push this blue button toconnect to a specially trainedOnStar Advisor to verify youraccount information and to answerquestions.

] : Push this red emergencybutton to get priority help fromspecially trained OnStar EmergencyAdvisors.

X : Push this button for hands‐free,voice‐activated calling and to givevoice commands for Hands‐FreeCalling and Turn‐by‐TurnNavigation.

Automatic Crash Response,Emergency Services, Crisis Assist,Stolen Vehicle Assistance, VehicleDiagnostics, Remote Door Unlock,Roadside Assistance, Turn‐by‐TurnNavigation, and Hands‐Free Callingare available on most vehicles. Notall OnStar services are available onall vehicles. For more information,see the OnStar Owner's Guide;visit www.onstar.com (U.S.) orwww.onstar.ca (Canada); contactOnStar at 1-888-4-ONSTAR(1‐888‐466‐7827) or TTY1‐877‐248‐2080; or push theQ button to speak with an OnStarAdvisor 24 hours a day, 7 daysa week.

For a full description of OnStarservices and system limitations, seethe OnStar Owner's Guide in theglove box.

OnStar service is subject to theOnStar Terms and Conditionsincluded in the OnStar GloveBox Kit.

OnStar service requires wirelesscommunication networks and theGlobal Positioning System (GPS)satellite network. Not all OnStarservices are available everywhereor on all vehicles at all times.

OnStar service can’t work unlessthe vehicle is in a place whereOnStar has an agreement with awireless service provider for servicein that area, and the wirelessservice provider has coverage,network capacity, reception, andtechnology compatible with OnStarservice. Service involving locationinformation about the vehicle can’twork unless GPS signals areavailable, unobstructed, andcompatible with the OnStar


1-24 In Brief

hardware. The vehicle has to have aworking electrical system andadequate battery power for theOnStar equipment to operate.OnStar service may not work if theOnStar equipment isn’t properlyinstalled or you haven’t maintainedit and the vehicle is in good workingorder and in compliance with allgovernment regulations. If you try toadd, connect, or modify anyequipment or software in thevehicle, OnStar service may notwork. Other problems OnStar can’tcontrol may prevent service to you,such as hills, tall buildings, tunnels,weather, electrical system designand architecture of the vehicle,damage to important parts of thevehicle in a crash, or wireless phonenetwork congestion or jamming.

See Radio Frequency Statement onpage 13‑19 for informationregarding Part 15 of the FederalCommunications Commission (FCC)rules and Industry CanadaStandards RSS-210/220/310.

OnStar Steering WheelControls

This vehicle may have a Talk/Mutebutton that can be used to interactwith OnStar Hands-Free calling.See Steering Wheel Controls onpage 5‑2 for more information.

On some vehicles, the Talk buttoncan be used to dial numbers intovoice mail systems, or to dial phoneextensions. See the OnStar Owner'sGuide for more information.

Your Responsibility

Increase the volume of the radio ifthe OnStar Advisor cannot beheard.

If the light next to the OnStarbuttons is red, the system may notbe functioning properly. Push theQ button and request a vehiclediagnostic check. If the lightappears clear (no light appears),your OnStar subscription hasexpired and all services have beendeactivated. Push theQ button toconfirm that the OnStar equipmentis active.


Keys, Doors and Windows 2-1

Keys, Doors andWindows

Keys and LocksKeys . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-2Remote Keyless Entry (RKE)System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-2

Remote Keyless Entry (RKE)System Operation . . . . . . . . . . . 2-3

Remote Vehicle Start . . . . . . . . . 2-5Door Locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-7Power Door Locks . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-7Door Ajar Reminder . . . . . . . . . . . 2-7Delayed Locking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-8Automatic Door Locks . . . . . . . . . 2-8Lockout Protection . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-8Safety Locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-8

DoorsTrunk . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-9

Vehicle SecurityVehicle Security . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-11Anti-Theft Alarm System . . . . . 2-11Immobilizer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-12Immobilizer Operation . . . . . . . 2-12

Exterior MirrorsConvex Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-13Power Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-14Heated Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-14

Interior MirrorsManual Rearview Mirror . . . . . . 2-14Automatic Dimming RearviewMirror . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-14

WindowsWindows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-15Power Windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-16Sun Visors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-18

RoofSunroof . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-18


2-2 Keys, Doors and Windows

Keys and Locks

Keys

{ WARNING

Leaving children in a vehicle withthe ignition key is dangerous formany reasons. Children or otherscould be badly injured or evenkilled. They could operate thepower windows or other controlsor even make the vehicle move.The windows will function with thekeys in the ignition and childrencould be seriously injured or killedif caught in the path of a closingwindow. Do not leave the keys ina vehicle with children.

The key can be used for the ignitionand all locks.

The key has a bar-coded key tagthat the dealer or qualified locksmithcan use to make new keys. Storethis information in a safe place, notin your vehicle.

Notice: If the keys get locked inthe vehicle, it may have to bedamaged to get them out. Alwayscarry a spare key.

If you are locked out of your vehicle,contact Roadside Assistance. SeeRoadside Assistance Program (U.S.and Canada) on page 13‑8 orRoadside Assistance Program(Mexico) on page 13‑10.

Remote Keyless Entry(RKE) SystemSee Radio Frequency Statement onpage 13‑19 for informationregarding Part 15 of the FederalCommunications Commission (FCC)rules and Industry CanadaStandards RSS-210/220/310.

If there is a decrease in the RKEoperating range:. Check the distance. The

transmitter may be too far fromthe vehicle.

. Check the location. Othervehicles or objects may beblocking the signal.



. Check the transmitter's battery.See “Battery Replacement” laterin this section.

. If the transmitter is still notworking correctly, see yourdealer or a qualified technicianfor service.

Remote Keyless Entry(RKE) System OperationThe Remote Keyless Entry (RKE)transmitter functions work up to60 m (195 feet) away from thevehicle.

Keep in mind that other conditions,such as those previously stated, canimpact the performance of thetransmitter.

With Remote Start Shown, WithoutRemote Start Similar

/ (Remote Vehicle Start): Forvehicles with this feature, press tooperate the remote start feature.See Remote Vehicle Start onpage 2‑5 for additional information.

Q (Lock): Press to lock all thedoors. The interior lamps turn offafter all of the doors are closed.If enabled through the DriverInformation Center (DIC), theremote lock feedback can beprogrammed to have the horn chirpand/or the turn signals flash to

confirm locking. See “LOCK HORN”and “LIGHT FLASH” under VehiclePersonalization on page 5‑30 formore information.

Pressing Q may also arm theanti-theft alarm system. SeeAnti-Theft Alarm System onpage 2‑11.

K (Unlock): Press once to unlockthe driver door. Press K againwithin five seconds to unlock allremaining doors. The interior lampsturn on and stay on for 20 secondsor until the ignition is turned on.If enabled through the DIC, theremote unlock feedback can beprogrammed to have the horn chirpand/or the turn signals flash toconfirm unlocking. See “UNLOCKHORN” and “LIGHT FLASH” underVehicle Personalization onpage 5‑30 for more information.

The high‐beam headlamps, parkinglamps, and back‐up lamps maycome on each time K is pressed.



See “EXT (Exterior) LIGHTS” underVehicle Personalization onpage 5‑30 for additional information.

Pressing K on the RKE transmitterdisarms the anti-theft alarm system.See Anti-Theft Alarm System onpage 2‑11.

V (Remote Trunk Release):Press and hold for aboutone second to unlock the trunk. Thetrunk can be opened with thetransmitter when the vehicle speedis less than 3 km/h (2 mph) or whenthe ignition is off.

L (Vehicle Locator/PanicAlarm): Press and release tolocate the vehicle. The horn soundsthree times and the headlamps andturn signals flash three times.

Press and holdL for more thantwo seconds to initiate the panicalarm. The horn sounds and theheadlamps and turn signals flash for30 seconds. PressL again tocancel the panic alarm.

Programming Transmitters tothe Vehicle

Only RKE transmitters programmedto the vehicle will work. If atransmitter is lost or stolen, areplacement can be purchased andprogrammed through your dealer.When the replacement transmitter isprogrammed to the vehicle, allremaining transmitters must also beprogrammed. Any lost or stolentransmitters no longer work once thenew transmitter is programmed.Each vehicle can have up to fourtransmitters programmed to it.

Battery Replacement

Replace the battery if the KEY FOBBATT (Battery) LOW messagedisplays in the DIC. See “KEY FOBBATT (Battery) LOW” under Keyand Lock Messages on page 5‑27for additional information.

Notice: When replacing thebattery, do not touch any of thecircuitry on the transmitter. Staticfrom your body could damage thetransmitter.

To replace the battery:

1. Separate the transmitter with aflat, thin object inserted into thenotch on the side.

2. Remove the old battery. Do notuse a metal object.



3. Insert the new battery, positiveside facing up. Replace with aCR2032 or equivalent battery.

4. Snap the transmitter backtogether.

Remote Vehicle StartYour vehicle may have a remotestarting feature that allows you tostart the engine from outside thevehicle. It may also start thevehicle's heating or air conditioningsystems and rear window defogger.When the remote start system isactive and the vehicle has anautomatic climate control system, itwill automatically regulate the insidetemperature. Normal operation ofthese systems will return after theignition key is turned to ON/RUN.

Laws in some communities mayrestrict the use of remote starters.For example, some laws mayrequire a person using remote startto have the vehicle in view when

doing so. Check local regulations forany requirements on remote startingof vehicles.

Do not use the remote start featureif your vehicle is low on fuel. Yourvehicle may run out of fuel.

If your vehicle has the remote startfeature, the RKE transmitterfunctions will have an increasedrange of operation. However, therange may be less while the vehicleis running.

There are other conditions whichcan affect the performance of thetransmitter, see Remote KeylessEntry (RKE) System on page 2‑2 foradditional information.

/ (Remote Start): This button willbe on the RKE transmitter if thevehicle has remote start.

To start the vehicle using the remotestart feature:

1. Aim the transmitter at thevehicle.

2. Press and release thetransmitter's lock button, thenimmediately press and hold thetransmitter's remote start buttonfor about four seconds or untilthe vehicle's turn signal lampsflash. The doors will lock.

When the vehicle starts, theparking lamps turn on andremain on while the engine isrunning.

The remote start feature providestwo separate starts per ignitioncycle, each with 10 minutes ofengine running time, or one startwith a time extension. The first startmust expire or be canceled to gettwo separate 10 minute starts.



If it is the first remote start since thevehicle has been driven, repeat theprevious steps, while the engine isstill running, to extend the enginerunning time by 10 minutes from thetime you repeat the steps for remotestarting. The remote start runningtime can be extended one time andonly after the first remote start.

After entering the vehicle during aremote start, insert and turn the keyto ON/RUN to drive the vehicle.

The engine will shut offautomatically after 10 minutes,unless a time extension has beendone or the vehicle's key is insertedinto the ignition switch and turned toON/RUN.

To manually shut off a remote start,do any of the following.. Aim the RKE transmitter at the

vehicle and press and releasethe remote start button.

. Turn on the hazard warningflashers.

. Turn the ignition switch out ofLOCK/OFF position and thenback to LOCK/OFF.

The parking lamps turn off toindicate the engine is off.

After the engine has been startedtwo times, or one time with a timeextension, the vehicle's ignitionmust be turned to ON/RUN usingthe key before the remote startprocedure can be used again. SeeIgnition Positions on page 9‑16 forinformation regarding the ignitionpositions on your vehicle.

The remote vehicle start feature willnot operate if any of the followoccur:. The vehicle's key is in the

ignition.. The vehicle's hood is open.. The hazard warning flashers

are on.. The check engine light is on.

See Malfunction Indicator Lampon page 5‑15.

. The engine coolant temperatureis too high.

. The oil pressure is low.

. Two remote vehicle starts,or one start with a timeextension, have already beenprovided for that ignition cycle.

Remote Start Ready

If your vehicle does not have theremote vehicle start feature, it mayhave the remote start ready feature.This feature allows your dealer toadd the manufacturer's remotevehicle start feature.

See your dealer if you would like toadd the manufacturer's remotevehicle start feature to your vehicle.



Door Locks

{ WARNING

Unlocked doors can bedangerous.

. Passengers, especiallychildren, can easily open thedoors and fall out of a movingvehicle. When a door islocked, the handle will notopen it. The chance of beingthrown out of the vehicle in acrash is increased if thedoors are not locked. So, allpassengers should wearsafety belts properly and thedoors should be lockedwhenever the vehicle isdriven.

. Young children who get intounlocked vehicles may beunable to get out. A child canbe overcome by extreme heatand can suffer permanent

(Continued)

WARNING (Continued)

injuries or even death fromheat stroke. Always lock thevehicle whenever leaving it.

. Outsiders can easily enterthrough an unlocked doorwhen you slow down or stopthe vehicle. Locking the doorscan help prevent this fromhappening.

There are several ways to lock andunlock your vehicle.

From the outside, turn the key in thedriver's door lock counterclockwiseto lock the door and clockwise tounlock it or use the remote keylessentry transmitter.

From the inside, move the manuallock control on the door or use thepower door lock switch.

Power Door LocksWith power door locks, the switcheson the front doors can be used tolock and unlock the vehicle.

K (Unlock): Press to unlock thedoors.

Q (Lock): Remove the key fromthe ignition and press to lock thedoors.

Door Ajar ReminderA chime will sound and the DOORAJAR message will display if one ofthe doors is not fully closed. Thishappens when the ignition is on andthe shift lever is moved out ofP (Park) or N (Neutral). See DoorAjar Messages on page 5‑26.



Delayed LockingThis feature will delay the actuallocking of the doors and arming ofthe theft-deterrent system forfive seconds when the power doorlock switch or remote keyless entrytransmitter is used to lock thevehicle.

If any door is open when locking thevehicle, three chimes will soundsignaling that the delayed lockingfeature is active. Five seconds afterthe last door is closed, all of thedoors will lock. To cancel the delayand lock the doors immediately,press the lock button on the remotekeyless entry transmitter or thepower door lock switch a secondtime. The theft deterrent system willarm after 30 seconds.

Automatic Door LocksThe vehicle is programmed to lockall doors automatically when thefollowing are met:. All doors are closed.. The ignition is on.. The vehicle is shifted out of

P (Park).

This feature cannot be disabled.

All doors will unlock when thevehicle is shifted into P (Park).

The power door unlock function canbe programmed through promptsdisplayed on the Driver InformationCenter (DIC). See VehiclePersonalization on page 5‑30.

Lockout ProtectionIf you press the power door lockswitch when the key is in theignition and any door is open, all thedoors will lock and then the driver'sdoor will unlock. Be sure to removethe key from the ignition whenlocking your vehicle.

If the remote keyless entrytransmitter is used to lock the doorswhile the key is in the ignition, achime will sound three times. Alldoors will then lock.

Safety LocksThe vehicle has rear door securitylocks to prevent passengers fromopening the rear doors from theinside.



Open the rear doors to access thesecurity locks on the inside edge ofeach door.

To set the locks, insert a key intothe slot and turn it to the horizontalposition. The door can only beopened from the outside with thedoor unlocked. To return the door tonormal operation, turn the slot to thevertical position.

Doors

TrunkPress the trunk release button onthe Remote Keyless Entry (RKE)transmitter for one second to openthe trunk from the outside.

{ WARNING

Exhaust gases can enter thevehicle if it is driven with theliftgate, trunk/hatch open, or withany objects that pass through theseal between the body and thetrunk/hatch or liftgate. Engineexhaust contains CarbonMonoxide (CO) which cannot beseen or smelled. It can causeunconsciousness and even death.

(Continued)

WARNING (Continued)

If the vehicle must be driven withthe liftgate, or trunk/hatch open:

. Close all of the windows.

. Fully open the air outlets onor under the instrumentpanel.

. Adjust the Climate Controlsystem to a setting thatbrings in only outside air andset the fan speed to thehighest setting. See ClimateControl System in the Index.

. If the vehicle is equipped witha power liftgate, disable thepower liftgate function.

For more information aboutcarbon monoxide, see EngineExhaust on page 9‑22.



Remote Trunk Release

Press the button located on thedriver door near the map pocket toopen the trunk.

The trunk can only be opened whilethe vehicle is in P (Park) or whenthe ignition is off.

Close the trunk by pulling on thehandle.

Emergency Trunk ReleaseHandle

Notice: Do not use theemergency trunk release handleas a tie-down or anchor pointwhen securing items in the trunkas it could damage the handle.The emergency trunk releasehandle is only intended to aid aperson trapped in a latched trunk,enabling them to open the trunkfrom the inside.

There is a glow-in-the-darkemergency trunk release handlelocated inside the trunk on the trunklatch. This handle glows followingexposure to light. Pull the releasehandle up to open the trunk from theinside.



Vehicle SecurityThis vehicle has theft-deterrentfeatures; however, they do not makeit impossible to steal.

Anti-Theft Alarm SystemYour vehicle may have an anti-theftalarm system.

Arming the System

With the ignition off, press theRemote Keyless Entry (RKE)transmitter lock button to arm thesystem.

The system will arm 30 secondsafter all the doors are closed,or 60 seconds with any door open.

If you press the lock button on thetransmitter a second time while allthe doors are closed, the system willarm immediately. The system willstill arm in 60 seconds if a door isopen. When the open door isclosed, the system will arm.

The security light, located on theinstrument panel cluster, comes onto indicate that arming has beeninitiated. Once the system is armed,the security light flashes once everythree seconds.

If the security light is flashing twiceper second, this means that a dooris open.

If the system is armed and the keyis used to unlock the vehicle, thealarm will be activated.

If you do not want to arm thesystem, lock the vehicle with themanual lock knob on the doors orwith the inside power door lockswitches.

The alarm will sound and theexterior lights will flash if any door isopened while armed.

Disarming the System

To disarm the system:. Press the RKE transmitter

unlock button.. Turn the ignition to ON/RUN.

Once the system is disarmed, thesecurity light will stop flashing.

How the System Alarm isActivated

To activate the system if it is armed:. Open the driver's door or trunk.

A ten second pre-alarm chirpwill sound followed by athirty second full alarm of hornand lights.

. Open any other door. A fullalarm of horn and lights willimmediately sound forthirty seconds.

. Open the hood. If the vehiclehas the remote start feature, itwill activate the full alarm.



When an alarm event has finished,the system will re-arm itselfautomatically.

How to Turn Off the SystemAlarm

To turn off the system alarm:. Press the lock button on the

RKE transmitter. The system willthen re-arm itself.

. Press the unlock button on theRKE transmitter. This will alsodisarm the system.

. Insert the key in the ignition andturn it on. This will also disarmthe system.

How to Detect a TamperCondition

If three chirps are heard when theunlock or lock button is pressed onthe RKE transmitter, it means thatthe system alarm was previouslytriggered.

ImmobilizerSee Radio Frequency Statement onpage 13‑19 for informationregarding Part 15 of the FederalCommunications Commission (FCC)rules and Industry CanadaStandards RSS-210/220/310.

Immobilizer OperationThis vehicle has a passivetheft-deterrent system.

The system does not have to bemanually armed or disarmed.

The vehicle is automaticallyimmobilized when the key isremoved from the ignition.

The system is automaticallydisarmed when the vehicle isstarted with the correct key. The keyuses a transponder that matches animmobilizer control unit in thevehicle and automatically disarms

the system. Only the correct keystarts the vehicle. The vehicle maynot start if the key is damaged.

The security light, located in theinstrument panel cluster, comes onif there is a problem with arming ordisarming the theft-deterrentsystem.

When trying to start the vehicle, thesecurity light comes on briefly whenthe ignition is turned on.

If the engine does not start and thesecurity light stays on there is aproblem with the system. Turn theignition off and try again.



If the engine still does not start, andthe key appears to be undamagedor the light continues to stay on, tryanother ignition key. If the enginedoes not start with the other key, thevehicle needs service. If the vehicledoes start, the first key may bedamaged. See your dealer who canservice the theft-deterrent systemand have a new key made.

It is possible for the theft-deterrentsystem decoder to learn thetransponder value of a new orreplacement key. Up to 10 keys canbe programmed for the vehicle. Thefollowing procedure is forprogramming additional keys only.

To program the new key:

1. Verify that the new key has a 1stamped on it.

2. Insert the already programmedkey in the ignition and start theengine. If the engine will notstart, see your dealer for service.

3. After the engine has started, turnthe key to LOCK/OFF, andremove the key.

4. Insert the key to be programmedand turn it to ON/RUN withinfive seconds of the original keybeing turned to LOCK/OFF inStep 3.

The security light will turn offonce the key has beenprogrammed. It may not beapparent that the security lightwent on due to how quickly thekey is programmed.

5. Repeat Steps 1 through 4 ifadditional keys are to beprogrammed.

Do not leave the key or device thatdisarms or deactivates the theftdeterrent system in the vehicle.

Exterior Mirrors

Convex Mirrors

{ WARNING

A convex mirror can make things,like other vehicles, look fartheraway than they really are. If youcut too sharply into the right lane,you could hit a vehicle on theright. Check the inside mirror orglance over your shoulder beforechanging lanes.

The passenger side mirror is convexshaped. A convex mirror's surface iscurved so more can be seen fromthe driver seat.



Power Mirrors

Controls for the outside powermirrors are located on thedriver door.

To adjust the mirrors:

1. Move the selector switch locatedbelow the four-way control padto the left or right to chooseeither the driver side orpassenger side mirror.

2. Press one of the four arrowslocated on the control pad tomove the mirror to the desireddirection.

3. Adjust each outside mirror sothat a little of the vehicle and thearea behind it can be seen.

Keep the selector switch in thecenter position when not adjustingeither outside mirror.

Manually fold the mirrors inward toprevent damage when goingthrough an automatic car wash. Tofold, push the mirror toward thevehicle. Push the mirror outward, toreturn to its original position.

Heated MirrorsFor vehicles with heated mirrors:

< (Rear Defogger): Press to heatthe mirrors.

See “Rear Window Defogger” underAutomatic Climate Control Systemon page 8‑5 for more information.

Interior Mirrors

Manual Rearview MirrorHold the inside rearview mirror inthe center to move it for a clearerview of behind your vehicle. Adjustthe mirror to avoid glare from theheadlamps behind. Push the tabforward for daytime use and pull itfor nighttime use.

Vehicles with OnStar® have threeadditional control buttons located atthe bottom of the mirror. See yourdealer for more information on thesystem and how to subscribe toOnStar®. See the OnStar® ownerguide for more information about theservices OnStar® provides.

Automatic DimmingRearview MirrorThe vehicle may have an automaticdimming inside rearview mirror witha compass display and OnStar®

controls. See your dealer for moreinformation on the system and how



to subscribe to OnStar®. See theOnStar® owner's guide for moreinformation about the servicesOnStar® provides.

See Compass on page 5‑4 for moreinformation.

O (On/Off): Press to turn thedimming feature on or off.

Automatic Dimming MirrorOperation

Automatic dimming reduces theglare of lights from behind thevehicle. The dimming feature comeson and the indicator light illuminateseach time the vehicle is started.

Cleaning the Mirror

Do not spray glass cleaner directlyon the mirror. Use a soft toweldampened with water.

Windows

{ WARNING

Leaving children, helpless adults,or pets in a vehicle with thewindows closed is dangerous.They can be overcome by theextreme heat and sufferpermanent injuries or even deathfrom heat stroke. Never leave achild, a helpless adult, or a petalone in a vehicle, especially withthe windows closed in warm orhot weather.

The vehicle aerodynamics aredesigned to improve fuel economyperformance. This may result in apulsing sound when either rearwindow is down and the frontwindows are up. To reduce thesound, open either a front windowor the sunroof (if equipped).



Power Windows

The power window switches arelocated on the armrest on thedriver's door. In addition, there is aswitch on each passenger door.

Express-Down Window

The driver window has anexpress-down feature. This switch islabeled AUTO. Press the front allthe way down and release, toautomatically lower.

To stop the window while it islowering, pull the front of the switchmomentarily. To raise the window,pull and hold the front of the switch.

Express-Up Window

On windows with this feature, pullthe switch up to the second positionand release the switch to activatethe express-up feature. To stop thewindow as it is going up, pull up orpress down briefly on the switchagain.

Programming the PowerWindows

If the battery on the vehicle hasbeen recharged, disconnected,or is not working, the driverpower window will need to bere-programmed for the express-upfeature to work. Replace orrecharge the vehicle's batterybefore reprogramming.

To program the driver window, followthese steps:

1. With the ignition in ACC/ACCESSORY, ON/RUN,or when Retained AccessoryPower (RAP) is active, close alldoors.

2. Press and hold the powerwindow switch until the windowis fully open.

3. Pull the power window switch upuntil the window is fully closed.

4. Continue holding the switch upfor approximately two secondsafter the window is completelyclosed.

The window is now reprogrammed.



Express Window Anti-PinchFeature

If any object is in the path of thewindow when the express‐up isactive, the window stops at theobstruction and auto‐reverse to apreset factory position. Weatherconditions such as severe icingmay also cause the window toauto‐reverse. The window returnsto normal operation once theobstruction or condition is removed.

Express Window Anti‐PinchOverride

{ WARNING

If express override is activated,the window will not reverseautomatically. You or others couldbe injured and the window couldbe damaged. Before you useexpress override, make sure thatall people and obstructions areclear of the window path.

In an emergency, the anti‐pinchfeature can be overridden in asupervised mode. Hold the windowswitch all the way up to the secondposition. The window rises for aslong as the switch is held. Once theswitch is released, the expressmode is re‐activated.

In this mode, the window can stillclose on an object in its path. Usecare when using the override mode.

Window Lockout

The driver power window controlsalso include a lockout button.

o (Window Lockout): Press thelockout button to stop the rearpassengers from using their windowswitches. The driver and frontpassenger can still operate all thewindows with the lock on. When thered part of the switch is visible, youhave returned to normal windowoperation.



Sun Visors

Pull the sun visor down to blockglare. Detach the sun visor from thecenter mount to pivot to the sidewindow, or to extend along the rod,if available.

Roof

Sunroof

On vehicles with a sunroof, theswitch is located on the headlinerbetween the map lamps.

The sunroof only operates when theignition is in ON/RUN, ACC/ACCESSORY, or if RetainedAccessory Power (RAP) is active.See Retained Accessory Power(RAP) on page 9‑20.

Press and release the back of theswitch to open the sunroof to thevent position. From the ventposition, press and release the backof the switch to express-open thesunroof. To stop the sunroof fromexpress opening, press the switchagain. If the sunshade is closed, itwill open automatically when thesunroof opens past the ventedposition.



A deflector will automatically raisewhen the sunroof is opened. Thedeflector will retract when thesunroof is closed.

To close the sunroof, press the frontof the switch and hold it until thesunroof is closed. The sunroof willstop if the switch is released. Closethe sunshade by hand.

The sunroof glass panel cannot beopened or closed if the vehicle hasan electrical failure.

Notice: Forcing the sunshadeforward of the sliding glass panelmay cause damage and thesunroof may not operate properly.Always close the glass panelbefore closing the sunshade.

Dirt and debris may collect on thesunroof seal or in the tracks thatcould cause an issue with sunroofoperation, noise or plug the waterdrainage system. Periodically openthe sunroof and remove anyobstacles or loose debris. Wipe thesunroof seal and roof sealing areausing a clean cloth, mild soap, andwater. Do not remove grease fromsunroof.



2 NOTES


Seats and Restraints 3-1

Seats andRestraints

Head RestraintsHead Restraints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-2

Front SeatsSeat Adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-3Power Seat Adjustment . . . . . . . 3-4Lumbar Adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . 3-4Reclining Seatbacks . . . . . . . . . . 3-5Heated Front Seats . . . . . . . . . . . 3-7

Rear SeatsRear Seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-8

Safety BeltsSafety Belts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-9How to Wear Safety BeltsProperly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-13

Lap-Shoulder Belt . . . . . . . . . . . 3-18Safety Belt Use DuringPregnancy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-23

Safety Belt Extender . . . . . . . . . 3-23

Safety System Check . . . . . . . . 3-24Safety Belt Care . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-24Replacing Safety Belt SystemParts After a Crash . . . . . . . . . 3-24

Airbag SystemAirbag System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-25Where Are the Airbags? . . . . . 3-27When Should an AirbagInflate? . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-29

What Makes an AirbagInflate? . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-30

How Does an AirbagRestrain? . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-30

What Will You See After anAirbag Inflates? . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-31

Passenger SensingSystem . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-32

Servicing the Airbag-EquippedVehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-36

Adding Equipment to theAirbag-Equipped Vehicle . . . 3-37

Airbag System Check . . . . . . . . 3-38Replacing Airbag SystemParts After a Crash . . . . . . . . . 3-38

Child RestraintsOlder Children . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-39Infants and YoungChildren . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-41

Child Restraint Systems . . . . . 3-43Where to Put the Restraint . . . 3-45Lower Anchors and Tethersfor Children (LATCHSystem) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-48

Replacing LATCH SystemParts After a Crash . . . . . . . . . 3-55

Securing Child Restraints(Rear Seat) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-55

Securing Child Restraints(Front Passenger Seat) . . . . 3-57


3-2 Seats and Restraints

Head RestraintsThe vehicle's front and rear seatshave adjustable head restraints inthe outboard seating positions.

{ WARNING

With head restraints that are notinstalled and adjusted properly,there is a greater chance thatoccupants will suffer a neck/spinal injury in a crash. Do notdrive until the head restraints forall occupants are installed andadjusted properly.

Adjust the head restraint so that thetop of the restraint is at the sameheight as the top of the occupant'shead. This position reduces thechance of a neck injury in a crash.

The height of the head restraint canbe adjusted. Pull the head restraintup to raise it. Try to move the headrestraint to make sure that it islocked in place.

To lower the head restraint, pressthe button located on top of theseatback, and push the headrestraint down. Try to move thehead restraint after the button isreleased to make sure that it islocked in place.

The vehicle's front and rear seatoutboard head restraints are notdesigned to be removed.



Front Seats

Seat AdjustmentSeat Position

{ WARNING

You can lose control of thevehicle if you try to adjust amanual driver seat while thevehicle is moving. The suddenmovement could startle andconfuse you, or make you push apedal when you do not want to.Adjust the driver seat only whenthe vehicle is not moving.

To adjust the seat position:

1. Lift the bar under the front of theseat cushion to unlock the seat.

2. Slide the seat to the desiredposition and release the bar.

3. Try to move the seat back andforth to make sure it is locked inplace.

Height Adjustment

If available, press and hold the topor bottom of the switch to raise orlower the seat. Release the switchwhen the desired height is reached.



Power Seat Adjustment

{ WARNING

You can lose control of thevehicle if you try to adjust theseat while the vehicle is moving.The sudden movement couldstartle and confuse you, or makeyou push a pedal when you donot want to. Adjust the driver seatonly when the vehicle is notmoving. To adjust a power seat, if available:

. Move the seat forward orrearward by sliding the controlforward or rearward.

. Raise or lower the front or rearpart of the seat cushion bymoving the front or rear of thecontrol up or down.

. Raise or lower the entire seat bymoving the entire control upor down.

Lumbar Adjustment

A. Increase Lumbar SupportControl

B. Decrease Lumbar SupportControl

If available, press the front (A) orrear (B) of the control to increase ordecrease lumbar support. Releasethe control when the desired level ofsupport is reached.



Reclining Seatbacks

{ WARNING

Sitting in a reclined position whenthe vehicle is in motion can bedangerous. Even when buckledup, the safety belts cannot dotheir job when reclined like this.

The shoulder belt cannot do itsjob because it will not be againstyour body. Instead, it will be infront of you. In a crash, you couldgo into it, receiving neck or otherinjuries.

(Continued)

WARNING (Continued)

The lap belt cannot do its jobeither. In a crash, the belt couldgo up over your abdomen. Thebelt forces would be there, not atyour pelvic bones. This couldcause serious internal injuries.

For proper protection when thevehicle is in motion, have theseatback upright. Then sit wellback in the seat and wear thesafety belt properly.

Do not have a seatback reclined ifthe vehicle is moving.



Manual Reclining Seatbacks

{ WARNING

You can lose control of thevehicle if you try to adjust amanual driver seat while thevehicle is moving. The suddenmovement could startle andconfuse you, or make you push apedal when you do not want to.Adjust the driver seat only whenthe vehicle is not moving.

{ WARNING

If either seatback is not locked, itcould move forward in a suddenstop or crash. That could causeinjury to the person sitting there.Always push and pull on theseatbacks to be sure they arelocked.

To recline the seatback:

1. Lift the lever.

2. Move the seatback to thedesired position, and thenrelease the lever to lock theseatback in place.


To return the seatback to the uprightposition:

1. Lift the lever fully withoutapplying pressure to theseatback, and the seatback willreturn to the upright position.




Power Reclining Seatbacks

To adjust a power seatback,if equipped:. Tilt the top of the control

rearward to recline.. Tilt the top of the control forward

to raise.

Heated Front Seats

{ WARNING

If you cannot feel temperaturechange or pain to the skin, theseat heater may cause burnseven at low temperatures. Toreduce the risk of burns, peoplewith such a condition should usecare when using the seat heater,especially for long periods oftime. Do not place anything onthe seat that insulates againstheat, such as a blanket, cushion,cover, or similar item. This maycause the seat heater tooverheat. An overheated seatheater may cause a burn or maydamage the seat.

If available, press the top of theswitch to turn the heat feature on tothe high heat setting. The indicatorlight “2” will be lit.

Press the top of the switch again togo to the low heat setting. Theindicator light “1” will be lit.

Press the bottom of the switch toturn the feature off.

The heated seats are canceledwhen the ignition is turned off.



Rear SeatsFolding the Seatback

Either side of the seatback can befolded down for more cargo space.Adjust the seatback only when thevehicle is not moving.

Notice: Folding a rear seat withthe safety belts still fastened maycause damage to the seat or thesafety belts. Always unbuckle thesafety belts and return them totheir normal stowed positionbefore folding a rear seat.

To fold the seatback down:

1. Make sure the front seatback isnot reclined. If it is, the rearseatback will not fold down allthe way. If necessary, return thefront seatback to the uprightposition. See RecliningSeatbacks on page 3‑5.

2. Pull up on the seatback strapwhile folding the seatback down.

Raising the Seatback

{ WARNING

A safety belt that is improperlyrouted, not properly attached,or twisted will not provide theprotection needed in a crash. Theperson wearing the belt could beseriously injured. After raising therear seatback, always check to besure that the safety belts areproperly routed and attached, andare not twisted.



{ WARNING

If either seatback is not locked, itcould move forward in a suddenstop or crash. That could causeinjury to the person sitting there.Always push and pull on theseatbacks to be sure they arelocked.

To raise the seatback:

1. Push the seatback up and backto lock it into place.

2. Push and pull the top of theseatback to be sure it is lockedinto position.

3. Make sure that the safety beltsare properly stowed over theseatback in all three seatingpositions.

When the seat is not in use, itshould be kept in the upright, lockedposition.

Safety BeltsThis section of the manualdescribes how to use safety beltsproperly. It also describes somethings not to do with safety belts.

{ WARNING

Do not let anyone ride where asafety belt cannot be wornproperly. In a crash, if you or yourpassenger(s) are not wearingsafety belts, the injuries can bemuch worse. You can hit thingsinside the vehicle harder or beejected from the vehicle. You andyour passenger(s) can beseriously injured or killed. In thesame crash, you might not be,if you are buckled up. Alwaysfasten your safety belt, and checkthat your passenger(s) arerestrained properly too.

{ WARNING

It is extremely dangerous to ridein a cargo area, inside or outsideof a vehicle. In a collision, peopleriding in these areas are morelikely to be seriously injured orkilled. Do not allow people to ridein any area of your vehicle that isnot equipped with seats andsafety belts. Be sure everyone inthe vehicle is in a seat and usinga safety belt properly.

This vehicle has indicators as areminder to buckle the safety belts.See Safety Belt Reminders onpage 5‑12 for additional information.

In most states and in all Canadianprovinces, the law requires wearingsafety belts. Here is why:

You never know if you will be in acrash. If you do have a crash, youdo not know if it will be aserious one.



A few crashes are mild, and somecrashes can be so serious that evenbuckled up, a person would notsurvive. But most crashes are inbetween. In many of them, peoplewho buckle up can survive andsometimes walk away. Withoutsafety belts they could have beenbadly hurt or killed.

After more than 40 years of safetybelts in vehicles, the facts are clear.In most crashes buckling up doesmatter ... a lot!

Why Safety Belts Work

When you ride in or on anything,you go as fast as it goes.

Take the simplest vehicle. Supposeit is just a seat on wheels.

Put someone on it.



Get it up to speed. Then stop thevehicle. The rider does not stop.

The person keeps going untilstopped by something. In a realvehicle, it could be the windshield...

or the instrument panel...

or the safety belts!



With safety belts, you slow down asthe vehicle does. You get more timeto stop. You stop over moredistance, and your strongest bonestake the forces. That is why safetybelts make such good sense.

Questions and Answers AboutSafety Belts

Q: Will I be trapped in the vehicleafter a crash if I am wearing asafety belt?

A: You could be — whether you arewearing a safety belt or not. Butyour chance of being consciousduring and after an accident, soyou can unbuckle and get out, ismuch greater if you are belted.And you can unbuckle a safetybelt, even if you areupside down.

Q: If my vehicle has airbags, whyshould I have to wear safetybelts?

A: Airbags are supplementalsystems only; so they work withsafety belts — not instead ofthem. Whether or not an airbagis provided, all occupants stillhave to buckle up to get themost protection. That is true notonly in frontal collisions, butespecially in side and othercollisions.

Q: If I am a good driver, and Inever drive far from home,why should I wear safetybelts?

A: You may be an excellent driver,but if you are in a crash — evenone that is not your fault — youand your passenger(s) can behurt. Being a good driver doesnot protect you from thingsbeyond your control, such asbad drivers.

Most accidents occur within40 km (25mi) of home. And thegreatest number of seriousinjuries and deaths occur atspeeds of less than65 km/h (40 mph).

Safety belts are for everyone.



How to Wear Safety BeltsProperlyThis section is only for people ofadult size.

Be aware that there are specialthings to know about safety beltsand children. And there are differentrules for smaller children andinfants. If a child will be riding in thevehicle, see Older Children onpage 3‑39 or Infants and YoungChildren on page 3‑41. Follow thoserules for everyone's protection.

It is very important for all occupantsto buckle up. Statistics show thatunbelted people are hurt more oftenin crashes than those who arewearing safety belts.

Occupants who are not buckled upcan be thrown out of the vehicle in acrash. And they can strike others inthe vehicle who are wearing safetybelts.

First, before you or yourpassenger(s) wear a safety belt,there is important information youshould know.

Sit up straight and always keep yourfeet on the floor in front of you. Thelap part of the belt should be wornlow and snug on the hips, justtouching the thighs. In a crash, thisapplies force to the strong pelvicbones and you would be less likely

to slide under the lap belt. If you slidunder it, the belt would apply forceon your abdomen. This could causeserious or even fatal injuries. Theshoulder belt should go over theshoulder and across the chest.These parts of the body are bestable to take belt restraining forces.

The shoulder belt locks if there is asudden stop or crash.



Q: What is wrong with this?

A: The shoulder belt is too loose.It will not give as muchprotection this way.

{ WARNING

You can be seriously hurt if theshoulder belt is too loose. In acrash, you would move forwardtoo much, which could increaseinjury. The shoulder belt should fitsnugly against your body.


A: The lap belt is too loose. It willnot give nearly as muchprotection this way.



{ WARNING

You can be seriously hurt if thelap belt is too loose. In a crash,you could slide under the lap beltand apply force on yourabdomen. This could causeserious or even fatal injuries. Thelap belt should be worn low andsnug on the hips, just touchingthe thighs.


A: The belt is buckled in the wrongbuckle.

{ WARNING

You can be seriously injured if thebelt is buckled in the wrong placelike this. In a crash, the belt wouldgo up over your abdomen. Thebelt forces would be there, not onthe pelvic bones. This couldcause serious internal injuries.Always buckle the belt into thebuckle nearest you.




A: The belt is over an armrest.

{ WARNING

You can be seriously injured if thebelt goes over an armrest likethis. The belt would be much toohigh. In a crash, you can slideunder the belt. The belt forcewould then be applied on theabdomen, not on the pelvicbones, and that could causeserious or fatal injuries. Be surethe belt goes under the armrests.


A: The shoulder belt is worn underthe arm. It should be worn overthe shoulder at all times.



{ WARNING

You can be seriously injured ifyou wear the shoulder belt underyour arm. In a crash, your bodywould move too far forward,which would increase the chanceof head and neck injury. Also, thebelt would apply too much forceto the ribs, which are not asstrong as shoulder bones. Youcould also severely injure internalorgans like your liver or spleen.The shoulder belt should go overthe shoulder and across thechest.


A: The belt is behind the body.

{ WARNING

You can be seriously injured bynot wearing the lap-shoulder beltproperly. In a crash, you wouldnot be restrained by the shoulderbelt. Your body could move toofar forward increasing the chanceof head and neck injury. Youmight also slide under the lapbelt. The belt force would then beapplied right on the abdomen.That could cause serious or fatalinjuries. The shoulder belt shouldgo over the shoulder and acrossthe chest.




A: The belt is twisted acrossthe body.

{ WARNING

You can be seriously injured by atwisted belt. In a crash, you wouldnot have the full width of the beltto spread impact forces. If a beltis twisted, make it straight so itcan work properly, or ask yourdealer to fix it.

Lap-Shoulder BeltAll seating positions in the vehiclehave a lap-shoulder belt.

The following instructions explainhow to wear a lap-shoulder beltproperly.

1. Adjust the seat, if the seat isadjustable, so you can sit upstraight. To see how, see “Seats”in the Index.

2. Pick up the latch plate and pullthe belt across you. Do not let itget twisted.

The lap-shoulder belt may lock ifyou pull the belt across you veryquickly. If this happens, let thebelt go back slightly to unlock it.Then pull the belt across youmore slowly.

If the shoulder portion of apassenger belt is pulled out allthe way, the child restraintlocking feature may be engaged.If this happens, just let the beltgo back all the way and startagain.

Engaging the child restraintlocking feature in the right frontseating position may affect thepassenger sensing system. SeePassenger Sensing System onpage 3‑32 for more information.



3. Push the latch plate into thebuckle until it clicks.

Pull up on the latch plate tomake sure it is secure. If the beltis not long enough, see SafetyBelt Extender on page 3‑23.

Position the release button onthe buckle so that the safety beltcould be quickly unbuckled ifnecessary.

4. If equipped with a shoulder beltheight adjuster, move it to theheight that is right for you.Improper shoulder belt heightadjustment could reduce the

effectiveness of the safety belt ina crash. See “Shoulder BeltHeight Adjuster” later in thissection for instruction on useand important safety information.

5. To make the lap part tight, pullup on the shoulder belt.

It may be necessary to pullstitching on the safety beltthrough the latch plate to fullytighten the lap belt on smalleroccupants.

To unlatch the belt, push the buttonon the buckle. The belt shouldreturn to its stowed position. Slidethe latch plate up the safety beltwebbing when the safety belt is notin use. The latch plate should reston the stitching on the safety belt,near the guide loop on the side wall.

Before a door is closed, be sure thesafety belt is out of the way. If adoor is slammed against a safetybelt, damage can occur to both thesafety belt and the vehicle.



Shoulder Belt Height Adjuster

Your vehicle has a shoulder beltheight adjuster for the driver andright front passenger position.

Adjust the height so the shoulderportion of the belt is on the shoulderand not falling off of it. The beltshould be close to, but notcontacting, the neck. Impropershoulder belt height adjustmentcould reduce the effectiveness ofthe safety belt in a crash. See Howto Wear Safety Belts Properly onpage 3‑13.

Squeeze the buttons (A) on thesides of the height adjuster andmove the height adjuster to thedesired position.

After the adjuster is set to thedesired position, try to move it downwithout squeezing the buttons tomake sure it has locked intoposition.

Safety Belt Pretensioners

This vehicle has safety beltpretensioners for the front outboardoccupants. Although the safety beltpretensioners cannot be seen, theyare part of the safety belt assembly.They can help tighten the safetybelts during the early stages of amoderate to severe frontal and nearfrontal crash if the thresholdconditions for pretensioneractivation are met. And, if thevehicle has side impact airbags,safety belt pretensioners can helptighten the safety belts in a sidecrash.

Pretensioners work only once.If they activate in a crash, they willneed to be replaced, and probablyother new parts for the vehicle'ssafety belt system. See ReplacingSafety Belt System Parts After aCrash on page 3‑24.



Rear Safety Belt ComfortGuides

This vehicle may have rear shoulderbelt comfort guides. If not, they areavailable through your dealer. Theguides may provide added safetybelt comfort for older children whohave outgrown booster seats andfor some adults. When installed andproperly adjusted, the comfort guidepositions the belt away from theneck and head.

Here is how to install a comfortguide to the safety belt:

1. Pull the elastic cord out frombetween the edge of theseatback and the interior body toremove the guide from itsstorage clip.

2. Place the guide over the beltand insert the two edges of thebelt into the slots of the guide.



3. Be sure that the belt is nottwisted and it lies flat. Theelastic cord must be under thebelt and the guide on top.

{ WARNING

A safety belt that is not properlyworn may not provide theprotection needed in a crash. Theperson wearing the belt could beseriously injured. The shoulderbelt should go over the shoulderand across the chest. These partsof the body are best able to takebelt restraining forces.

4. Buckle, position, and release thesafety belt as describedpreviously in this section. Makesure the shoulder portion of thebelt is on the shoulder and notfalling off of it. The belt shouldbe close to, but not contacting,the neck.



To remove and store the comfortguide, squeeze the belt edgestogether so that the safety belt canbe removed from the guide. Pull theguide upward to expose its storageclip, and then slide the guide ontothe clip. Turn the guide and clipinward and slide them in betweenthe seatback and the interior body,leaving only the loop of the elasticcord exposed.

Safety Belt Use DuringPregnancySafety belts work for everyone,including pregnant women. Like alloccupants, they are more likely tobe seriously injured if they do notwear safety belts.

A pregnant woman should wear alap-shoulder belt, and the lapportion should be worn as low aspossible, below the rounding,throughout the pregnancy.

The best way to protect the fetus isto protect the mother. When a safetybelt is worn properly, it is more likelythat the fetus will not be hurt in acrash. For pregnant women, as foranyone, the key to making safetybelts effective is wearing themproperly.

Safety Belt ExtenderIf the vehicle's safety belt will fastenaround you, you should use it.

But if a safety belt is not longenough, your dealer will order youan extender. When you go in toorder it, take the heaviest coat youwill wear, so the extender will belong enough for you. To help avoidpersonal injury, do not let someoneelse use it, and use it only for theseat it is made to fit. The extenderhas been designed for adults. Neveruse it for securing child seats. Towear it, attach it to the regular safetybelt. For more information, see theinstruction sheet that comes withthe extender.



Safety System CheckNow and then, check that the safetybelt reminder light, safety belts,buckles, latch plates, retractors, andanchorages are working properly.Look for any other loose ordamaged safety belt system partsthat might keep a safety belt systemfrom doing its job. See your dealerto have it repaired. Torn or frayedsafety belts may not protect you in acrash. They can rip apart underimpact forces. If a belt is torn orfrayed, get a new one right away.

Make sure the safety belt reminderlight is working. See Safety BeltReminders on page 5‑12 for moreinformation.

Keep safety belts clean and dry.See Safety Belt Care on page 3‑24.

Safety Belt CareKeep belts clean and dry.

{ WARNING

Do not bleach or dye safety belts.It may severely weaken them. Ina crash, they might not be able toprovide adequate protection.Clean safety belts only with mildsoap and lukewarm water.

Replacing Safety BeltSystem Parts After aCrash

{ WARNING

A crash can damage the safetybelt system in the vehicle.A damaged safety belt systemmay not properly protect theperson using it, resulting inserious injury or even death in acrash. To help make sure thesafety belt systems are workingproperly after a crash, have theminspected and any necessaryreplacements made as soon aspossible.

After a minor crash, replacement ofsafety belts may not be necessary.But the safety belt assemblies thatwere used during any crash mayhave been stressed or damaged.



See your dealer to have the safetybelt assemblies inspected orreplaced.

New parts and repairs may benecessary even if the safety beltsystem was not being used at thetime of the crash.

Have the safety belt pretensionerschecked if the vehicle has been in acrash, or if the airbag readiness lightstays on after you start the vehicleor while you are driving. See AirbagReadiness Light on page 5‑13.

Airbag SystemThe vehicle has the followingairbags:. A frontal airbag for the driver.. A frontal airbag for the right front

passenger.. A seat-mounted side impact

airbag for the driver.. A seat-mounted side impact

airbag for the right frontpassenger.

. A roof-rail airbag for the driverand the passenger seateddirectly behind the driver.

. A roof-rail airbag for the rightfront passenger and thepassenger seated directlybehind the right front passenger.

All of the airbags in your vehicle willhave the word AIRBAG embossedin the trim or on an attached labelnear the deployment opening.

For frontal airbags, the wordAIRBAG will appear on the middlepart of the steering wheel for thedriver and on the instrument panelfor the right front passenger.

With seat-mounted side impactairbags, the word AIRBAG willappear on the side of the seatbackclosest to the door.

With roof-rail airbags, the wordAIRBAG will appear along theheadliner or trim.

Airbags are designed to supplementthe protection provided by safetybelts. Even though today's airbagsare also designed to help reducethe risk of injury from the force of aninflating bag, all airbags must inflatevery quickly to do their job.



Here are the most important thingsto know about the airbag system:

{ WARNING

You can be severely injured orkilled in a crash if you are notwearing your safety belt— even ifyou have airbags. Airbags aredesigned to work with safetybelts, but do not replace them.Also, airbags are not designed todeploy in every crash. In somecrashes safety belts are your onlyrestraint. See When Should anAirbag Inflate? on page 3‑29.

Wearing your safety belt during acrash helps reduce your chanceof hitting things inside the vehicleor being ejected from it. Airbagsare “supplemental restraints” tothe safety belts. Everyone in yourvehicle should wear a safety beltproperly—whether or not there isan airbag for that person.

{ WARNING

Airbags inflate with great force,faster than the blink of an eye.Anyone who is up against, or veryclose to, any airbag when itinflates can be seriously injuredor killed. Do not sit unnecessarilyclose to any airbag, as you wouldbe if you were sitting on the edgeof the seat or leaning forward.Safety belts help keep you inposition before and during acrash. Always wear a safety belt,even with airbags. The drivershould sit as far back as possiblewhile still maintaining control ofthe vehicle.

Occupants should not lean on orsleep against the door or sidewindows in seating positions withseat-mounted side impact airbagsand/or roof-rail airbags.

{ WARNING

Children who are up against,or very close to, any airbagwhen it inflates can be seriouslyinjured or killed. Airbags pluslap-shoulder belts offer protectionfor adults and older children, butnot for young children and infants.Neither the vehicle safety beltsystem nor its airbag system isdesigned for them. Youngchildren and infants need theprotection that a child restraintsystem can provide. Alwayssecure children properly in thevehicle. To read how, see OlderChildren on page 3‑39 or Infantsand Young Children onpage 3‑41.



There is an airbag readiness lighton the instrument panel cluster,which shows the airbag symbol.

The system checks the airbagelectrical system for malfunctions.The light tells you if there is anelectrical problem. See AirbagReadiness Light on page 5‑13 formore information.

Where Are the Airbags?

The driver's frontal airbag is in themiddle of the steering wheel.

The right front passenger's frontalairbag is in the instrument panel onthe passenger's side.



Driver Side shown, PassengerSide similar

The seat-mounted side impactairbags for the driver and right frontpassenger are in the side of theseatbacks closest to the door.

Driver Side shown, PassengerSide similar

The roof-rail airbags for the driver,right front passenger, and secondrow outboard passengers are in theceiling above the side windows.

{ WARNING

If something is between anoccupant and an airbag, theairbag might not inflate properlyor it might force the object intothat person causing severe injury

(Continued)

WARNING (Continued)

or even death. The path of aninflating airbag must be keptclear. Do not put anythingbetween an occupant and anairbag, and do not attach or putanything on the steering wheelhub or on or near any otherairbag covering.

Do not use seat accessories thatblock the inflation path of aseat-mounted side impact airbag.

Never secure anything to the roofof a vehicle with roof-rail airbagsby routing a rope or tie downthrough any door or windowopening. If you do, the path of aninflating roof-rail airbag will beblocked.



When Should an AirbagInflate?Frontal airbags are designed toinflate in moderate to severe frontalor near-frontal crashes to helpreduce the potential for severeinjuries mainly to the driver's or rightfront passenger's head and chest.However, they are only designed toinflate if the impact exceeds apredetermined deploymentthreshold. Deployment thresholdsare used to predict how severe acrash is likely to be in time for theairbags to inflate and help restrainthe occupants.

Whether the frontal airbags will orshould deploy is not based on howfast your vehicle is traveling.It depends largely on what you hit,the direction of the impact, and howquickly your vehicle slows down.

Frontal airbags may inflate atdifferent crash speeds. Forexample:. If the vehicle hits a stationary

object, the airbags could inflateat a different crash speed than ifthe vehicle hits a moving object.

. If the vehicle hits an object thatdeforms, the airbags couldinflate at a different crash speedthan if the vehicle hits an objectthat does not deform.

. If the vehicle hits a narrow object(like a pole), the airbags couldinflate at a different crash speedthan if the vehicle hits a wideobject (like a wall).

. If the vehicle goes into an objectat an angle, the airbags couldinflate at a different crash speedthan if the vehicle goes straightinto the object.

Thresholds can also vary withspecific vehicle design.

Frontal airbags are not intended toinflate during vehicle rollovers, rearimpacts, or in many side impacts.

In addition, the vehicle hasdual-stage frontal airbags.Dual-stage airbags adjust therestraint according to crash severity.The vehicle has electronic frontalsensors, which help the sensingsystem distinguish between amoderate frontal impact and a moresevere frontal impact. For moderatefrontal impacts, dual-stage airbagsinflate at a level less than fulldeployment. For more severe frontalimpacts, full deployment occurs.

The vehicle has seat-mounted sideimpact and roof-rail airbags. SeeAirbag System on page 3‑25.Seat-mounted side impact androof-rail airbags are intended toinflate in moderate to severe sidecrashes. Seat-mounted side impactand roof-rail airbags will inflate if thecrash severity is above the system'sdesigned threshold level. Thethreshold level can vary withspecific vehicle design.



Seat-mounted side impact androof-rail airbags are not intended toinflate in frontal impacts, near-frontalimpacts, rollovers, or rear impacts.A seat-mounted side impact airbagis intended to deploy on the side ofthe vehicle that is struck. A roof-railairbag is intended to deploy on theside of the vehicle that is struck.

In any particular crash, no one cansay whether an airbag should haveinflated simply because of thedamage to a vehicle or because ofwhat the repair costs were. Forfrontal airbags, inflation isdetermined by what the vehicle hits,the angle of the impact, and howquickly the vehicle slows down. Forseat-mounted side impact androof-rail airbags, deployment isdetermined by the location andseverity of the side impact.

What Makes an AirbagInflate?In a deployment event, the sensingsystem sends an electrical signaltriggering a release of gas from theinflator. Gas from the inflator fills theairbag causing the bag to break outof the cover and deploy. The inflator,the airbag, and related hardware areall part of the airbag module.

Frontal airbag modules are locatedinside the steering wheel andinstrument panel. For vehicles withseat‐mounted side impact airbags,there are airbags modules in theside of the front seatbacks closestto the door. For vehicles withroof-rail airbags, there are airbagmodules in the ceiling of the vehicle,near the side windows that haveoccupant seating positions.

How Does an AirbagRestrain?In moderate to severe frontal ornear frontal collisions, even beltedoccupants can contact the steeringwheel or the instrument panel. Inmoderate to severe side collisions,even belted occupants can contactthe inside of the vehicle.

Airbags supplement the protectionprovided by safety belts. Frontalairbags distribute the force of theimpact more evenly over theoccupant's upper body, stoppingthe occupant more gradually.Seat-mounted side impact androof-rail airbags distribute the forceof the impact more evenly over theoccupant's upper body.

But airbags would not help in manytypes of collisions, primarilybecause the occupant's motion isnot toward those airbags. See WhenShould an Airbag Inflate? onpage 3‑29 for more information.



Airbags should never be regardedas anything more than a supplementto safety belts.

What Will You See Afteran Airbag Inflates?After the frontal airbags andseat-mounted side impact airbagsinflate, they quickly deflate, soquickly that some people may noteven realize an airbag inflated.Roof-rail airbags may still be at leastpartially inflated for some time afterthey deploy. Some components ofthe airbag module may be hot forseveral minutes. For location of theairbag modules, see What Makesan Airbag Inflate? on page 3‑30.

The parts of the airbag that comeinto contact with you may be warm,but not too hot to touch. There maybe some smoke and dust comingfrom the vents in the deflatedairbags. Airbag inflation does notprevent the driver from seeing out of

the windshield or being able to steerthe vehicle, nor does it preventpeople from leaving the vehicle.

{ WARNING

When an airbag inflates, theremay be dust in the air. This dustcould cause breathing problemsfor people with a history ofasthma or other breathing trouble.To avoid this, everyone in thevehicle should get out as soon asit is safe to do so. If you havebreathing problems but cannotget out of the vehicle after anairbag inflates, then get fresh airby opening a window or a door.If you experience breathingproblems following an airbagdeployment, you should seekmedical attention.

The vehicle has a feature that mayautomatically unlock the doors, turnon the interior lamps and hazardwarning flashers, and shut off the

fuel system after the airbags inflate.You can lock the doors, turn off theinterior lamps and hazard warningflashers by using the controls forthose features.

{ WARNING

A crash severe enough to inflatethe airbags may have alsodamaged important functions inthe vehicle, such as the fuelsystem, brake and steeringsystems, etc. Even if the vehicleappears to be drivable after amoderate crash, there may beconcealed damage that couldmake it difficult to safely operatethe vehicle.

Use caution if you should attemptto restart the engine after a crashhas occurred.

In many crashes severe enough toinflate the airbag, windshields arebroken by vehicle deformation.



Additional windshield breakage mayalso occur from the right frontpassenger airbag.. Airbags are designed to inflate

only once. After an airbaginflates, you will need some newparts for the airbag system.If you do not get them, theairbag system will not be thereto help protect you in anothercrash. A new system will includeairbag modules and possiblyother parts. The service manualfor your vehicle covers the needto replace other parts.

. The vehicle has a crash sensingand diagnostic module whichrecords information after acrash. See Vehicle DataRecording and Privacy onpage 13‑17 and Event DataRecorders on page 13‑18.

. Let only qualified technicianswork on the airbag systems.Improper service can mean thatan airbag system will not workproperly. See your dealer forservice.

Passenger SensingSystemThe vehicle has a passengersensing system for the right frontpassenger position. The passengerairbag status indicator will be visibleon the instrument panel when thevehicle is started.

United States

Canada and Mexico

The words ON and OFF, or thesymbol for on and off, are visibleduring the system check. If you areusing remote start, if equipped, tostart the vehicle from a distance,you may not see the system check.When the system check iscomplete, either the word ON orOFF, or the symbol for on or off, willbe visible. See Passenger AirbagStatus Indicator on page 5‑13.

The passenger sensing systemturns off the right front passengerfrontal airbag and seat-mountedside impact airbag under certainconditions. The driver airbags andthe roof-rail airbags are not affectedby the passenger sensing system.



The passenger sensing systemworks with sensors that are part ofthe right front passenger seat. Thesensors are designed to detect thepresence of a properly-seatedoccupant and determine if the rightfront passenger frontal airbag andseat‐mounted side impact airbagshould be enabled (may inflate)or not.

According to accident statistics,children are safer when properlysecured in a rear seat in the correctchild restraint for their weightand size.

We recommend that children besecured in a rear seat, including: aninfant or a child riding in arear-facing child restraint; a childriding in a forward-facing child seat;an older child riding in a boosterseat; and children, who are largeenough, using safety belts.

A label on the sun visor says,“Never put a rear-facing child seat inthe front.” This is because the risk tothe rear-facing child is so great,if the airbag deploys.

{ WARNING

A child in a rear-facing childrestraint can be seriously injuredor killed if the right frontpassenger airbag inflates. This isbecause the back of therear-facing child restraint wouldbe very close to the inflatingairbag. A child in a forward-facingchild restraint can be seriouslyinjured or killed if the right frontpassenger airbag inflates and thepassenger seat is in a forwardposition.

Even if the passenger sensingsystem has turned off the rightfront passenger frontal airbag andseat-mounted side impact airbag(if equipped), no system is

(Continued)

WARNING (Continued)

fail-safe. No one can guaranteethat an airbag will not deployunder some unusualcircumstance, even thoughthe airbag(s) are off.

Secure rear-facing child restraintsin a rear seat, even if theairbag(s) are off. If you secure aforward-facing child restraint inthe right front seat, always movethe front passenger seat as farback as it will go. It is better tosecure the child restraint in arear seat.

The passenger sensing system isdesigned to turn off the right frontpassenger airbag and seat‐mountedside impact airbag if:. The right front passenger seat is

unoccupied.. The system determines that an

infant is present in a rear-facinginfant seat.



. The system determines that asmall child is present in a childrestraint.

. The system determines that asmall child is present in abooster seat.

. A right front passenger takeshis/her weight off of the seat fora period of time.

. The right front passenger seat isoccupied by a smaller person,such as a child who hasoutgrown child restraints.

. Or, if there is a critical problemwith the airbag system or thepassenger sensing system.

When the passenger sensingsystem has turned off the right frontpassenger frontal airbag and seat‐mounted side impact airbag, the offindicator will light and stay lit toremind you that the airbags are off.See Passenger Airbag StatusIndicator on page 5‑13.

The passenger sensing system isdesigned to turn on (may inflate) theright front passenger frontal airbagand seat‐mounted side impactairbag anytime the system sensesthat a person of adult size is sittingproperly in the right frontpassenger seat.

When the passenger sensingsystem has allowed the airbags tobe enabled, the on indicator will lightand stay lit to remind you that theairbags are active.

For some children who haveoutgrown child restraints and forvery small adults, the passengersensing system may or may not turnoff the right front passenger frontalairbag and seat-mounted sideimpact airbag, depending upon theperson’s seating posture and bodybuild. Everyone in the vehiclewho has outgrown child restraintsshould wear a safety beltproperly — whether or not there isan airbag for that person.

{ WARNING

If the airbag readiness light evercomes on and stays on, it meansthat something may be wrongwith the airbag system. To helpavoid injury to yourself or others,have the vehicle serviced rightaway. See Airbag ReadinessLight on page 5‑13 for moreinformation, including importantsafety information.

If the On Indicator is Lit for aChild Restraint

If a child restraint has been installedand the on indicator is lit:

1. Turn the vehicle off.

2. Remove the child restraint fromthe vehicle.

3. Remove any additional itemsfrom the seat such as blankets,cushions, seat covers, seatheaters, or seat massagers.



4. Reinstall the child restraintfollowing the directions providedby the child restraintmanufacturer and refer toSecuring Child Restraints (RearSeat) on page 3‑55 or SecuringChild Restraints (FrontPassenger Seat) on page 3‑57.

5. If, after reinstalling the childrestraint and restarting thevehicle, the on indicator is still lit,turn the vehicle off. Then slightlyrecline the vehicle seatback andadjust the seat cushion,if adjustable, to make sure thatthe vehicle seatback is notpushing the child restraint intothe seat cushion.

Also make sure the childrestraint is not trapped under thevehicle head restraint. If thishappens, adjust the headrestraint. See Head Restraintson page 3‑2.

6. Restart the vehicle.

If the on indicator is still lit withan infant present in a childrestraint, secure the childrestraint in a rear seat position inthe vehicle and see your dealer.

If the Off Indicator is Lit for anAdult-Size Occupant

If a person of adult-size is sitting inthe right front passenger seat, butthe off indicator is lit, it could bebecause that person is not sittingproperly in the seat. If this happens,use the following steps to allow thesystem to detect that person and

enable the right front passengerfrontal airbag and seat-mountedside impact airbag:

1. Turn the vehicle off.

2. Remove any additional materialfrom the seat, such as blankets,cushions, seat covers, seatheaters, or seat massagers.

3. Place the seatback in the fullyupright position.

4. Have the person sit upright inthe seat, centered on the seatcushion, with legs comfortablyextended.

5. Restart the vehicle and have theperson remain in this position fortwo to three minutes after the onindicator is lit.



Additional Factors AffectingSystem Operation

Safety belts help keep thepassenger in position on the seatduring vehicle maneuvers andbraking, which helps the passengersensing system maintain thepassenger airbag status. See“Safety Belts” and “Child Restraints”in the Index for additionalinformation about the importance ofproper restraint use.

A thick layer of additional material,such as a blanket or cushion,or aftermarket equipment such asseat covers, seat heaters, and seatmassagers can affect how well thepassenger sensing systemoperates. We recommend that younot use seat covers or otheraftermarket equipment except whenapproved by GM for your specificvehicle. See Adding Equipment tothe Airbag-Equipped Vehicle onpage 3‑37 for more informationabout modifications that can affecthow the system operates.

{ WARNING

Stowing of articles under thepassenger seat or between thepassenger seat cushion andseatback may interfere with theproper operation of the passengersensing system.

Servicing theAirbag-Equipped VehicleAirbags affect how the vehicleshould be serviced. There are partsof the airbag system in severalplaces around the vehicle. Yourdealer and the service manual haveinformation about servicing thevehicle and the airbag system. Topurchase a service manual, seeService Publications OrderingInformation on page 13‑15.

{ WARNING

For up to 10 seconds after theignition is turned off and thebattery is disconnected, an airbagcan still inflate during improperservice. You can be injured if youare close to an airbag when itinflates. Avoid yellow connectors.They are probably part of theairbag system. Be sure to followproper service procedures, andmake sure the person performingwork for you is qualified to do so.



Adding Equipment to theAirbag-Equipped VehicleQ: Is there anything I might add

to or change about the vehiclethat could keep the airbagsfrom working properly?

A: Yes. If you add things thatchange the vehicle's frame,bumper system, height, front endor side sheet metal, they maykeep the airbag system fromworking properly. Changing ormoving any parts of the frontseats, safety belts, the airbagsensing and diagnostic module,steering wheel, instrumentpanel, roof-rail airbag modules,ceiling headliner or pillar garnishtrim, front sensors, side impactsensors, or airbag wiring canaffect the operation of the airbagsystem.

In addition, the vehicle has apassenger sensing system forthe right front passengerposition, which includes sensorsthat are part of the passenger's

seat. The passenger sensingsystem may not operate properlyif the original seat trim isreplaced with non-GM covers,upholstery or trim, or withGM covers, upholstery or trimdesigned for a different vehicle.Any object, such as anaftermarket seat heater or acomfort enhancing pad ordevice, installed under or on topof the seat fabric, could alsointerfere with the operation ofthe passenger sensing system.This could either prevent properdeployment of the passengerairbag(s) or prevent thepassenger sensing system fromproperly turning off thepassenger airbag(s). SeePassenger Sensing System onpage 3‑32.

If you have any questions, callCustomer Assistance. Thephone numbers and addressesfor Customer Assistance are inStep Two of the CustomerSatisfaction Procedure in this

manual. See CustomerSatisfaction Procedure(U.S. and Canada) on page 13‑1or Customer SatisfactionProcedure (Mexico) onpage 13‑3.

Q: Because I have a disability,I have to get my vehiclemodified. How can I find outwhether this will affect myairbag system?

A: If you have questions, callCustomer Assistance. Thephone numbers and addressesfor Customer Assistance are inStep Two of the CustomerSatisfaction Procedure in thismanual. See CustomerSatisfaction Procedure (U.S. andCanada) on page 13‑1 orCustomer SatisfactionProcedure (Mexico) onpage 13‑3.



In addition, your dealer and theservice manual have informationabout the location of the airbagsensors, sensing and diagnosticmodule and airbag wiring.

Airbag System CheckThe airbag system does not needregularly scheduled maintenance orreplacement. Make sure the airbagreadiness light is working. SeeAirbag Readiness Light onpage 5‑13 for more information.

Notice: If an airbag covering isdamaged, opened, or broken, theairbag may not work properly. Donot open or break the airbagcoverings. If there are anyopened or broken airbag covers,have the airbag covering and/orairbag module replaced. For thelocation of the airbag modules,see What Makes an AirbagInflate? on page 3‑30. See yourdealer for service.

Replacing Airbag SystemParts After a Crash

{ WARNING

A crash can damage theairbag systems in the vehicle.A damaged airbag systemmay not work properly andmay not protect you and yourpassenger(s) in a crash, resultingin serious injury or even death. Tohelp make sure the airbagsystems are working properlyafter a crash, have theminspected and any necessaryreplacements made as soon aspossible.

If an airbag inflates, you will need toreplace airbag system parts. Seeyour dealer for service.

If the airbag readiness light stays onafter the vehicle is started or comeson when you are driving, the airbagsystem may not work properly. Havethe vehicle serviced right away. SeeAirbag Readiness Light onpage 5‑13 for more information.



Child Restraints

Older Children

Older children who have outgrownbooster seats should wear thevehicle safety belts.

The manufacturer's instructions thatcome with the booster seat state theweight and height limitations for thatbooster. Use a booster seat with alap-shoulder belt until the childpasses the fit test below:. Sit all the way back on the seat.

Do the knees bend at the seatedge? If yes, continue. If no,return to the booster seat.

. Buckle the lap-shoulder belt.Does the shoulder belt rest onthe shoulder? If yes, continue.If no, try using the rear safetybelt comfort guide. See “RearSafety Belt Comfort Guides”under Lap-Shoulder Belt onpage 3‑18 for more information.If the shoulder belt still does notrest on the shoulder, then returnto the booster seat.

. Does the lap belt fit low andsnug on the hips, touching thethighs? If yes, continue. If no,return to the booster seat.

. Can proper safety belt fit bemaintained for the length of thetrip? If yes, continue. If no,return to the booster seat.

Q: What is the proper way towear safety belts?

A: An older child should wear alap-shoulder belt and get theadditional restraint a shoulderbelt can provide. The shoulderbelt should not cross the face orneck. The lap belt should fitsnugly below the hips, justtouching the top of the thighs.This applies belt force to thechild's pelvic bones in a crash.It should never be worn over theabdomen, which could causesevere or even fatal internalinjuries in a crash.

Also see “Rear Safety Belt ComfortGuides” under Lap-Shoulder Belt onpage 3‑18.



According to accident statistics,children and infants are safer whenproperly restrained in a childrestraint system or infant restraintsystem secured in a rear seatingposition.

In a crash, children who are notbuckled up can strike other peoplewho are buckled up, or can bethrown out of the vehicle. Olderchildren need to use safety beltsproperly.

{ WARNING

Never do this.

Never allow two children to wearthe same safety belt. The safetybelt can not properly spread theimpact forces. In a crash, the twochildren can be crushed togetherand seriously injured. A safetybelt must be used by only oneperson at a time.

{ WARNING

Never do this.

Never allow a child to wear thesafety belt with the shoulder beltbehind their back. A child can beseriously injured by not wearingthe lap-shoulder belt properly. In acrash, the child would not berestrained by the shoulder belt.The child could move too farforward increasing the chance ofhead and neck injury. The child

(Continued)

WARNING (Continued)

might also slide under the lapbelt. The belt force would then beapplied right on the abdomen.That could cause serious or fatalinjuries. The shoulder belt shouldgo over the shoulder and acrossthe chest.



Infants and YoungChildrenEveryone in a vehicle needsprotection! This includes infants andall other children. Neither thedistance traveled nor the age andsize of the traveler changes theneed, for everyone, to use safetyrestraints. In fact, the law in everystate in the United States and inevery Canadian province sayschildren up to some age must berestrained while in a vehicle.

{ WARNING

Children can be seriously injuredor strangled if a shoulder belt iswrapped around their neck andthe safety belt continues totighten. Never leave childrenunattended in a vehicle and neverallow children to play with thesafety belts.

Airbags plus lap‐shoulder belts offerprotection for adults and olderchildren, but not for young childrenand infants. Neither the vehicle'ssafety belt system nor its airbagsystem is designed for them. Everytime infants and young children ridein vehicles, they should have theprotection provided by appropriatechild restraints.

Children who are not restrainedproperly can strike other people,or can be thrown out of the vehicle.

{ WARNING

Never do this.

Never hold an infant or a childwhile riding in a vehicle. Due tocrash forces, an infant or a childwill become so heavy it is notpossible to hold it during a crash.For example, in a crash at only40 km/h (25 mph), a 5.5 kg (12 lb)infant will suddenly become a

(Continued)

WARNING (Continued)

110 kg (240 lb) force on a person'sarms. An infant should besecured in an appropriaterestraint.



{ WARNING

Never do this.

Children who are up against,or very close to, any airbag whenit inflates can be seriously injuredor killed. Never put a rear-facingchild restraint in the right frontseat. Secure a rear-facing childrestraint in a rear seat. It is alsobetter to secure a forward-facingchild restraint in a rear seat. If youmust secure a forward-facingchild restraint in the right frontseat, always move the frontpassenger seat as far back as itwill go.

Q: What are the different types ofadd-on child restraints?

A: Add-on child restraints, whichare purchased by the vehicleowner, are available in four basictypes. Selection of a particularrestraint should take intoconsideration not only the child'sweight, height, and age but alsowhether or not the restraint willbe compatible with the motorvehicle in which it will be used.

For most basic types of childrestraints, there are manydifferent models available. Whenpurchasing a child restraint, besure it is designed to be used ina motor vehicle. If it is, therestraint will have a label sayingthat it meets federal motorvehicle safety standards.

The restraint manufacturer'sinstructions that come with therestraint state the weight andheight limitations for a particularchild restraint. In addition, thereare many kinds of restraintsavailable for children withspecial needs.



{ WARNING

To reduce the risk of neck andhead injury during a crash, infantsneed complete support. This isbecause an infant's neck is notfully developed and its headweighs so much compared withthe rest of its body. In a crash, aninfant in a rear-facing childrestraint settles into the restraint,so the crash forces can bedistributed across the strongestpart of an infant's body, the backand shoulders. Infants shouldalways be secured in rear-facingchild restraints.

{ WARNING

A young child's hip bones are stillso small that the vehicle's regularsafety belt may not remain low onthe hip bones, as it should.Instead, it may settle up aroundthe child's abdomen. In a crash,the belt would apply force on abody area that is unprotected byany bony structure. This alonecould cause serious or fatalinjuries. To reduce the risk ofserious or fatal injuries during acrash, young children shouldalways be secured in appropriatechild restraints.

Child Restraint Systems

(A) Rear‐Facing Infant Seat

A rear-facing infant seat (A)provides restraint with the seatingsurface against the back of theinfant.

The harness system holds the infantin place and, in a crash, acts tokeep the infant positioned in therestraint.



(B) Forward-Facing Child Seat

A forward-facing child seat (B)provides restraint for the child'sbody with the harness.

(C) Booster Seats

A booster seat (C) is a child restraintdesigned to improve the fit of thevehicle's safety belt system.A booster seat can also help a childto see out the window.

Securing an Add-On ChildRestraint in the Vehicle

{ WARNING

A child can be seriously injured orkilled in a crash if the childrestraint is not properly secured inthe vehicle. Secure the childrestraint properly in the vehicleusing the vehicle safety belt orLATCH system, following theinstructions that came with thatchild restraint and the instructionsin this manual.

To help reduce the chance of injury,the child restraint must be securedin the vehicle. Child restraintsystems must be secured in vehicleseats by lap belts or the lap beltportion of a lap-shoulder belt, or bythe LATCH system. See LowerAnchors and Tethers for Children(LATCH System) on page 3‑48 formore information. Children can be



endangered in a crash if the childrestraint is not properly secured inthe vehicle.

When securing an add-on childrestraint, refer to the instructionsthat come with the restraint whichmay be on the restraint itself or in abooklet, or both, and to this manual.The child restraint instructions areimportant, so if they are notavailable, obtain a replacementcopy from the manufacturer.

Keep in mind that an unsecuredchild restraint can move around in acollision or sudden stop and injurepeople in the vehicle. Be sure toproperly secure any child restraintin the vehicle — even when no childis in it.

In some areas of the United Statesand Canada, Certified ChildPassenger Safety Technicians(CPSTs) are available to inspectand demonstrate how to correctlyuse and install child restraints. Inthe U.S., refer to the NationalHighway Traffic Safety

Administration (NHTSA) website tolocate the nearest child safety seatinspection station. For CPSTavailability in Canada, check withTransport Canada or the ProvincialMinistry of Transportation office.

Securing the Child Within theChild Restraint

{ WARNING

A child can be seriously injured orkilled in a crash if the child is notproperly secured in the childrestraint. Secure the childproperly following the instructionsthat came with that child restraint.

Where to Put theRestraintAccording to accident statistics,children and infants are safer whenproperly restrained in a childrestraint system or infant restraintsystem secured in a rear seatingposition.

We recommend that children andchild restraints be secured in a rearseat, including: an infant or a childriding in a rear-facing child restraint;a child riding in a forward-facingchild seat; an older child riding in abooster seat; and children, who arelarge enough, using safety belts.



A label on your sun visor says,“Never put a rear-facing child seat inthe front.” This is because the risk tothe rear-facing child is so great,if the airbag deploys.

{ WARNING

A child in a rear-facing childrestraint can be seriouslyinjured or killed if the right frontpassenger airbag inflates.This is because the back of therear-facing child restraint wouldbe very close to the inflatingairbag. A child in a forward-facingchild restraint can be seriouslyinjured or killed if the right frontpassenger airbag inflates and thepassenger seat is in a forwardposition.

Even if the passenger sensingsystem has turned off the rightfront passenger frontal airbag, nosystem is fail-safe. No one canguarantee that an airbag will not

(Continued)

WARNING (Continued)

deploy under some unusualcircumstance, even though it isturned off.

Secure rear-facing childrestraints in a rear seat, even ifthe airbag is off. If you secure aforward-facing child restraint inthe right front seat, always movethe front passenger seat as farback as it will go. It is better tosecure the child restraint in arear seat.

See Passenger Sensing Systemon page 3‑32 for additionalinformation.

When securing a child restraint in arear seating position, study theinstructions that came with yourchild restraint to make sure it iscompatible with this vehicle.

Child restraints and booster seatsvary considerably in size, and somemay fit in certain seating positionsbetter than others. Always makesure the child restraint is properlysecured.

Depending on where you place thechild restraint and the size of thechild restraint, you may not be ableto access adjacent safety beltassemblies or LATCH anchors foradditional passengers or childrestraints. Adjacent seatingpositions should not be used if thechild restraint prevents access to orinterferes with the routing of thesafety belt.

Wherever you install a childrestraint, be sure to secure the childrestraint properly.

Keep in mind that an unsecuredchild restraint can move around in acollision or sudden stop and injurepeople in the vehicle. Be sure toproperly secure any child restraint inyour vehicle — even when no childis in it.



If you secure a child restraint in theleft or center rear seat usingLATCH, review the followingillustrations. Depending on whereyou place the child restraint, youmay not be able to access certainsafety belt assemblies or LATCHanchors for additional passengers orchild restraints.

Configurations for Use of ChildRestraints

A. Child restraint using LATCH

B. Child restraint or occupantusing safety belt

A. Occupant prohibited

B. Child restraint using LATCH

A. Child restraint using LATCH

B. Child restraint or occupantusing safety belt

C. Child restraint using safety beltor LATCH or occupant usingsafety belt

A. Child restraint or occupantusing safety belt

A. Child restraint or occupantusing safety belt

B. Child restraint using LATCH



Lower Anchors andTethers for Children(LATCH System)The LATCH system holds a childrestraint during driving or in a crash.This system is designed to makeinstallation of a child restraint easier.The LATCH system uses anchors inthe vehicle and attachments on thechild restraint that are made for usewith the LATCH system.

Make sure that a LATCH-compatiblechild restraint is properly installedusing the anchors, or use thevehicle's safety belts to secure therestraint, following the instructionsthat came with that restraint, andalso the instructions in this manual.

When installing a child restraint witha top tether, you must also useeither the lower anchors or thesafety belts to properly secure thechild restraint. A child restraint mustnever be installed using only the toptether and anchor.

In order to use the LATCH system inyour vehicle, you need a childrestraint that has LATCHattachments. The child restraintmanufacturer will provide you withinstructions on how to use the childrestraint and its attachments. Thefollowing explains how to attach achild restraint with theseattachments in your vehicle.

Not all vehicle seating positions orchild restraints have lower anchorsand attachments or top tetheranchors and attachments.

Lower Anchors

Lower anchors (A) are metal barsbuilt into the vehicle. There are twolower anchors for each LATCHseating position that willaccommodate a child restraint withlower attachments (B).



Top Tether Anchor

A top tether (A, C) anchors thetop of the child restraint to thevehicle. A top tether anchor is builtinto the vehicle. The top tetherattachment (B) on the child restraintconnects to the top tether anchor inthe vehicle in order to reduce theforward movement and rotation ofthe child restraint during driving or ina crash.

Your child restraint may have asingle tether (A) or a dualtether (C). Either will have asingle attachment (B) to securethe top tether to the anchor.

Some child restraints with toptethers are designed for use with orwithout the top tether beingattached. Others require the toptether always to be attached. InCanada, the law requires thatforward-facing child restraints havea top tether, and that the tether beattached. Be sure to read and followthe instructions for your childrestraint.

Lower Anchor and Top TetherAnchor Locations

Rear Seat

i (Top Tether Anchor): Seatingpositions with top tether anchors.

j (Lower Anchor): Seatingpositions with two lower anchors.



To assist you in locating the loweranchors, each rear anchor positionhas a label, near the creasebetween the seatback and the seatcushion.

To assist you in locating the toptether anchors, the top tether anchorsymbol is located on the cover.

The top tether anchors are locatedunder the covers, behind the rearseat, on the filler panel. Be sure touse an anchor located on the sameside of the vehicle as the seatingposition where the child restraint willbe placed.

Do not secure a child restraint in aposition without a top tether anchorif a national or local law requiresthat the top tether be attached, or ifthe instructions that come with thechild restraint say that the top tethermust be attached.

According to accident statistics,children and infants are safer whenproperly restrained in a childrestraint system or infant restraintsystem secured in a rear seatingposition. See Where to Put theRestraint on page 3‑45 foradditional information.



Securing a Child RestraintDesigned for the LATCHSystem

{ WARNING

If a LATCH-type child restraint isnot attached to anchors, the childrestraint will not be able to protectthe child correctly. In a crash, thechild could be seriously injured orkilled. Install a LATCH-type childrestraint properly using theanchors, or use the vehicle safetybelts to secure the restraint,following the instructions thatcame with the child restraint andthe instructions in this manual.

{ WARNING

Do not attach more than one childrestraint to a single anchor.Attaching more than one child

(Continued)

WARNING (Continued)

restraint to a single anchor couldcause the anchor or attachmentto come loose or even breakduring a crash. A child or otherscould be injured. To reduce therisk of serious or fatal injuriesduring a crash, attach only onechild restraint per anchor.

{ WARNING

Children can be seriously injuredor strangled if a shoulder belt iswrapped around their neck andthe safety belt continues totighten. Buckle any unused safetybelts behind the child restraint sochildren cannot reach them. Pullthe shoulder belt all the way outof the retractor to set the lock,if the vehicle has one, after thechild restraint has been installed.

Notice: Do not let the LATCHattachments rub against thevehicle’s safety belts. This maydamage these parts. If necessary,move buckled safety belts toavoid rubbing the LATCHattachments.

Do not fold the empty rear seatwith a safety belt buckled. Thiscould damage the safety belt orthe seat. Unbuckle and return thesafety belt to its stowed position,before folding the seat.

If you need to secure more than onechild restraint in the rear seat, seeWhere to Put the Restraint onpage 3‑45. Depending on where youplace the child restraint, you maynot be able to access certain safetybelt assemblies or LATCH anchorsfor additional passengers or childrestraints.



You cannot secure three childrestraints using the LATCH anchorsin the rear seat at the same time,but you can install two of them.If you want to do this, install oneLATCH child restraint in thepassenger-side position, and installthe other one either in thedriver-side position or in the centerposition. Refer to the followingillustration to learn which anchorsto use.

A. Passenger Side Rear SeatLower Anchors

B. Center Rear Seat LowerAnchors

C. Driver Side Rear Seat LowerAnchors

Make sure to attach the childrestraint at the proper anchorlocation.

This system is designed to makeinstallation of child restraints easier.When using lower anchors, do notuse the vehicle's safety belts.Instead use the vehicle's anchorsand child restraint attachments to

secure the restraints. Somerestraints also use another vehicleanchor to secure a top tether.

1. Attach and tighten the lowerattachments to the loweranchors. If the child restraintdoes not have lowerattachments or the desiredseating position does not havelower anchors, secure the childrestraint with the top tether andthe safety belts. Refer to yourchild restraint manufacturerinstructions and the instructionsin this manual.

1.1. Find the lower anchors forthe desired seatingposition.

1.2. Put the child restraint onthe seat.

1.3. Attach and tighten the lowerattachments on the childrestraint to the loweranchors.



2. If the child restraint manufacturerrecommends that the top tetherbe attached, attach and tightenthe top tether to the top tetheranchor, if equipped. Refer to thechild restraint instructions andthe following steps:

2.1. Find the top tether anchor.

Open the cover to exposethe anchor.

2.2. If the position you are usinghas an adjustable headrestor head restraint , raise it.See Head Restraints onpage 3‑2.

2.3. Route, attach, and tightenthe top tether according tothe child restraintinstructions and thefollowing instructions:

If the position you are usingdoes not have a headrestor head restraint and youare using a single tether,route the tether over theseatback.

If the position you are usingdoes not have a headrestor head restraint and youare using a dual tether,route the tether over theseatback.



If the position you are usinghas an adjustable headrestor head restraint and youare using a single tether,route the tether under theheadrest or head restraintand in between theheadrest or head restraintposts. See Head Restraintson page 3‑2.

If the position you are usinghas an adjustable headrestor head restraint and youare using a dual tetherroute the tether under theheadrest or head restraintand in between theheadrest or head restraintposts. See Head Restraintson page 3‑2.

3. Before placing a child in thechild restraint, make sure it issecurely held in place. To check,grasp the child restraint at theLATCH path and attempt tomove it side‐to‐side andback‐and‐forth. There should beno more than 2.5 cm (1 in) ofmovement for proper installation.



Replacing LATCH SystemParts After a Crash

{ WARNING

A crash can damage the LATCHsystem in the vehicle. A damagedLATCH system may not properlysecure the child restraint,resulting in serious injury or evendeath in a crash. To help makesure the LATCH system isworking properly after a crash,see your dealer to have thesystem inspected and anynecessary replacements made assoon as possible.

If the vehicle has the LATCH systemand it was being used during acrash, new LATCH system partsmay be needed.

New parts and repairs may benecessary even if the LATCHsystem was not being used at thetime of the crash.

Securing Child Restraints(Rear Seat)When securing a child restraint in arear seating position, study theinstructions that came with the childrestraint to make sure it iscompatible with this vehicle.

If the child restraint has the LATCHsystem, see Lower Anchors andTethers for Children (LATCHSystem) on page 3‑48 for how andwhere to install the child restraintusing LATCH. If a child restraint issecured in the vehicle using asafety belt and it uses a top tether,see Lower Anchors and Tethers for

Children (LATCH System) onpage 3‑48 for top tether anchorlocations.

Do not secure a child seat in aposition without a top tether anchorif a national or local law requiresthat the top tether be anchored, or ifthe instructions that come with thechild restraint say that the top strapmust be anchored.

In Canada, the law requires thatforward-facing child restraints havea top tether, and that the tether beattached.

If the child restraint does not havethe LATCH system, you will beusing the safety belt to secure thechild restraint in this position. Besure to follow the instructions thatcame with the child restraint. Securethe child in the child restraint whenand as the instructions say.



If more than one child restraintneeds to be installed in the rearseat, be sure to read Where to Putthe Restraint on page 3‑45.

1. Put the child restraint onthe seat.

2. Pick up the latch plate, and runthe lap and shoulder portions ofthe vehicle's safety belt throughor around the restraint. The childrestraint instructions will showyou how.



4. Pull the shoulder belt all the wayout of the retractor to set thelock. When the retractor lock isset, the belt can be tightened butnot pulled out of the retractor.



5. To tighten the belt, push downon the child restraint, pull theshoulder portion of the belt totighten the lap portion of the belt,and feed the shoulder belt backinto the retractor. When installinga forward-facing child restraint, itmay be helpful to use your kneeto push down on the childrestraint as you tighten the belt.

Try to pull the belt out of theretractor to make sure theretractor is locked. If theretractor is not locked, repeatSteps 4 and 5.

6. If the child restraint has a toptether, follow the child restraintmanufacturer's instructionsregarding the use of the toptether. See Lower Anchors andTethers for Children (LATCHSystem) on page 3‑48 for moreinformation.

7. Before placing a child in thechild restraint, make sure it issecurely held in place. To check,grasp the child restraint at thesafety belt path and attempt tomove it side‐to‐side andback‐and‐forth. When the childrestraint is properly installed,there should be no more than2.5 cm (1 in) of movement.

To remove the child restraint,unbuckle the vehicle safety belt andlet it return to the stowed position.If the top tether is attached to a toptether anchor, disconnect it.

Securing Child Restraints(Front Passenger Seat)This vehicle has airbags. A rearseat is a safer place to secure aforward-facing child restraint. SeeWhere to Put the Restraint onpage 3‑45.

In addition, the vehicle has apassenger sensing system which isdesigned to turn off the right frontpassenger frontal airbag andseat-mounted side impact airbagunder certain conditions. SeePassenger Sensing System onpage 3‑32 and Passenger AirbagStatus Indicator on page 5‑13 formore information, includingimportant safety information.



A label on the sun visor says,“Never put a rear-facing child seat inthe front.” This is because the risk tothe rear-facing child is so great,if the airbag deploys.

{ WARNING

A child in a rear-facing childrestraint can be seriously injuredor killed if the right frontpassenger airbag inflates. This isbecause the back of therear-facing child restraint wouldbe very close to the inflatingairbag. A child in a forward-facingchild restraint can be seriouslyinjured or killed if the right frontpassenger airbag inflates and thepassenger seat is in a forwardposition.

(Continued)

WARNING (Continued)

Even if the passenger sensingsystem has turned off the rightfront passenger frontal airbag, nosystem is fail-safe. No one canguarantee that an airbag will notdeploy under some unusualcircumstance, even though it isturned off.

Secure rear-facing childrestraints in a rear seat, even ifthe airbag is off. If you secure aforward-facing child restraint inthe right front seat, always movethe front passenger seat as farback as it will go. It is better tosecure the child restraint in arear seat.

See Passenger Sensing Systemon page 3‑32 for additionalinformation.

If the child restraint has the LATCHsystem, see Lower Anchors andTethers for Children (LATCHSystem) on page 3‑48 for how andwhere to install the child restraintusing LATCH. If a child restraint issecured using a safety belt and ituses a top tether, see LowerAnchors and Tethers for Children(LATCH System) on page 3‑48 fortop tether anchor locations.

Do not secure a child seat in aposition without a top tether anchorif a national or local law requiresthat the top tether be anchored, or ifthe instructions that come with thechild restraint say that the top strapmust be anchored.

In Canada, the law requires thatforward-facing child restraints havea top tether, and that the tether beattached.



You will be using the lap-shoulderbelt to secure the child restraint inthis position. Follow the instructionsthat came with the child restraint.

1. Move the seat as far back as itwill go before securing theforward-facing child restraint.

When the passenger sensingsystem has turned off the rightfront passenger frontal airbagand seat-mounted side impactairbag, the off indicator on thepassenger airbag statusindicator should light and stay litwhen you start the vehicle. SeePassenger Airbag StatusIndicator on page 5‑13.

2. Put the child restraint onthe seat.

3. Pick up the latch plate, and runthe lap and shoulder portions ofthe vehicle's safety belt throughor around the restraint. The childrestraint instructions will showyou how.



5. Pull the shoulder belt all the wayout of the retractor to set thelock. When the retractor lock isset, the belt can be tightened butnot pulled out of the retractor.



6. To tighten the belt, push downon the child restraint, pull theshoulder portion of the belt totighten the lap portion of the belt,and feed the shoulder belt backinto the retractor. When installinga forward-facing child restraint, itmay be helpful to use your kneeto push down on the childrestraint as you tighten the belt.

Try to pull the belt out of theretractor to make sure theretractor is locked. If theretractor is not locked, repeatSteps 5 and 6.

7. Before placing a child in thechild restraint, make sure it issecurely held in place. To check,grasp the child restraint at thesafety belt path and attempt tomove it side‐to‐side andback‐and‐forth. When the childrestraint is properly installed,there should be no more than2.5 cm (1 in) of movement.

If the airbags are off, the offindicator in the passenger airbagstatus indicator will come on andstay on when the vehicle is started.

If a child restraint has been installedand the on indicator is lit, see “If theOn Indicator is Lit for a ChildRestraint ” under PassengerSensing System on page 3‑32 formore information.

To remove the child restraint,unbuckle the vehicle safety belt andlet it return to the stowed position.


Storage 4-1

Storage

Storage CompartmentsInstrument Panel Storage . . . . 4-1Glove Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-1Cupholders . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-1Front Storage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-2Center Console Storage . . . . . . 4-3

Additional Storage FeaturesConvenience Net . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-3

StorageCompartments

Instrument Panel Storage

An instrument panel storage area,with a removable liner, is locatedabove the radio. Slide the latchtoward the rear of the vehicle toopen the storage area.

Glove BoxPull the handle up to open.

CupholdersRemovable cupholders are locatedin front of the center console. See“Center Console Storage Area” toaccess them. Press and hold thetab at the rear of the cupholders andlift up and rearward to remove thecupholders. This disengages thetwo forward tabs.

To reinstall, place the two forwardtabs into the slots and push downon the rear of the cupholder.


4-2 Storage

For vehicles with rear seatcupholders, access them by pullingdown on the door at the back of thecenter console.

Front Storage

Storage is available in front of theshift lever. Open it by pushing onthe bottom of the door.

A driver side storage compratmentis located near the steering columnon the bottom of the instrumentpanel. Pull the cover down to open.Pull out to remove for cleaning.


Storage 4-3

Center Console StorageThe center console storage has atray and a main storage area. Pullup on the driver side latch to accessthe tray. Pull up on the passengerside latch to access the mainstorage. It is equipped with aremovable divider and a storagepocket may be at the rear of thecenter console.

The armrest on top of the centerconsole can be adjusted to arearward, middle, and forwardposition. Pull or push the front of thearmrest to adjust to the desiredposition.

An additional storage area is in frontof the main storage. Push down andthen forward on the rear of thecover to access. It has a storagetray and removable cupholders.

Additional StorageFeatures

Convenience NetUse the rear convenience net, tostore small. The net should not beused to store heavy loads.


4-4 Storage

2 NOTES


Instruments and Controls 5-1

Instruments andControls

ControlsSteering Wheel Adjustment . . . 5-2Steering Wheel Controls . . . . . . 5-2Horn . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-3Windshield Wiper/Washer . . . . . 5-3Compass . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-4Clock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-5Power Outlets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-7

Warning Lights, Gauges, andIndicatorsWarning Lights, Gauges, andIndicators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-8

Instrument Cluster . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-9Speedometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-10Odometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-10Trip Odometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-10Tachometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-10Fuel Gauge . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-10

Engine Coolant TemperatureGauge . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-11

Safety Belt Reminders . . . . . . . 5-12Airbag Readiness Light . . . . . . 5-13Passenger Airbag StatusIndicator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-13

Charging System Light . . . . . . 5-15MalfunctionIndicator Lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-15

Brake System WarningLight . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-18

Antilock Brake System (ABS)Warning Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-19

Electronic Stability Control(ESC)/Traction ControlSystem (TCS) Indicator/Warning Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-19

Engine Coolant TemperatureWarning Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-20

Tire Pressure Light . . . . . . . . . . 5-20Engine Oil Pressure Light . . . . 5-21Security Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-22High-Beam On Light . . . . . . . . . 5-22Cruise Control Light . . . . . . . . . 5-22

Information DisplaysDriver InformationCenter (DIC) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-22

Vehicle MessagesVehicle Messages . . . . . . . . . . . 5-25Brake System Messages . . . . 5-26Cruise Control Messages . . . . 5-26Door Ajar Messages . . . . . . . . . 5-26Engine Oil Messages . . . . . . . . 5-26Engine Power Messages . . . . 5-26Fuel System Messages . . . . . . 5-27Key and Lock Messages . . . . . 5-27Lamp Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-27Ride Control SystemMessages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-27

Airbag System Messages . . . . 5-29Service Vehicle Messages . . . 5-29Tire Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-29Vehicle ReminderMessages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-30

Washer Fluid Messages . . . . . 5-30

Vehicle PersonalizationVehicle Personalization . . . . . . 5-30


5-2 Instruments and Controls

Controls

Steering WheelAdjustment

The lever is located on the left sideof the steering wheel column.

To adjust the steering wheel:

1. Pull the lever down.

2. Move the steering wheel upor down.

3. Pull or push the steering wheelcloser or away from you.

4. Pull the lever up to lock thesteering wheel in place.

Do not adjust the steering wheelwhile driving.

Steering Wheel Controls

Vehicles with audio steering wheelcontrols could differ depending onthe vehicle's options. Some audiocontrols can be adjusted at thesteering wheel.

e + / e − (Volume): Press toincrease or to decrease the radiovolume.

w /xc (Next / Previous):Press to change radio stations,select tracks on a CD, or to selecttracks and navigate folders on aniPod® or USB device.

To change radio stations:

. Press and releasew orxcto go to the next or previousradio station stored as a preset.

. Press and holdw orxc togo to the next or previous radiostation in the selected band witha strong signal.

To select tracks on a CD:

Press and releasew orxc togo to the next or previous track.



To select tracks on an iPod or USBdevice:

1. Press and holdw orxcwhile listening to a song until thecontents of the current folderdisplay on the radio display.

2. Press and releasew orxcto scroll up or down the list, thenpress and holdw to play thehighlighted track.

To navigate folders on an iPod orUSB device:

1. Press and holdw orxcwhile listening to a song until thecontents of the current folderdisplay on the radio display.

2. Press and holdxc to goback to the previous folder list.

3. Press and releasew orxcto scroll up or down the list.. To select a folder, press

and holdw when the folderis highlighted.

. To go back further in thefolder list, press andholdxc.

xc (End): Press to reject anincoming call, or end a current call.

b g (Mute / Voice Recognition):Press to silence the vehiclespeakers only. Press again to turnthe sound on.

For vehicles with Bluetooth® orOnStar® systems press andhold b g for longer thantwo seconds to interact withthose systems. See Bluetooth onpage 7‑25 and the OnStar Owner'sGuide for more information.

HornPress near the horn symbols orpress on the steering wheel pad tosound the horn.

Windshield Wiper/Washer

The windshield wiper lever is on theright side of the steering wheel.

Move the lever to control thewindshield wipers.

9 (Off): Turns the windshieldwipers off.

& (Intermittent; Speed SensitiveWipers): For intermittent or speedsensitive operation. While in thisposition, turn thex band up ordown to vary frequency.



The amount of delay time variesbetween wiping cycles due to thedelay setting selected or the speedof the vehicle. As vehicle speed isincreased or decreased, the wiperinterval also increases ordecreases.

6 (Low Speed): Slow wipes.

1 (High Speed): Fast wipes.

8 (Mist): Single wipe, move thelever down, then release it. Severalwipes, hold the lever down.

Clear ice and snow from the wiperblades before using them.

If frozen to the windshield, carefullyloosen or thaw them. Damagedwiper blades should be replaced.

Heavy snow or ice can overload thewiper motor. A circuit breaker stopsthe motor until it cools. If the motorgets stuck, turn the wipers off, clearaway the snow or ice, and then turnthe wipers back on.

As an added safety feature, if thewipers are on for more than15 seconds, the vehicle'sheadlamps turn on automatically.They turn off 15 seconds after thewipers are turned off.

Windshield Washer

Press the button at the end of thewindshield wiper lever until thewashers begin.

{ WARNING

In freezing weather, do not usethe washer until the windshield iswarmed. Otherwise the washerfluid can form ice on thewindshield, blocking your vision.

When the button is released, thewashers stop, but the wiperscontinue to wipe about three timesor resume the previous speed.

Compass

Compass Operation

Press O on the rearview mirror toturn the compass display on or off.

When the ignition and the compassfeature are on, the compassdisplays the current compassdirection after a few seconds.

Compass Calibration

If after a few seconds the displaydoes not show a compass direction,(N for North for example), there maybe a strong magnetic fieldinterfering with the compass.Interference can be caused by amagnetic antenna mount, note padholder, or similar object. If theletter C appears in the compasswindow, the compass may need tobe reset or calibrated.

The mirror can be calibrated bydriving the vehicle very slowly, incircles, until the display reads adirection.



Compass Variance

The mirror is set in zone eight. It isnecessary to adjust the compass tocompensate for compass variance ifthe vehicle is driven outsidezone eight. Under certaincircumstances, such as a longdistance, cross-country trip, it isnecessary to adjust the compassvariance.

To adjust for compass variance:

1. Find your current location andvariance zone number on thezone map that follows.

2. Press and hold O until a zonenumber displays.

3. Once the zone number displays,press O repeatedly until thecorrect zone number is reached.If C appears in the compasswindow, the compass may needcalibration. See “CompassCalibration” listed previously.

Clock

Without Date Display

AM/FM Base Radio with a SingleCD Player

To set the time:

1. Turn the ignition key to ACC/ACCESSORY or ON/RUN.Press the O knob to turn theradio on.

2. Press the H button until the hourbegins flashing on the display.Press the H button a secondtime and the minute beginsflashing on the display.

3. While either the hour or theminute numbers are flashing,turn the f knob to increase ordecrease the time.



4. Press the H button again untilthe clock display stops flashingto set the currently displayedtime; otherwise, the flashingstops after five seconds and thecurrent time displayed isautomatically set.

To change the time default settingfrom 12 hour to 24 hour, pressthe H button until 12H or 24H isdisplayed. Once 12H or 24H isdisplayed, turn the f knob to thedesired option to select the setting.Press the H button again to applythe setting, or let the screentime out.

With Date Display

Radio with CD (MP3) and USBPort, and Radio with Single CD(MP3) Player

To set the time and date:

1. Turn the ignition key to ACC/ACCESSORY or ON/RUN.Press the O knob to turn theradio on.

2. Press the H button and the HR,MIN, MM, DD, YYYY (hour,minute, month, day, and year)displays.

3. Press the softkey located belowany one of the tabs that youwant to change.

4. To increase the time or date doone of the following:. Press the softkey located

below the selected tab.

. Press the ¨ SEEK, or

\ FWD button.

. Turn the f knob clockwise.

5. To decrease the time or date doone of the following:

. Press the © SEEK ors REV button.

. Turn the f knobcounterclockwise.

The date does not automaticallydisplay. To see the date press Hwhile the radio is on. The datewith display times out after afew seconds and goes back to thenormal radio and time display.

To change the time default settingfrom 12 hour to 24 hour or tochange the date default setting frommonth/day/year to day/month/year:

1. Press the H button and then thesoftkey located below theforward arrow label. Once thetime 12H and 24H, and the dateMM/DD/YYYY (month, day, andyear) and DD/MM/YYYY (day,month, and year) displays.

2. Press the softkey located belowthe desired option.

3. Press the H button again toapply the selected default, or letthe screen time out.



Power OutletsAccessory power outlets can beused to plug in electrical equipment,such as a cell phone or MP3 player.

There are two accessory poweroutlets. One accessory power outletis located inside the storage binbelow the climate controls and theother outlet is on the rear of thecenter storage console.

Remove the cover to access andreplace when not in use. Theaccessory power outlet isoperational at all times.

{ WARNING

Power is always supplied to theoutlets. Do not leave electricalequipment plugged in when thevehicle is not in use because thevehicle could catch fire and causeinjury or death.

Notice: Leaving electricalequipment plugged in for anextended period of time while thevehicle is off will drain thebattery. Always unplug electricalequipment when not in use anddo not plug in equipment thatexceeds the maximum 20 ampererating.

Certain electrical accessories maynot be compatible with theaccessory power outlet and couldoverload vehicle or adapter fuses.If a problem is experienced, seeyour dealer.

When adding electrical equipment,be sure to follow the properinstallation instructions included withthe equipment. See Add-OnElectrical Equipment on page 9‑47.

Notice: Hanging heavyequipment from the power outletcan cause damage not coveredby the vehicle warranty. Thepower outlets are designed foraccessory power plugs only, suchas cell phone charge cords.

Power Outlet 115 VoltAlternating Current

The vehicle may have a poweroutlet that can be used to plug inelectrical equipment that uses amaximum limit of 150 watts.

The power outlet is located on therear of the center console.

An indicator light on the outletcomes on when in use. The ignitionmust be in ON/RUN and equipmentrequiring less than 150 watts isplugged into the outlet, and nosystem fault is detected.



If you try to connect equipmentusing more than 150 watts or asystem fault is detected, aprotection circuit shuts off the powersupply and the indicator light turnsoff. To reset the circuit, unplug theitem and plug it back in or turn theRemote Accessory Power (RAP) offand then back on. See RetainedAccessory Power (RAP) onpage 9‑20. The power restarts whenequipment that operates within thelimit is plugged into the outlet and asystem fault is not detected.

The power outlet is not designed forand may not work properly if thefollowing are plugged in:. Equipment with high initial peak

wattage such as:compressor-driven refrigeratorsand electric power tools.

. Other equipment requiring anextremely stable power supplysuch as:microcomputer-controlledelectric blankets, touch sensorlamps, etc.

Warning Lights,Gauges, andIndicatorsWarning lights and gauges cansignal that something is wrongbefore it becomes serious enoughto cause an expensive repair orreplacement. Paying attention to thewarning lights and gauges couldprevent injury.

Warning lights come on when therecould be a problem with a vehiclefunction. Some warning lights comeon briefly when the engine is startedto indicate they are working.

Gauges can indicate when therecould be a problem with a vehiclefunction. Often gauges and warninglights work together to indicate aproblem with the vehicle.

When one of the warning lightscomes on and stays on whiledriving, or when one of the gaugesshows there may be a problem,check the section that explains whatto do. Follow this manual's advice.Waiting to do repairs can be costlyand even dangerous.



Instrument Cluster

English shown, Metric similar



SpeedometerThe speedometer shows thevehicle's speed in either kilometersper hour (km/h) or miles perhour (mph).

OdometerThe odometer shows how far thevehicle has been driven, in eitherkilometers or miles.

This vehicle has a tamper‐resistantodometer. The digital odometer willread 999,999 if it is turned back.

If the vehicle needs a new odometerinstalled, it must be set to themileage total of the old odometer.If that is not possible, then it mustbe set at zero and a label must beput on the driver door to show theold mileage reading when the newodometer was installed.

Trip OdometerThe trip odometer can show how farthe vehicle has been driven sincethe trip odometer was last reset.

The trip odometer is accessed andreset through the Driver InformationCenter (DIC). See DriverInformation Center (DIC) onpage 5‑22 for more information.

TachometerThe tachometer displays the enginespeed in revolutions perminute (rpm).

Notice: If the engine is operatedwith the tachometer in the shadedwarning area, the vehicle couldbe damaged, and the damageswould not be covered by thevehicle warranty. Do not operatethe engine with the tachometer inthe shaded warning area.

Fuel Gauge

English



Metric

When the ignition is on, the fuelgauge shows how much fuel is leftin the fuel tank. When the indicatornears empty, a message in theDriver Information Center (DIC)displays. See Fuel SystemMessages on page 5‑27 for moreinformation. The vehicle still has alittle fuel left, but the vehicle shouldbe fueled soon. An arrow on the fuelgauge indicates the side of thevehicle the fuel door is on.

Here are four things that someowners ask about. These arenormal and do not indicate aproblem with the fuel gauge:. At the service station, the gas

pump shuts off before the gaugereads full.

. It takes a little more or less fuelto fill up than the gaugeindicated. For example, thegauge may have indicated thefuel tank was half full, but itactually took a little more or lessthan half the fuel tank's capacityto fill it.

. The indicator moves a little whileturning a corner or speeding up.

. The gauge goes back to emptywhen the ignition is turned off.

Engine CoolantTemperature Gauge

English



Metric

This gauge shows the enginecoolant temperature. If the pointermoves towards the H (UnitedStates) or to the shaded thermostatsymbol area (Canada), the engine istoo hot.

A temperature indicator light turnson and a chime sounds.

The vehicle is operated undernormal driving conditions and thetemperature indicator light comeson, pull off the road, stop thevehicle, and turn off the engine assoon as possible.

Safety Belt Reminders

Driver Safety Belt ReminderLight

There is a driver safety beltreminder light on the instrumentpanel cluster.

When the vehicle is started,this light flashes and a chime maycome on to remind the driver tofasten their safety belt. Then thelight stays on solid until the belt isbuckled. This cycle may continueseveral times if the driver remains orbecomes unbuckled while thevehicle is moving.

If the driver safety belt is buckled,neither the light nor the chimecomes on.

Passenger Safety BeltReminder Light

For vehicles equipped with thepassenger safety belt reminder light,several seconds after the engine isstarted, a chime sounds forseveral seconds to remind the frontpassenger to buckle their safetybelt. The passenger safety belt lightflashes and then stays on solid untilthe belt is buckled. This cyclecontinues several times if thepassenger remains or becomesunbuckled while the vehicle ismoving.

If the passenger safety belt isbuckled, neither the chime nor thelight comes on.



The front passenger safety beltreminder light and chime may turnon if an object is put on the seatsuch as a briefcase, handbag,grocery bag, laptop, or otherelectronic device. To turn off thereminder light and/or chime, removethe object from the seat or bucklethe safety belt

Airbag Readiness LightThe system checks the airbag'selectrical system for possiblemalfunctions. If the light stays on itindicates there is an electricalproblem. The system checkincludes the airbag sensor, thepretensioners, the airbag modules,the wiring and the crash sensingand diagnostic module. For moreinformation on the airbag system,see Airbag System on page 3‑25.

The airbag readiness light flashesfor a few seconds when the engineis started. If the light does not comeon then, have it fixed immediately.

{ WARNING

If the airbag readiness light stayson after the vehicle is started orcomes on while driving, it meansthe airbag system might not beworking properly. The airbags inthe vehicle might not inflate in acrash, or they could even inflatewithout a crash. To help avoidinjury, have the vehicle servicedright away.

If there is a problem with the airbagsystem, an airbag Driver InformationCenter (DIC) message can alsocome on. See Airbag SystemMessages on page 5‑29 for moreinformation.

Passenger Airbag StatusIndicatorThe vehicle has a passengersensing system. See PassengerSensing System on page 3‑32 forimportant safety information. Theinstrument panel has a passengerairbag status indicator.



United States

Canada and Mexico

When the vehicle is started, thepassenger airbag status indicatorwill light ON and OFF, or the symbolfor on and off, for several secondsas a system check. If you are usingremote start to start the vehicle froma distance, if equipped, you may notsee the system check. Then, afterseveral more seconds, the statusindicator will light either ON or OFF,or either the on or off symbol to let

you know the status of the right frontpassenger frontal and seat-mountedside impact airbags.

If the word ON or the on symbol islit on the passenger airbag statusindicator, it means that the rightfront passenger frontal airbag andseat-mounted side impact airbagare enabled (may inflate).

If the word OFF or the off symbol islit on the passenger airbag statusindicator, it means that thepassenger sensing system hasturned off the right front passengerfrontal and seat-mounted sideimpact airbag.

If, after several seconds, both statusindicator lights remain on, or if thereare no lights at all, there may be aproblem with the lights or thepassenger sensing system. Seeyour dealer for service.

{ WARNING

If the airbag readiness light evercomes on and stays on, it meansthat something may be wrongwith the airbag system. To helpavoid injury to yourself or others,have the vehicle serviced rightaway. See Airbag ReadinessLight on page 5‑13 for moreinformation, including importantsafety information.



Charging System Light

This light comes on briefly when theignition key is turned to START, butthe engine is not running, as acheck to show it is working.

If it does not, have the vehicleserviced by your dealer.

The light should go out once theengine starts. If it stays on,or comes on while driving, therecould be a problem with thecharging system. This light couldindicate that there are problems witha generator drive belt, or that thereis an electrical problem. Have itchecked right away. If the vehiclemust be driven a short distance withthe light on, turn off accessories,such as the radio and airconditioner.

MalfunctionIndicator LampA computer system called OBD II(On-Board Diagnostics-SecondGeneration) monitors operation ofthe fuel, ignition, and emissioncontrol systems. It ensures thatemissions are at acceptable levelsfor the life of the vehicle, helping toproduce a cleaner environment.

This light should come on when theignition is on, but the engine is notrunning, as a check to show it isworking. If it does not, have thevehicle serviced by your dealer.

If the malfunction indicator lampcomes on and stays on while theengine is running, this indicates thatthere is an OBD II problem andservice is required.

Malfunctions often are indicated bythe system before any problem isapparent. Being aware of the lightcan prevent more serious damageto the vehicle. This system assiststhe service technician in correctlydiagnosing any malfunction.

Notice: If the vehicle iscontinually driven with this lighton, after a while, the emissioncontrols might not work as well,the vehicle fuel economy mightnot be as good, and the enginemight not run as smoothly. Thiscould lead to costly repairs thatmight not be covered by thevehicle warranty.

Notice: Modifications made to theengine, transmission, exhaust,intake, or fuel system of thevehicle or the replacementof the original tires with otherthan those of the same TirePerformance Criteria (TPC) canaffect the vehicle's emissioncontrols and can cause this lightto come on. Modifications tothese systems could lead to



costly repairs not covered by thevehicle warranty. This could alsoresult in a failure to pass arequired Emission Inspection/Maintenance test. SeeAccessories and Modifications onpage 10‑3.

This light comes on during amalfunction in one of two ways:

Light Flashing: A misfire conditionhas been detected. A misfireincreases vehicle emissions andcould damage the emission controlsystem on the vehicle. Diagnosisand service might be required.

To prevent more serious damage tothe vehicle:. Reduce vehicle speed.. Avoid hard accelerations.. Avoid steep uphill grades.. If towing a trailer, reduce the

amount of cargo being hauled assoon as it is possible.

If the light continues to flash, whenit is safe to do so, stop the vehicle.Find a safe place to park thevehicle. Turn the vehicle off, wait atleast 10 seconds, and restart theengine. If the light is still flashing,follow the previous steps and seeyour dealer for service as soon aspossible.

Light On Steady: An emissioncontrol system malfunction hasbeen detected on the vehicle.Diagnosis and service might berequired.

The following may correct anemissions system malfunction:. Make sure the fuel cap is fully

installed. See Filling the Tank onpage 9‑39. The diagnosticsystem can determine if the fuelcap has been left off orimproperly installed. A loose ormissing fuel cap allows fuel toevaporate into the atmosphere.A few driving trips with the capproperly installed should turn thelight off.

. Make sure the electrical systemis not wet. The system could bewet if the vehicle was driventhrough a deep puddle of water.The condition is usuallycorrected when the electricalsystem dries out. A few drivingtrips should turn the light off.

. Make sure to fuel the vehiclewith quality fuel. Poor fuel qualitycauses the engine not to run asefficiently as designed and cancause: stalling after start-up,stalling when the vehicle ischanged into gear, misfiring,hesitation on acceleration,or stumbling on acceleration.These conditions might go awayonce the engine is warmed up.

If one or more of theseconditions occurs, change thefuel brand used. It will require atleast one full tank of the properfuel to turn the light off.

See Recommended Fuel onpage 9‑35.



If none of the above have made thelight turn off, your dealer can checkthe vehicle. The dealer has theproper test equipment anddiagnostic tools to fix anymechanical or electrical problemsthat might have developed.

Emissions Inspection andMaintenance Programs

Some state/provincial and localgovernments may have programs toinspect the on-vehicle emissioncontrol equipment. For theinspection, the emission system testequipment is connected to thevehicle’s Data LinkConnector (DLC).

The DLC is under the instrumentpanel to the left of the steeringwheel. See your dealer if assistanceis needed.

The vehicle may not passinspection if:. The malfunction indicator lamp is

on with the engine running, or ifthe light does not come on whenthe ignition is turned to ON/RUNwhile the engine is off.

. The critical emission controlsystems have not beencompletely diagnosed by thesystem. This can happen if thebattery has recently beenreplaced or if the battery has rundown. The diagnostic systemevaluates critical emissioncontrol systems during normaldriving. This can takeseveral days of routine driving.If this has been done and thevehicle still does not pass theinspection, your dealer canprepare the vehicle forinspection.



Brake System WarningLightThe vehicle brake system consistsof two hydraulic circuits. If onecircuit is not working, the remainingcircuit can still work to stop thevehicle. For normal brakingperformance, both circuits need tobe working

If the warning light comes on, thereis a brake problem. Have the brakesystem inspected right away.

English Metric

This light comes on briefly when theignition key is turned to ON/RUN.If it does not come on then, have itfixed so it will be ready to warn ifthere is a problem.

When the ignition is on, the brakesystem warning light also comes onwhen the parking brake is set. Thelight stays on if the parking brakedoes not fully release. If it stays onafter the parking brake is fullyreleased, it means there is a brakeproblem.

The Driver Information Center (DIC)may display a BRAKE FLUIDmessage. See Brake SystemMessages on page 5‑26 for moreinformation.

If the light comes on while driving,pull off the road and carefully stop.The brake pedal may be harder topush or the pedal may go closer tothe floor. It may take longer to stop.Try turning off and restarting thevehicle one or two times, if the lightis still on, have the vehicle towed forservice. See Towing the Vehicle onpage 10‑88

{ WARNING

The brake system might not beworking properly if the brakesystem warning light is on.Driving with the brake systemwarning light on can lead to acrash. If the light is still on afterthe vehicle has been pulled offthe road and carefully stopped,have the vehicle towed forservice.



Antilock Brake System(ABS) Warning Light

For vehicles with the Antilock BrakeSystem (ABS), this light comes onbriefly when the engine is started.

If it does not, have the vehicleserviced by your dealer. If thesystem is working normally theindicator light then goes off.

If the ABS light stays on, turn theignition off. If the light comes onwhile driving, stop as soon as it issafely possible and turn the ignitionoff. Then start the engine again toreset the system. If the ABS lightstays on, or comes on again whiledriving, the vehicle needs service.If the regular brake system warninglight is not on, the vehicle still hasbrakes, but not antilock brakes.

If the regular brake system warninglight is also on, the vehicle does nothave antilock brakes and there is aproblem with the regular brakes.See Brake System Warning Light onpage 5‑18.

For vehicles with a DriverInformation Center (DIC), see BrakeSystem Messages on page 5‑26 forall brake related DIC messages.

Electronic StabilityControl (ESC)/TractionControl System (TCS)Indicator/Warning Light

The Electronic Stability Control(ESC) system or the TractionControl System (TCS) indicator/warning light comes on briefly whenthe engine is started.

If the light does not come on, havethe vehicle serviced by the dealer.If the system is working normally theindicator light turns off.

If the light is on while certain DICmessages display, this indicatesthat the ESC and TCS are notworking or are disabled.

If the light is on and not flashing,the TCS and potentially the ESCsystem have been disabled. Checkthe DIC messaging to determinewhich feature(s) is no longerfunctioning and whether it isbecause of the driver turning off thefeature(s), or because the system isnot working properly and the vehiclerequires service.

If the TCS is disabled, wheel spin isnot limited. If the ESC system isdisabled, the system does not aid inmaintaining directional control of thevehicle.



If the indicator/warning light is onand flashing, the TCS or the ESCsystem is actively working. Checkthe DIC messaging for details todetermine which system is working.If the LOW TRACTION messageappears, the system is limitingwheel spin. If the ESC ACTIVEmessage appears, the system isaiding in maintaining directionalcontrol of the vehicle.

See Electronic Stability Control(ESC) on page 9‑31 and TractionControl System (TCS) on page 9‑29for more information.

See Ride Control System Messageson page 5‑27 for more informationon the messages associated withthis light.

Engine CoolantTemperature WarningLight

This light comes on briefly whilestarting the vehicle.

If it does not, have the vehicleserviced by the dealer. If the systemis working normally the indicatorlight goes off.

Notice: Driving with the enginecoolant temperature warning lighton could cause the vehicle tooverheat. See Engine Overheatingon page 10‑20. The vehicle'sengine could be damaged, and itmight not be covered by thevehicle warranty. Never drive withthe engine coolant temperaturewarning light on.

The engine coolant temperaturewarning light comes on when theengine has overheated.

If this happens pull over and turn offthe engine as soon as possible. SeeEngine Overheating on page 10‑20for more information.

Tire Pressure Light

For vehicles with the Tire PressureMonitor System (TPMS), this lightcomes on briefly when the engine isstarted. It provides informationabout tire pressures and the TPMS.



When the Light is On Steady

This indicates that one or more ofthe tires are significantlyunderinflated.

A tire pressure message canaccompany the light. See TireMessages on page 5‑29 for moreinformation. Stop as soon aspossible, and inflate the tires to thepressure value shown on the Tireand Loading Information label. SeeTire Pressure on page 10‑51 formore information.

When the Light Flashes First andThen is On Steady

This indicates that there may be aproblem with the TPMS. The lightflashes for about a minute and stayson steady for the remainder of theignition cycle. This sequencerepeats with every ignition cycle.See Tire Pressure MonitorOperation on page 10‑54 for moreinformation.

Engine Oil Pressure Light

{ WARNING

Do not keep driving if the oilpressure is low. The engine canbecome so hot that it catches fire.Someone could be burned. Checkthe oil as soon as possible andhave the vehicle serviced.

Notice: Lack of proper engine oilmaintenance can damage theengine. The repairs would not becovered by the vehicle warranty.Always follow the maintenanceschedule for changing engine oil.

The oil pressure light should comeon briefly as the engine is started.If it does not come on have thevehicle serviced by your dealer.

If the light comes on and stays on, itmeans that oil is not flowing throughthe engine properly. The vehiclecould be low on oil and might havesome other system problem. Seeyour dealer.



Security Light

For information regarding this lightand the vehicle's security system,see Content Theft Deterrent.

High-Beam On Light

The high-beam on light comes onwhen the high-beam headlamps arein use.

See Headlamp High/Low-BeamChanger on page 6‑2 for moreinformation.

Cruise Control Light

The cruise control light comes onwhenever the cruise control is set.

The light goes out when the cruisecontrol is turned off. See CruiseControl on page 9‑32 for moreinformation.

Information Displays

Driver InformationCenter (DIC)Your vehicle has a DriverInformation Center (DIC). The DICdisplay gives you the status of manyof your vehicle's systems. The DICis also used to display driverpersonalization menu modes andwarning/status messages. Allmessages will appear in the DICdisplay, located at the bottom of theinstrument panel cluster.



The DIC buttons are located on theleft side of the steering wheel.

INFO (Information): Press thisbutton to scroll through the vehicleinformation mode displays.

r (Reset): Press this button toreset some vehicle informationmode displays, select apersonalization menu modesetting, or acknowledge a warningmessage.

Press and hold the information andreset buttons at the same time forone second, then release the

buttons to enter the personalizationmenu. See Vehicle Personalizationon page 5‑30 for more information.

The DIC comes on when the ignitionis on. The DIC has different modeswhich can be accessed by pressingthe DIC buttons. The buttonfunctions are detailed in thefollowing.

Information Modes

INFO (Information): Press thisbutton to scroll through the followingvehicle information modes:

Outside Air Temperature

The outside air temperature will bedisplayed at the same time as theOdometer and the Trip Odometer.The temperature outside of thevehicle will be displayed in eitherdegrees Celsius (°C) or degreesFahrenheit (°F). The outside airtemperature appears on the left sideof the DIC display and theodometer, or trip odometer, appearson the right side of the display.

Odometer

Press the information button untilthe outside air temperature and theodometer displays. This modeshows the total distance the vehiclehas been driven in eitherkilometers (km) or miles (mi).

To change the DIC display toEnglish or metric units, see “UNITS”under Vehicle Personalization onpage 5‑30.

Trip Odometer

Press the information button untilthe outside air temperature alongwith A or B displays. These modesshow the current distance traveledsince the last reset for each tripodometer in either kilometers (km)or miles (mi). Both odometers canbe used at the same time.

To reset the trip odometer to zero,press and hold the reset button for afew seconds while the desired tripodometer is displayed.



FUEL RANGE

Press the information button untilFUEL RANGE displays. This modeshows the remaining distance youcan drive without refueling in eitherkilometers (km) or miles (mi). It isbased on fuel economy and the fuelremaining in the tank.

When the fuel level is low, FUELRANGE LOW displays.

The fuel economy data used todetermine fuel range is an averageof recent driving conditions. As yourdriving conditions change, this datais gradually updated. The FUELRANGE mode cannot be reset.

MPG (L/100 KM) AVG (Average)

Press the information button untilMPG (L/100 KM) AVG displays. Thismode shows how many liters per100 kilometers (L/100 km) or milesper gallon (mpg) your vehicle isgetting based on current and pastdriving conditions.

To reset the average fuel economy,press and hold the reset buttonwhile MPG (L/100 KM) AVG isdisplayed. Average fuel economy isthen calculated starting from thatpoint. If the average fuel economy isnot reset, it is continually updatedeach time you drive.

MPG (L/100 KM) INST(Instantaneous)

Press the information button untilMPG (L/100 KM) INST displays. Thismode shows the current fueleconomy at a particular momentand changes frequently as drivingconditions change. This modeshows the instantaneous fueleconomy in liters per 100 kilometers(L/100 km) or miles per gallon(mpg). Unlike average fueleconomy, this screen cannot bereset.

AV (Average) SPEED

Press the information button untilAV SPEED displays. This modeshows the vehicle's average speedin kilometers per hour (km/h) ormiles per hour (mph).

To reset the average vehicle speed,press and hold the reset buttonwhile AV SPEED is displayed.

OIL LIFE

Press the information button untilOIL LIFE displays. The engine oillife system shows an estimate of theoil's remaining useful life. It shows100% when the system is reset afteran oil change. It alerts you tochange the oil on a scheduleconsistent with your drivingconditions.



In addition to the engine oil lifesystem monitoring the oil life,additional maintenance isrecommended in the MaintenanceSchedule in this manual. SeeEngine Oil on page 10‑9 andScheduled Maintenance onpage 11‑2.

Always reset the engine oil lifesystem after an oil change. See“How to Reset the Engine Oil LifeSystem” under Engine Oil LifeSystem on page 10‑13.

Tire Pressure

On vehicles with the Tire PressureMonitor System (TPMS), thepressure for each tire can be viewedin the DIC. The tire pressure isshown in either kilopascals (kPa) orpounds per square inch (psi). Pressthe information button untilLF ## PSI (kPa) ## RF displaysfor the front tires. Press theinformation button again untilLR ## PSI (kPa) ## RR displays forthe rear tires.

If a low tire pressure condition isdetected by the system whiledriving, a message advising you toadd air will appear in the display.See Tire Pressure on page 10‑51and Tire Messages on page 5‑29 formore information.

Vehicle MessagesThe following messages appear ifthere is a problem detected in oneof your vehicle's systems.

A message clears when thevehicle's condition is no longerpresent. To acknowledge amessage and clear it from thedisplay, press and hold any of theDIC buttons. If the condition is stillpresent, the warning messagecomes back on the next time thevehicle is turned off and back on.With most messages, a warningchime sounds when the messagedisplays. Your vehicle may haveother warning messages.



Brake System Messages

BRAKE FLUID

This message displays, while theignition is on, when the brake fluidlevel is low. The brake systemwarning light on the instrumentpanel cluster also comes on. SeeBrake System Warning Light onpage 5‑18 for more information.Have the brake system serviced byyour dealer as soon as possible.

PUSH PARK PEDAL

This message displays if the parkingbrake is left engaged. See ParkingBrake on page 9‑28 for moreinformation.

Cruise Control Messages

CRUISE ENGAGED

This message displays when thecruise control system is active. SeeCruise Control on page 9‑32 formore information.

Door Ajar Messages

DOOR AJAR

This message displays if one ormore of the vehicle's doors are notclosed properly. Make sure that thedoor(s) are closed completely.

TRUNK AJAR

This message displays when thetrunk is not closed completely. Makesure that the trunk is closedcompletely. See Trunk on page 2‑9for more information.

Engine Oil Messages

CHANGE OIL SOON

This message displays when the lifeof the engine oil has expired and itshould be changed.

When this message isacknowledged and cleared from thedisplay, the engine oil life systemmust still be reset separately. SeeEngine Oil Life System onpage 10‑13, Engine Oil on

page 10‑9, and ScheduledMaintenance on page 11‑2 for moreinformation.

Engine Power Messages

ENG (Engine) PWR (Power)REDUCED

This message displays when thevehicle's engine power is reduced.Reduced engine power can affectthe vehicle's ability to accelerate.If this message is on, but there is noreduction in performance, proceedto your destination. Theperformance may be reduced thenext time the vehicle is driven. Thevehicle may be driven at a reducedspeed while this message is on, butacceleration and speed may bereduced. Anytime this messagestays on, the vehicle should betaken to your dealer for service assoon as possible.



Fuel System Messages

CHECK GAS CAP

This message displays if the fuelcap has not been fully tightened.Recheck the fuel cap to make surethat it is on properly. A few drivingtrips with the cap properly installedshould turn the message off.

LOW FUEL

This message displays when yourvehicle is low on fuel. Refill the fueltank as soon as possible. See FuelGauge on page 5‑10, Fuel onpage 9‑35, and Filling the Tank onpage 9‑39 for more information.

Key and Lock Messages

KEY FOB BATT (Battery) LOW

This message displays if theRemote Keyless Entry (RKE)transmitter battery is low. Replacethe battery in the transmitter. See“Battery Replacement” underRemote Keyless Entry (RKE)System Operation on page 2‑3.

Lamp Messages

AUTO (Automatic)LIGHTS OFF

This message displays if theautomatic headlamp system isdisabled with the headlamp switch.See Automatic Headlamp Systemon page 6‑3 for more information.

AUTO (Automatic) LIGHTS ON

This message displays if theautomatic headlamp system isenabled with the headlamp switch.See Automatic Headlamp Systemon page 6‑3 for more information.

Ride Control SystemMessages

ESC (Electronic StabilityControl) ACTIVE

If your vehicle has ElectronicStability Control (ESC), thismessage displays and the ESC/TCSlight on the instrument panel clusterflashes when ESC is assisting youwith directional control of thevehicle. You may feel or hear thesystem working and see thismessage displayed in the DIC.Slippery road conditions may existwhen this message is displayed, soadjust your driving accordingly. Thismessage may stay on for afew seconds after ESC stopsassisting you with directional controlof the vehicle. This is normal whenthe system is operating. SeeElectronic Stability Control (ESC) onpage 9‑31 and Electronic StabilityControl (ESC)/Traction ControlSystem (TCS) Indicator/WarningLight on page 5‑19 for moreinformation.



ESC (Electronic StabilityControl) OFF

If your vehicle has ElectronicStability Control (ESC), thismessage displays and the ESC/TCSlight on the instrument panel clustercomes on solid when ESC is turnedoff. Adjust your driving accordingly.See Electronic Stability Control(ESC) on page 9‑31 and ElectronicStability Control (ESC)/TractionControl System (TCS) Indicator/Warning Light on page 5‑19 formore information.

LOW TRACTION

If your vehicle has the TractionControl System (TCS), thismessage displays and the ESC/TCSlight on the instrument panel clusterflashes when the system is activelylimiting wheel spin. Slippery roadconditions may exist if this messageis displayed, so adjust your drivingaccordingly. This message stays onfor a few seconds after the systemstops limiting wheel spin. SeeTraction Control System (TCS) on

page 9‑29 and Electronic StabilityControl (ESC)/Traction ControlSystem (TCS) Indicator/WarningLight on page 5‑19 for moreinformation.

SERVICE ESC (ELECTRONICSTABILITY CONTROL)

If your vehicle has ElectronicStability Control (ESC), thismessage displays and a chimesounds if there has been a problemdetected with ESC. The ESC/TCSlight also appears on the instrumentpanel cluster. This light stays onsolid as long as the detectedproblem remains present. When thismessage displays, the system is notworking. Adjust your drivingaccordingly. See Electronic StabilityControl (ESC) on page 9‑31 andElectronic Stability Control (ESC)/Traction Control System (TCS)Indicator/Warning Light onpage 5‑19 for more information.

If this message turns on while youare driving, pull off the road as soonas possible and stop carefully. Try

resetting the system by turning theignition off and then back on. If thismessage still stays on or turns backon again while you are driving, yourvehicle needs service. Have theESC inspected by your dealer assoon as possible.

SERVICE TRACTION

If your vehicle has the TractionControl System (TCS), thismessage displays and a chimesounds when the system is notfunctioning properly. The ESC/TCSlight also appears on the instrumentpanel cluster. This light stays onsolid as long as the detectedproblem remains present. When thismessage displays, the system is notworking. Adjust your drivingaccordingly. See Traction ControlSystem (TCS) on page 9‑29 andElectronic Stability Control (ESC)/Traction Control System (TCS)Indicator/Warning Light onpage 5‑19 for more information.Have the system serviced by yourdealer as soon as possible.



TRACTION OFF

If your vehicle has the TractionControl System (TCS), thismessage displays and the ESC/TCSlight on the instrument panel clustercomes on solid when the system isturned off. Adjust your drivingaccordingly. See Traction ControlSystem (TCS) on page 9‑29 andElectronic Stability Control (ESC)/Traction Control System (TCS)Indicator/Warning Light onpage 5‑19 for more information.

Airbag System Messages

SERVICE AIR BAG

This message displays when thereis a problem with the airbag system.Have your vehicle serviced by yourdealer immediately.

Service Vehicle Messages

ENGINE DISABLED

This message displays if the startingof the engine is disabled. Have yourvehicle serviced by your dealerimmediately.

POWER STEERING

On some vehicles, this messagedisplays if a problem has beendetected with the electric powersteering. Have your vehicle servicedby your dealer immediately.

Tire Messages

SVC (Service) TIRE MONITOR

On vehicles with the Tire PressureMonitor System (TPMS), thismessage displays if a part on theTPMS is not working properly. Thetire pressure light also flashes andthen remains on during the sameignition cycle. See Tire PressureLight on page 5‑20. Severalconditions may cause this messageto appear. See Tire Pressure

Monitor Operation on page 10‑54 formore information. If the warningcomes on and stays on, there maybe a problem with the TPMS. Seeyour dealer.

TIRE LOW ADD AIR

On vehicles with the Tire PressureMonitor System (TPMS), thismessage displays when thepressure in one or more of thevehicle's tires is low on air. The lowtire pressure warning light alsocomes on. See Tire Pressure Lighton page 5‑20. If this messageappears on the DIC, stop as soonas you can. Have the tire pressureschecked and set to those shown onthe Tire Loading Information label.See Tires on page 10‑42, VehicleLoad Limits on page 9‑12, and TirePressure on page 10‑51. The DICalso shows the tire pressure values.See Driver Information Center (DIC)on page 5‑22.



Vehicle ReminderMessages

ICE POSSIBLE

This message displays when theoutside air temperature is coldenough to create icy roadconditions. Adjust your drivingaccordingly.

Washer Fluid Messages

LOW WASHER FLUID

This message displays when thevehicle's windshield washer fluid islow. Fill the windshield washer fluidreservoir to the proper level as soonas possible. See Washer Fluid onpage 10‑23.

VehiclePersonalizationYour vehicle has personalizationcapabilities that allow you toprogram certain features to apreferred setting. All of the featureslisted may not be available on yourvehicle. Only the features availablewill be displayed on the DIC.

The default settings for the featureswere set when your vehicle left thefactory, but may have been changedfrom their default state sincethat time.

To change feature settings, use thefollowing procedure:

Entering Personalization Menu

1. Turn the ignition on while thevehicle is stopped.

To avoid excessive drain on thebattery, it is recommended thatthe headlamps are turned off.

2. Press and hold the informationand reset buttons at the sametime for one second, thenrelease to enter thepersonalization menu.

If the vehicle speed is greaterthan 3 km/h (2 mph), only theUNITS menu will be accessible.

3. Press the information button toscroll through the availablepersonalization menu modes.

Press the reset button to scrollthrough the available settings foreach mode.

If you do not make a selectionwithin ten seconds, the displaywill go back to the previousinformation displayed.



Personalization Menu Modes

OIL LIFE RESET

When this feature is displayed, youcan reset the engine oil life system.To reset the system, see Engine OilLife System on page 10‑13. See“OIL LIFE” under Driver InformationCenter (DIC) on page 5‑22 for moreinformation.

UNITS

This feature allows you to select theunits of measurement in whichthe DIC will display the vehicleinformation. When UNITS appearson the display, press and hold thereset button for at least one secondto scroll through the availablesettings:

ENGLISH (default in UnitedStates): All information will bedisplayed in English units.

METRIC (default in Canada): Allinformation will be displayed inmetric units.

To select a setting and moveon to the next feature, press theinformation button while the desiredsetting is displayed on the DIC.

REMOTE START

If your vehicle has remote start, thisfeature allows remote start to beturned off or on. Remote start allowsyou to start the engine from outsideof the vehicle using your RemoteKeyless Entry (RKE) transmitter.When REMOTE START appears onthe display, press and hold the resetbutton for at least one second toscroll through the available settings:

OFF: The remote start feature willbe disabled.

ON (default): The remote startfeature will be enabled.

See Remote Vehicle Start onpage 2‑5 for more information.

To select a setting and move on tothe next feature, press theinformation button while the desiredsetting is displayed on the DIC.

LOCK HORN

This feature, which allows thevehicle's horn to chirp every timethe lock button on the RemoteKeyless Entry (RKE) transmitter ispressed, can be enabled ordisabled. When LOCK HORNappears on the display, press andhold the reset button for at leastone second to scroll through theavailable settings:

OFF (default): The horn will notchirp on the first press of the lockbutton on the RKE transmitter. Thehorn will still chirp on the secondpress.

ON: The horn will chirp on the firstpress of the lock button on the RKEtransmitter.

See Remote Keyless Entry (RKE)System Operation on page 2‑3 formore information.

To select a setting and move on tothe next feature, press theinformation button while the desiredsetting is displayed on the DIC.



UNLOCK HORN

This feature, which allows thevehicle's horn to chirp on the firstpress of the unlock button on theRemote Keyless Entry (RKE)transmitter, can be enabled ordisabled. When UNLOCK HORNappears on the display, press andhold the reset button for at leastone second to scroll through theavailable settings:

OFF (default): The horn will notchirp when the unlock button on theRKE transmitter is pressed.

ON: The horn will chirp on the firstpress of the unlock button on theRKE transmitter.



LIGHT FLASH

This feature, which allows thevehicle's exterior hazard/turn signallighting to flash every time the lock,unlock, or trunk release buttons onthe Remote Keyless Entry (RKE)transmitter are pressed, can beenabled or disabled. When LIGHTFLASH appears on the display,press and hold the reset button forat least one second to scroll throughthe available settings:

OFF: The exterior hazard/turnsignal lighting will not flash whenthe lock, unlock, or trunk releasebuttons on the RKE transmitter arepressed.

ON (default): The exterior hazard/turn signal lighting will flash whenthe lock, unlock, or trunk releasebuttons on the RKE transmitter arepressed.



DELAY LOCK

This feature, which delays theactual locking of the vehicle, can beenabled or disabled. When DELAYLOCK appears on the display, pressand hold the reset button for at leastone second to scroll through theavailable settings:

ON (default): The doors will notlock until five seconds after the lastdoor is closed. You can temporarilyoverride delayed locking bypressing the power lock switch orthe lock button on the RemoteKeyless Entry (RKE) transmitter asecond time.



OFF: The doors will lockimmediately when pressing thepower lock switch or the lock buttonon the RKE transmitter.

See Power Door Locks on page 2‑7,Delayed Locking on page 2‑8, andRemote Keyless Entry (RKE)System Operation on page 2‑3 formore information.


AUTO UNLK (Unlock)

This feature, which allows thevehicle to automatically unlockcertain doors, can be enabled ordisabled. When AUTO UNLKappears on the display, press andhold the reset button for at leastone second to scroll through theavailable settings:

ALL (default): All of the doors willautomatically unlock.

DRIVER: The driver's door willautomatically unlock.

NONE: None of the doors willautomatically unlock. You will needto manually unlock the doors.

See Automatic Door Locks onpage 2‑8 for more information.


UNLK (Unlock)

This screen displays only if DRIVERor ALL is selected for the AUTOUNLK feature. This featuredetermines when the automatic doorunlocking will occur. When UNLKappears on the display, press andhold the reset button for at leastone second to scroll through theavailable settings:

KEY OFF: The door(s) will unlockwhen the key is turned off.

SHIFT TO P (Park) (default): Thedoor(s) will unlock when the vehicleis shifted into P (Park).

See Automatic Door Locks onpage 2‑8 for more information.


EXT (Exterior) LIGHTS

This feature, which allows thevehicle's exterior perimeter lightingto turn on each time the unlockbutton on the Remote Keyless Entry(RKE) transmitter is pressed, can beenabled or disabled. When EXTLIGHTS appears on the display,press and hold the reset button forat least one second to scroll throughthe available settings:

OFF: The exterior perimeterlighting will not turn on when theunlock button on the RKEtransmitter is pressed.



ON (default): The exteriorperimeter lighting will turn on whenthe unlock button on the RKEtransmitter is pressed.



LANGUAGE

This feature allows you to select thelanguage in which the DIC willdisplay. When LANGUAGE appearson the display, press and hold thereset button for at least one secondto scroll through the availablesettings:

ENGLISH (default): All messageswill appear in English.

FRENCH: All messages will appearin French.

SPANISH: All messages willappear in Spanish.

GERMAN: All messages willappear in German.

To select a setting and exit out ofthe personalization menu mode,press the information button whilethe desired setting is displayed onthe DIC.

Exiting Personalization Menu

The personalization menu will beexited when any of the followingconditions occur:. A ten second time period has

elapsed.. The ignition is turned off.. The end of the personalization

menu list is reached.


Lighting 6-1

Lighting

Exterior LightingExterior Lamp Controls . . . . . . . . 6-1Exterior Lamps OffReminder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-2

Headlamp High/Low-BeamChanger . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-2

Flash-to-Pass . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-2Daytime RunningLamps (DRL) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-2

Automatic HeadlampSystem . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-3

Delayed Headlamps . . . . . . . . . . 6-3Hazard Warning Flashers . . . . . 6-4Turn and Lane-ChangeSignals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-4

Fog Lamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-4

Interior LightingInstrument Panel IlluminationControl . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-5

Dome Lamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-5Reading Lamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-5

Lighting FeaturesEntry/Exit Lighting . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-5Parade Dimming . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-6Battery Load Management . . . . 6-6Battery Power Protection . . . . . . 6-7

Exterior Lighting

Exterior Lamp Controls

The band on the lever located onthe left side of the steering column,operates the exterior lamps.

The exterior lamp control has thefollowing four positions:

2 (Headlamps): Turns on theheadlamps, parking lamps, andtaillamps.

; (Parking Lamps): Turns on theparking lamps and taillamps only.


6-2 Lighting

AUTO (Automatic HeadlampSystem): Automatically turns onthe Daytime Running Lamps duringdaytime, and the headlamps,parking lamps, and taillamps atnight.

P (Off/On): Turn the band to thisposition to turn on the AutomaticHeadlamp System. In Canada, thisposition only works when a vehicleis in the P (Park) position.

To turn on the Automatic HeadlampSystem, turn the switch to off/on. Toturn them off, turn the switch to off/on again. This is a momentarycontrol switch that springs backwhen released. The AutomaticHeadlamp System always turns onat the beginning of an ignition cycle.

Exterior Lamps OffReminderIf the drivers door is opened and theignition is turned off while leavingthe lamps on, a warning chime willsound.

Headlamp High/Low-Beam ChangerTo change the headlamps from lowbeam to high beam, push the turnsignal/multifunction lever awayfrom you.

This instrument panel cluster light3 comes on if the high beamlamps are turned on while theignition is in ON/RUN.

To change the headlamps from highbeam to low beam, pull the turnsignal lever toward you.

Flash-to-PassThis feature lets the high-beamheadlamps be used to signal adriver in front of you that you wantto pass.

Pull the turn signal/multifunctionlever toward you until the high-beamheadlamps come on, then releasethe lever to turn them off.

Daytime RunningLamps (DRL)Daytime Running Lamps (DRL) canmake it easier for others to see thefront of your vehicle during the day.Fully functional DRL are required onall vehicles first sold in Canada. Thevehicle has a light sensor on top ofthe instrument panel that controlsthe DRL. Do not cover this sensoror the head lamps will be on whenthey are not needed.

The DRL system makes thelow-beam headlamps come on at areduced brightness when thefollowing conditions are met:. The ignition is on.. The exterior lamps control is

in AUTO.. The exterior lamps control is in

the parking lamps only position(This applies only to vehiclesthat are first sold in Canada).


Lighting 6-3

. The light sensor detects daytimelight.

. The parking brake is released orthe vehicle is not in P (Park).

When the DRL system is on, thetaillamps, sidemarker lamps,parking lamps, and instrument panellights are not on unless you turn theexterior lamps control to the parkinglamp position.

The regular headlamp systemshould be turned on when they areneeded.

Automatic HeadlampSystemWhen it is dark enough outside, theautomatic headlamp system turnson the headlamps at the normalbrightness along with other lampssuch as the taillamps, sidemarker,parking lamps, and the instrumentpanel lights. The radio lights willalso be dim.

The vehicle has a light sensor ontop of the instrument panel thatcontrols the automatic headlampsystem. Do not cover the sensor orthe automatic headlamp system willturn on when it is not needed.

There is a delay in the transitionbetween the daytime and nighttimeoperation of the DRL and theautomatic headlamp systems sothat driving under bridges or brightoverhead street lights does notaffect the system. The DRL andautomatic headlamp systems willonly be affected when the lightsensor sees a change in lightinglasting longer than this delay.

If the vehicle is started in a darkgarage, the automatic headlampsystem comes on immediately.Once the vehicle leaves the garage,it takes about one minute for theautomatic headlamp system tochange to DRL if it is light outside.During that delay, the instrumentpanel cluster may not be as brightas usual. Make sure the instrumentpanel brightness control is in the full

bright position. See InstrumentPanel Illumination Control onpage 6‑5.

To idle the vehicle with theautomatic headlamp system off, turnthe ignition on and set the exteriorlight switch to the off/on position.For vehicles first sold in Canada,the transmission must stay inP (Park) for this function.

The regular headlamps should beused when needed.

Delayed HeadlampsThe delayed headlamps featurekeeps the headlamps on for20 seconds after the key is turned toLOCK/OFF, then the headlampsautomatically turn off.

To override the 20 second delayedheadlamp feature while it is activeturn the turn signal/multifunctionlever up one position and then backto AUTO.


6-4 Lighting

Hazard Warning Flashers

| (Hazard Warning Flasher):Press this button located on theinstrument panel, to make the frontand rear turn signal lamps flash onand off. This warns others that youare having trouble.

Press| again to turn theflashers off.

Turn and Lane-ChangeSignals

An arrow on the instrument panelcluster flashes in the direction of theturn or lane change.

Move the lever all the way up ordown to signal a turn.

Raise or lower the lever until thearrow starts to flash to signal a lanechange. Release the lever and theturn signal automatically flashesthree times. If more flashes aredesired, continue to hold the lever.

The lever returns to its startingposition when it is released.

If a turn signal arrow flashes rapidlyor does not come on, a signal bulbmay need to be replaced. SeeFuses on page 10‑35.

Fog LampsFor vehicles with fog lamps, thebutton for this feature is located onthe instrument panel, to the left ofthe steering wheel.

The ignition must be on for the foglamps to work.

# : Press to turn the fog lamps onor off. An indicator light comes onwhen the fog lamps are on.

The parking lamps automaticallyturn on and off when the fog lampsare turned on and off.

The fog lamps turn off while thehigh-beam headlamps areturned on.

Some localities have laws thatrequire the headlamps to be onalong with the fog lamps.


Lighting 6-5

Interior Lighting

Instrument PanelIllumination ControlThe knob for this control is locatedon the instrument panel to the left ofthe steering column.

D (Instrument PanelBrightness): Turn the knobclockwise or counterclockwise tobrighten or dim the lights. Turn theknob completely clockwise to turnon the interior lamps.

Dome LampsThe dome lamps come on when anydoor is opened. They turn off afterall the doors are closed.

The dome lamps can also be turnedon by turning the instrument panelbrightness knob, located on theinstrument panel to the left of thesteering column, clockwise to thefarthest position. In this position, thedome lamps remain on whether adoor is opened or closed.

Reading LampsFor vehicles with front and rearreading lamps, press the lens toturn the lamp on and off, while thedoors are closed. These lampscome on automatically when anydoor is opened.

Lighting Features

Entry/Exit LightingThe lamps inside the vehicle comeon when any door is opened. Theselamps fade out about 20 secondsafter all of the doors have beenclosed or when the ignition is turnedto ON/RUN. They also come onwhen the unlock symbol button orthe horn symbol is pressed on theRemote Keyless Entry (RKE)system transmitter.

The lamps inside the vehicle stay onfor about 20 seconds after the key isremoved from the ignition to providelight as you exit.


6-6 Lighting

Parade DimmingParade dimming is a separatelighting mode that comes on whilethe parking lamps are turned onduring the day. It prevents thedisplay lights and indicator lightsfrom being dim, while the parkinglamps are used during the day.

Battery LoadManagementThe vehicle has Electric PowerManagement (EPM) that estimatesthe battery's temperature and stateof charge. It then adjusts the voltagefor best performance and extendedlife of the battery.

When the battery's state of chargeis low, the voltage is raised slightlyto quickly bring the charge back up.

When the state of charge is high,the voltage is lowered slightly toprevent overcharging. If the vehiclehas a voltmeter gauge or a voltagedisplay on the Driver InformationCenter (DIC), you may see thevoltage move up or down. This isnormal. If there is a problem, analert will be displayed.

The battery can be discharged atidle if the electrical loads are veryhigh. This is true for all vehicles.This is because the generator(alternator) may not be spinning fastenough at idle to produce all thepower needed for very highelectrical loads.

A high electrical load occurs whenseveral of the following are on, suchas: headlamps, high beams, foglamps, rear window defogger,climate control fan at high speed,heated seats, engine cooling fans,trailer loads, and loads plugged intoaccessory power outlets.

EPM works to prevent excessivedischarge of the battery. It does thisby balancing the generator's outputand the vehicle's electrical needs.It can increase engine idle speed togenerate more power, wheneverneeded. It can temporarily reducethe power demands of someaccessories.

Normally, these actions occur insteps or levels, without beingnoticeable. In rare cases at thehighest levels of corrective action,this action may be noticeable to thedriver. If so, a Driver InformationCenter (DIC) message might bedisplayed, such as BATTERYSAVER ACTIVE, BATTERYVOLTAGE LOW, or LOW BATTERY.If one of these messages displays, itis recommended that the driverreduce the electrical loads as muchas possible. See Driver InformationCenter (DIC) on page 5‑22.


Lighting 6-7

Battery Power ProtectionThe vehicle has a battery run-downprotection feature designed toprotect the vehicle's battery.

When any interior lamp (trunk,reading, or visor vanity) is left onwhile the ignition is turned off, thebattery run-down protection systemwill automatically shut the lamp(s)off after 20 minutes. This will avoiddraining the battery.

To reactivate the interior lamps, doone of the following:. Turn on the ignition.. Turn the exterior lamp control off

and then on.. Open a door.

. Press any Remote KeylessEntry (RKE) transmitter button(if equipped).

. Press the remote trunk releasebutton.

. Press the power door lockswitch.

The battery run-down feature willalso be activated when any door onthe vehicle is left open and theignition is in LOCK/OFF.


6-8 Lighting

2 NOTES


Infotainment System 7-1

InfotainmentSystem

IntroductionInfotainment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-1Theft-Deterrent Feature . . . . . . . 7-2Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-3

RadioAM-FM Radio . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-7Satellite Radio . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-10Radio Reception . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-14Backglass Antenna . . . . . . . . . . 7-15Satellite Radio Antenna . . . . . . 7-15

Audio PlayersCD Player . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-15Auxiliary Devices . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-20

PhoneBluetooth . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-25

Introduction

InfotainmentDetermine which radio the vehiclehas and read the following pages tobecome familiar with its features.

{ WARNING

Taking your eyes off the road forextended periods could cause acrash resulting in injury or deathto you or others. Do not giveextended attention toentertainment tasks while driving.

This system provides access tomany audio and non audio listings.


7-2 Infotainment System

To minimize taking your eyes off theroad while driving, do the followingwhile the vehicle is parked:. Become familiar with the

operation and controls of theaudio system.

. Set up the tone, speakeradjustments, and preset radiostations.

For more information, see DefensiveDriving on page 9‑2.

Notice: Contact your dealerbefore adding any equipment.

Adding audio or communicationequipment could interfere withthe operation of the engine, radio,or other systems, and coulddamage them. Follow federalrules covering mobile radio andtelephone equipment.

Notice: The chime signals relatedto safety belts, parking brake, andother functions of your vehicleoperate through the radio/entertainment system. If thatequipment is replaced oradditional equipment is added toyour vehicle, the chimes may notwork. Make sure that replacementor additional equipment iscompatible with your vehiclebefore installing it. SeeAccessories and Modifications onpage 10‑3.

The vehicle has RetainedAccessory Power (RAP). With RAP,the audio system can be playedeven after the ignition is turned off.See Retained Accessory Power(RAP) on page 9‑20 for moreinformation.

Theft-Deterrent FeatureTheftLock® is designed todiscourage theft of the vehicle'sradio by learning a portion of theVehicle Identification Number (VIN).The radio does not operate if it isstolen or moved to a differentvehicle.



Operation

Radio with CD (Base)



Radio with CD (MP3) and USB Port shown, Radio with CD (MP3) similar

The vehicle has one of these radiosas its infotainment system.

Softkeys

The Radio with CD (MP3) and USBPort, and the Radio with CD (MP3)have five softkeys located below theradio display. Softkeys are used to

control functions that appear on theradio display as tabs directly abovethe softkeys.

Using the Radio

O (Power/Volume): Press to turnthe system on and off. Turn toincrease or decrease the volume.

(Information): Press to switch thedisplay between the radio stationfrequency and the time. While theignition is off, press this button todisplay the time.

Speed Compensated Volume(SCV): Radios with the SpeedCompensated Volume (SCV) featureautomatically adjust the radiovolume to compensate for road andwind noise as the vehicle speeds upor slows down, so that the volumelevel is consistent.

To activate SCV:

1. Set the radio volume to thedesired level.

2. Press MENU to display the radiosetup menu.

3. Press the softkey under theAUTO VOLUM tab on the radiodisplay.



4. Press the softkey under thedesired Speed CompensatedVolume setting (OFF, Low, Med,or High) to select the level ofradio volume compensation.The display times out afterapproximately 10 seconds. Eachhigher setting allows for moreradio volume compensation atfaster vehicle speeds.

Setting the Tone (Bass/Treble)Radio with CD

To adjust the bass, or treble:

1. Press the f knob until Bass orTreble displays.

2. To adjust the setting, do one ofthe following:

. Turn the f knob.

. Press either ¨ SEEK, or

© SEEK button.

. Press either\ FWD, or

s REV button.

EQ (Equalization): Press thisbutton to choose bass and trebleequalization settings designed fordifferent types of music. SelectingMANUAL or changing bass ortreble, returns the EQ to the manualbass and treble settings.

Unique EQ settings can be savedfor each source.

Setting the Tone (Bass/Midrange/Treble) Radio withCD (MP3) and USB Port, Radiowith CD (MP3)

BASS/MID/TREB (Bass, Midrange,or Treble): To adjust the bass,midrange, or treble:

1. Press the f knob until the tonecontrol tabs display.

2. Highlight the desired tonecontrol tab by doing one of thefollowing:

. Pressing the f knob.

. Press the softkey under thedesired tab.

3. Adjust the setting by doing oneof the following:

. Turn the f knob clockwiseor counterclockwise.


© SEEK button.

. Press the\ FWD, or

s REV button.

If a station's frequency is weak or ifthere is static, decrease the treble.

To quickly adjust bass, midrange,or treble to the middle position,press the softkey positioned underthe BASS, MID, or TREB tab formore than 2 seconds. A beepsounds and the level adjusts to themiddle position.

To quickly adjust all tone andspeaker controls to the middleposition, press the f knob for morethan 2 seconds until a beep sounds.



EQ (Equalization): Press thisbutton to choose bass and trebleequalization settings designed fordifferent types of music. SelectingMANUAL or changing bass ortreble, returns the EQ to the manualbass and treble settings.

Unique EQ settings can be savedfor each source.

If the radio has a Bose® audiosystem, the EQ settings are eitherMANUAL or TALK.

Adjusting the Speakers(Balance/Fade) Radio with CD

To adjust the balance or fade:

1. Press the` or press the fknob until the speaker controllabel displays.

2. To adjust the setting, do one ofthe following:

. Turn the f knob.

. Press either ¨ SEEK, or

© SEEK button.

. Press either\ FWD, or

s REV button.

Adjusting the Speakers(Balance/Fade) Radio with CD(MP3) and USB Port, Radiowith CD (MP3)

BAL/FADE (Balance/Fade): Toadjust the balance or fade:

1. Press the f knob until thespeaker control tabs display.

2. Highlight the desired speakercontrol tab by doing one of thefollowing:

. Pressing the f knob.

. Press the softkey under thedesired tab.

3. Adjust the setting by doing oneof the following:

. Turn the f knob clockwiseor counterclockwise.


© SEEK button.

. Press the\ FWD, or

s REV button.

To quickly adjust all speaker andtone controls to the middle position,press the f knob for more than2 seconds.

If the Rear Seat Audio (RSA) isturned on, the radio disables FADEand mutes the rear speakers.



Radio Messages

Calibration Error: Displays if theradio is no longer calibratedproperly for the vehicle. The vehiclemust be returned to your dealer forservice.

Loc or Locked: Displays when theTheftLock® system has activated.Take the vehicle to your dealer forservice.

If any error occurs repeatedly or ifan error cannot be corrected,contact your dealer.

Radio

AM-FM Radio

Radio Data System (RDS)

The radio may have RDS. The RDSfeature is available for use only onFM stations that broadcast RDSinformation. This system relies uponreceiving specific information fromthese stations and only works whenthe information is available. Whilethe radio is tuned to an FM-RDSstation, the station name or callletters display. In rare cases, a radiostation could broadcast incorrectinformation that causes the radiofeatures to work improperly. If thishappens, contact the radio station.

4 (Information) (RDS Features):For vehicles with RDS features,press 4 to display additional textinformation related to the currentFM-RDS station. If information isavailable, the song title informationdisplays on the top line of thedisplay and artist information

displays on the bottom line. Wheninformation is not available, “NOINFO” displays.

Auto Text (RDS Features): Ifadditional information is availablefor the current song being played,Auto Text will automatically page/scroll the information everythree seconds above the FAVpresets on the radio display. Bydefault, Auto Text is enabled.

To change the Auto Text setting:


2. Press the softkey under AUTOTXT tab on the radio display.

3. Press the softkey under the ONor OFF tab on the radio display.

If 4 is pressed and the song title orartist information is longer than whatcan be displayed, the extrainformation will page everythree seconds when Auto Text isactivated.



Finding a Station

BAND: Press to choosebetween FM1, FM2, AM, or XM™(if equipped) on the Radio with CD(Base). Press to choose betweenFM, AM, XM (if equipped) on theRadio with CD (MP3) and USB Port,or the Radio with CD (MP3).

f (Tune): Turn to select radiostations.

© SEEK: Press to seek or scanstations with a strong signal in theselected band.. To seek stations, press and

release © SEEK to go to theprevious station and stay there.

. To scan stations, press and hold© SEEK for a few seconds untilthe radio beeps once. The radiogoes to a station, plays for afew seconds, then goes to thenext station. Press © SEEKagain to stop scanning.

. To scan preset stations in theselected band, press and hold© SEEK for four seconds until adouble beep sounds. The radiogoes to a stored preset, playsfor a few seconds, then goes tothe next stored preset. Press© SEEK again to stop scanningpreset stations.

¨ SEEK: Press to seek or scanstations with a strong signal in theselected band.. To seek stations, press and

release ¨ SEEK to go to thenext station and stay there.

. To scan stations, press and hold¨ SEEK for a few seconds untilthe radio beeps once. The radiogoes to a station, plays for afew seconds, then goes to thenext station. Press ¨ SEEKagain to stop scanning.

. To scan preset stations in theselected band, press and hold¨ SEEK for four seconds until adouble beep sounds. The radiogoes to a stored preset, plays fora few seconds, then goes to thenext stored preset. Press¨ SEEK again to stop scanningpreset stations.

Storing Radio Stations

Drivers are encouraged to storeradio station while the vehicle isparked, see Defensive Driving onpage 9‑2. Tune to stored radiostations using the presets, favoritesbutton, and steering wheel controls,if the vehicle has this feature.



Radios that have a FAV button storeradio stations as favorites, up to36 stations can be programmed asfavorites using the 6 softkeys belowthe radio station frequency tabs andby using the FAV button. Press theFAV button to go through up to6 pages of favorites, each having6 favorite stations available perpage. Each page of favorites cancontain any combination of AM, FM,or XM, if equipped, stations.

Radios that do not have a FAVbutton store radio stations aspresets, up to 18 stations(6 FM1, 6 FM2, and 6 AM), can beprogrammed on the 6 numberedpushbuttons.

Storing a Radio Station as aPreset

Radios that have numberedpushbuttons store radio stations aspresets.

Up to 18 stations (six FM1, six FM2,and six AM), can be programmed onthe six numbered buttons.

To store preset stations:

1. Tune to a radio station.

2. Press and hold one of the6 numbered pushbuttons for3 seconds until a beep sounds.

3. Repeat Steps 1 and 2 to storeadditional radio stations.

Storing a Radio Station as aFavorite

Radio that have a FAV button storeradio stations as favorites.

To store a station as a favorite:

1. Tune to a radio station.

2. Press the FAV button to displaythe page where the station willbe stored.

3. Press and hold one of the6 softkeys until a beep sounds.

4. Repeat Steps 1 through 3 tostore additional radio stations.

The number of favorites pages canbe setup using the MENU button. Tosetup the number of favoritespages:

1. Press the MENU button.

2. Press the softkey located belowthe FAV 1-6 tab.

3. Select the number of favoritespages by pressing the softkeylocated below the displayedpage numbers.

4. Press the FAV button, or let themenu time out, to return to theoriginal main radio screenshowing the radio stationfrequency tabs and to begin theprocess of programmingfavorites.



Satellite Radio

XM™ Satellite Radio Service

XM is a satellite radio service that isbased in the 48 contiguous UnitedStates and 10 Canadian provinces.XM Satellite Radio has a widevariety of programming andcommercial-free music,coast-to-coast, and in digital-qualitysound. A service fee is required toreceive the XM service. If XMService needs to be reactivated, theradio will display "No SubscriptionPlease Renew" on channel XM1.For more information, contact XM atwww.xmradio.com or call1-800-929-2100 in the U.S. andwww.xmradio.ca or call1-877-438-9677 in Canada.

4 (Information) (XM Satellite RadioService): For vehicles with XM,press 4 to display additional textinformation related to the currentXM channel. If information isavailable, the song title informationdisplays on the top line of thedisplay and artist informationdisplays on the bottom line. Wheninformation is not available, “NOINFO” displays.

Auto Text (Satellite RadioService): If additional information isavailable for the current song beingplayed, Auto Text will automaticallypage/scroll the information everythree seconds above the FAVpresets on the radio display. Bydefault, Auto Text is enabled.

To change the Auto Text setting:


2. Press the softkey under AUTOTXT tab on the radio display.

3. Press the softkey under the ONor OFF tab on the radio display.

If 4 is pressed and the song title orartist information is longer thanwhat can be displayed, the extrainformation will page everythree seconds when Auto Text isactivated.

Finding an XM Channel

BAND: Press to switch betweenAM, FM, or XM™, if equipped.

f (Tune): Turn to manually selectan XM channel.

© SEEK: Press to go to theprevious XM channel.. To scan stations, press and hold

© SEEK for a few seconds untilthe radio beeps once. The radiogoes to a cahnnel, plays for afew seconds, then goes to thenext station. Press © SEEKagain to stop scanning.



¨ SEEK: Press to go to the nextXM channel.. To scan stations, press and hold

¨ SEEK for a few seconds untilthe radio beeps once. The radiogoes to a station, plays for afew seconds, then goes to thenext station. Press ¨ SEEKagain to stop scanning.

s REV: Press to go to theprevious XM category.

\ FWD: Press to go to the nextXM category.

Finding a Category (CAT)Channel

To find XM channels in a category:

1. Press the CAT button to displaythe category tabs. Continuepressing the CAT button until thedesired category name displays.. Radios with CD and DVD

can also navigate thecategory list by pressing the\ FWD or thes REVbutton.

2. Press either of the two softkeysbelow the desired category tabto immediately tune to the firstXM station in that category.

To go to the previous or next XMstation in the selected category,do one of the following:

. Turn the f knob.

. Press the softkey below theright or left arrows in thecategory tab.

. Press © SEEK or ¨ SEEK.

3. To exit the category searchmode, press the FAV button orBAND button to display thefavorites again.

Adding and Removing Categories

Categories cannot be added orremoved while the vehicle is movingfaster than 8 km/h (5 mph).

To add or remove a category:


2. Press the softkey located belowthe XM CAT tab.

3. Turn the f knob to display thecategory you want to add orremove.

4. Press the softkey located underthe Add or Remove tab.

To restore all removedcategories, press the softkeyunder the Restore All tab.

5. Repeat the steps to removemore categories.



Storing XM Channels

Drivers are encouraged to storeradio station while the vehicle isparked, see Defensive Driving onpage 9‑2. Tune to stored radiostations using the presets, favoritesbutton, and steering wheel controls,if the vehicle has this feature.

Up to 36 stations can beprogrammed as favorites using the6 softkeys below the radio stationfrequency tabs and by using theFAV button. Press the FAV button togo through up to 6 pages offavorites, each having 6 favoritestations available per page. Eachpage of favorites can contain anycombination of AM, FM, or XM,if equipped, stations.

Storing an XM Channel as aFavorite

To store a station as a favorite:

1. Tune to an XM channel.

2. Press the FAV button to displaythe page where the station willbe stored.

3. Press and hold one of the6 softkeys until a beep sounds.

4. Repeat Steps 1 through 3 tostore additional radio stations.

The number of favorites pages canbe setup using the MENU button. Tosetup the number of favoritespages:


2. Press the softkey located belowthe FAV 1-6 tab.

3. Select the number of favoritespages by pressing the softkeylocated below the displayedpage numbers.

4. Press the FAV button, or let themenu time out, to return to theoriginal main radio screenshowing the radio stationfrequency tabs and to begin theprocess of programmingfavorites.

XM Radio Messages

XL (Explicit LanguageChannels): These channels, or anyothers, can be blocked at acustomer's request, by calling1-800-929-2100 in the U.S. and1-877-438-9677 in Canada.

XM Updating: The encryption codein the receiver is being updated, andno action is required. This processshould take no longer than30 seconds.

No XM Signal: The system isfunctioning correctly, but the vehicleis in a location that is blocking theXM™ signal. When the vehicle ismoved into an open area, the signalshould return.

Loading XM: The audio system isacquiring and processing audio andtext data. No action is needed. Thismessage should disappear shortly.

Channel Off Air: This channel isnot currently in service. Tune in toanother channel.



Channel Unauth : This channel isblocked or cannot be received withyour XM Subscription package.

Channel Unavail: This previouslyassigned channel is no longerassigned. Tune to another station.If this station was one of thepresets, choose another station forthat preset button.

No Artist Info: No artistinformation is available at this timeon this channel. The system isworking properly.

No Title Info: No song titleinformation is available at this timeon this channel. The system isworking properly.

No CAT Info: No categoryinformation is available at this timeon this channel. The system isworking properly.

No Information: No text orinformational messages areavailable at this time on thischannel. The system is workingproperly.

No Subscription Please Renew:XM subscription needs to bereactivated. Contact XM atwww.xmradio.com or call1-800-929-2100 in the U.S. andwww.xmradio.ca or call1-877-438-9677 in Canada.

CAT Not Found: There are nochannels available for the selectedcategory. The system is workingproperly.

XM Theftlocked: The XM receiverin the vehicle could have previouslybeen in another vehicle. For securitypurposes, XM receivers cannot beswapped between vehicles. If thismessage is received after havingthe vehicle serviced, check withyour dealer.

XM Radio ID: If tuned to channel 0,this message alternates with theXM™ Radio 8 digit radio ID label.This label is needed to activate theservice.

Unknown: If this message isreceived when tuned to channel 0,there could be a receiver fault.Consult with your dealer.

Check Antenna: If this messagedoes not clear within a short periodof time, the receiver or antennacould have a fault. Consult with yourdealer.

Check XM Receivr: If thismessage does not clear within ashort period of time, the receivercould have a fault. Consult with yourdealer.

XM Not Available: If this messagedoes not clear within a short periodof time, the receiver could have afault. Consult with your dealer.



Radio ReceptionFrequency interference and staticcan occur during normal radioreception if items such as cell phonechargers, vehicle convenienceaccessories, and external electronicdevices are plugged into theaccessory power outlet. If there isinterference or static, unplug theitem from the accessory poweroutlet.

FM

FM signals only reach about 16 to65 km (10 to 40 mi). Although theradio has a built-in electronic circuitthat automatically works to reduceinterference, some static can occur,especially around tall buildings orhills, causing the sound to fade inand out.

AM

The range for most AM stations isgreater than for FM, especially atnight. The longer range can causestation frequencies to interfere witheach other. For better radioreception, most AM radio stationsboost the power levels during theday, and then reduce these levelsduring the night. Static can alsooccur when things like storms andpower lines interfere with radioreception. When this happens, tryreducing the treble on the radio.

XM™ Satellite Radio Service

XM Satellite Radio Service givesdigital radio reception from coast tocoast in the 48 contiguous UnitedStates, and in Canada. Just as withFM, tall buildings or hills caninterfere with satellite radio signals,

causing the sound to fade in andout. In addition, traveling or standingunder heavy foliage, bridges,garages, or tunnels may cause lossof the XM signal for a period of time.

Cellular Phone Usage

Cellular phone usage may causeinterference with the vehicle's radio.This interference may occur whenmaking or receiving phone calls,charging the phone's battery,or simply having the phone on. Thisinterference can cause an increasedlevel of static while listening to theradio. If static is received whilelistening to the radio, unplug thecellular phone and turn it off.



Backglass AntennaThe AM-FM antenna is integratedwith the rear window defogger,located in the rear window. Makesure that the inside surface of therear window is not scratched andthat the lines on the glass are notdamaged. If the inside surface isdamaged, it could interfere withradio reception. For proper radioreception, the antenna connectorneeds to be properly attached to thepost on the glass.

If a cellular telephone antennaneeds to be attached to the glass,make sure that the grid lines for theAM-FM antenna are not damaged.There is enough space between thegrid lines to attach a cellulartelephone antenna withoutinterfering with radio reception.

Notice: Using a razor blade orsharp object to clear the insiderear window can damage the rearwindow antenna and/or the rearwindow defogger. Repairs would

not be covered by the vehiclewarranty. Do not clear the insiderear window with sharp objects.

Notice: Do not apply aftermarketglass tinting with metallic film.The metallic film in some tintingmaterials will interfere with ordistort the incoming radioreception. Any damage caused toyour backglass antenna due tometallic tinting materials will notbe covered by the vehiclewarranty.

Satellite Radio AntennaFor vehicles with XM satellite radioservice, the antenna is located onthe roof of the vehicle. Keep theantenna clear of obstructions forclear radio reception.

Audio Players

CD PlayerSome CD players can play MP3CD-R or CD-RW discs, see “MP3”later in this section for moreinformation.

The CD player can play the smaller8 cm (3 in) single discs with anadapter ring.

Care of the CD Player

Do not add labels to a disc, it couldget caught in the CD player. Use amarking pen to write on the top ofthe disc if a description is needed.

Do not use CD lens cleaners, theycould damage the CD player.

Notice: If a label is added to aCD, more than one CD is insertedinto the slot at a time, or anattempt is made to play scratchedor damaged CDs, the CD playercould be damaged. While usingthe CD player, use only CDs ingood condition without any label,



load one CD at a time, and keepthe CD player and the loading slotfree of foreign materials, liquids,and debris.

If an error displays, see “CDMessages” later in this section.

Care of CDs

Store a disc in its original case or aprotective case and away fromdirect sunlight and dust. If thebottom of a disc is damaged it maynot play properly or at all. Do nottouch the bottom of a disc whilehandling it, pick it up by graspingthe outer edges or the edge of thehole and the outer edge.

If the surface of a disc is dirty, takea soft, lint free cloth or dampen aclean, soft cloth in a mild, neutraldetergent solution mixed with water,and clean it. Make sure the wipingprocess starts from the center tothe edge.

Inserting a Disc

Insert the disc partway into the slot,label side up. The player pulls it inand the disc begins playing.

Use an adapter ring when playingthe smaller 8 cm (3 in) discs.Smaller discs with the adapter ringare loaded the same way as afull-size disc.

Ejecting a Disc

Z EJECT: Press to eject the disc.If the disc is not removed afterseveral seconds, the CD playerautomatically pulls the disc back in.

Playing a CD

When a CD is inserted into theplayer the CD symbol displays, andas each new track starts to play thetrack number displays.

If the ignition or radio is turned offwhen a CD is in the player, the CDstays in the player. If the ignition orradio is turned on when a CD is inthe player, the CD starts to playwhere it stopped, if it was the lastselected audio source.

Buttons and Knobs

The buttons and knobs on the radiocontrol the following features.

f (Tune): Turn to select tracks onthe CD.

© SEEK: Press to go to the start ofthe current track, if more thanten seconds have played. Press andhold or press multiple times tocontinue moving backward throughthe tracks on the CD.

¨ SEEK: Press to go to the nexttrack. Press and hold or pressmultiple times to continue movingforward through the tracks onthe CD.



s REV (Reverse): Press and holdto reverse playback quickly within atrack. Sound is heard at a reducedvolume and the elapsed time of thetrack displays. Release to resumeplaying the track.

\ FWD (Fast Forward): Pressand hold to advance playbackquickly within a track. Sound isheard at a reduced volume and theelapsed time of the track displays.Release to resume playing thetrack.

4 (Information): Press to displayavailable additional informationabout the current track.

BAND: Press to listen to the radiowhile a CD is playing. The CDremains inside the CD player.

CD/AUX (CD/Auxiliary): Press toplay a CD while listening to theradio or a portable audio device.

Press this button again and thesystem automatically searches foran auxiliary input device, such as aportable audio player. If a portableaudio player is not connected, NoAux Input Device Found maydisplay.

Softkeys

The five softkeys below the radiodisplay are used to control functionsthat display as tabs.

The softkeys below the radio displaycontrol the following features.

RDM (Random): Tracks can belistened to in random, rather thansequential order.

To use random:

1. Press the softkey below RDMtab until Random Current Discdisplays.

2. Press the softkey again to turnoff random play.

MP3 Supported Files

The Radio with CD (MP3), Radiowith USB and CD (MP3), have thecapability of playing an MP3 CD-Ror CD-RW disc.

The radio can also play discs thatcontain both uncompressed CDaudio and MP3 files. When a disccontains both types of audio, the CDplayer reads all MP3 files first, thenthe uncompressed CD audio files.

Supported File and FolderStructure

The radio supports:. Up to 50 folders.. Up to 8 folders in depth.. Up to 50 playlists.. Up to 255 files.. Playlists with an .m3u or .wpl

extension.. Files with an .mp3 or .cda file

extension.



Root Directory

The root directory is treated as afolder. Files are stored in the rootdirectory when the disc or storagedevice does not contain folders.Files accessed from the rootdirectory of a disc display asF1 ROOT.

Empty Folder

Folders that do not contain files areskipped, and the player advances tothe next folder that contains files.

File Naming

The song name that displays is thesong name that is contained in theID3 tag. If the song name is notpresent in the ID3 tag, then theradio displays the file name withoutthe file extension as the track name.

Track names longer than32 characters or four pages areshortened. The display does notshow parts of words on the lastpage of text and the extension ofthe filename is not displayed.

Playlists

Discs that have playlists thatwere created using WinAmp™,MusicMatch™, or Real Jukebox™software can be accessed, however,there is no playlist editing capabilityusing the radio. These playlists aretreated as special folders containingcompressed audio song files.

Playing an MP3

Order of Play

Tracks are played in the followingorder:. Play begins from the first track in

the first playlist and continuessequentially through all tracks ineach playlist. When the lasttrack of the last playlist hasplayed, play continues from thefirst track of the first playlist.

. Play begins from the first track inthe first folder and continuessequentially through all tracks ineach folder. When the last trackof the last folder has played,play continues from the firsttrack of the first folder.

When playback starts from a newfolder, the new track name displaysunless folder mode has beenchosen as the default display, thenthe new folder name displays.

Buttons and Knobs


f (Tune): Turn to select MP3 fileson the disc.

© SEEK: Press to go to the start ofthe track, if more than ten secondshave played. Press and hold orpress multiple times to continuemoving backward through tracks.



¨ SEEK: Press to go to the nexttrack. Press and hold or pressmultiple times to continue movingforward through tracks.

s REV (Reverse): Press and holdto reverse playback quickly. Soundis heard at a reduced volume andthe elapsed time of the trackdisplays. Releases REV toresume playing.

\ FWD (Fast Forward): Pressand hold to advance playbackquickly. Sound is heard at a reducedvolume and the elapsed time of thetrack displays. Release\ FWD toresume playing.

4 (Information): Press to displayavailable additional informationabout the current track.

BAND: Press to listen to the radiowhile an MP3 disc is playing. TheMP3 disc remains inside the CDplayer.

CD/AUX (CD/Auxiliary): Press toplay an MP3 disc while listening tothe radio or a portable audio device.Press this button again and thesystem automatically searches foran auxiliary input device, such as aportable audio player. If a portableaudio player is not connected, NoAux Input Device Found maydisplay.

Softkeys



Sc (Previous Folder): Pressthe softkey below Sc to go to thefirst track in the previous folder.

c T (Next Folder): Press thesoftkey belowc T to go to the firsttrack in the next folder.

RDM (Random): MP3 files can belistened to on a CD in random,rather than sequential order. To userandom:

1. Press the softkey under theRDM tab until Random CurrentDisc displays to play songs fromthe current CD in random order.

2. Press the same softkey again toturn off random play.

h (Music Navigator): Press thesoftkey belowh to have the filesplayed in order by artist or album.The player scans the disc to sort thefiles by artist and album ID3 taginformation. It can take severalminutes to scan the disc dependingon the number of files on the disc.The radio may begin playing while itis scanning in the background.



When the scan is finished, the discbegins playing files in order byartist. The current artist playing isshown on the second line of thedisplay. Once all songs by that artistare played, the player moves to thenext artist in alphabetical order andbegins playing files by that artist.

To listen to files by another artist,press the softkey located beloweither arrow tab. The disc goes tothe next or previous artist inalphabetical order. Continuepressing either softkey below thearrow tab until the desired artistdisplays.

To change from playback by artist toplayback by album:

1. Press the softkey located belowthe Sort By tab.

2. Press one of the softkeys belowthe album tab from the sortscreen.

3. Press the softkey below theback tab to return to the mainmusic navigator screen.

The album name displays on thesecond line between the arrows andsongs from the current albumbegins to play. Once all songs fromthat album have played, the playermoves to the next album inalphabetical order on the disc andbegins playing MP3 files from thatalbum.

To exit music navigator mode, pressthe softkey below the Back tab toreturn to normal MP3 playback.

CD Player Messages

CHECK DISC: If an error messagedisplays and/or the disc comes out,it could be for one of the followingreasons:. The CD player is very hot. When

the temperature returns tonormal, the disc should play.

. The road is very rough. Whenthe road becomes smoother, thedisc should play.

. The disc is dirty, scratched, wet,or upside down.

. The air is very humid. If so, waitabout an hour and try again.

. A problem may have occurredwhile burning the disc.

. The label could be caught in theCD player.

If the disc is not playing correctly forany other reason, try a knowngood disc.

If any error occurs repeatedly or ifan error cannot be corrected,contact your dealer. If the radiodisplays an error message, write itdown and provide it to your dealerwhen reporting the problem.

Auxiliary DevicesThis vehicle may have a 3.5 mm(1/8 in) auxiliary input jack and aUSB port, located on the audiofaceplate. Some portable audiodevices such as iPods®, MP3players, and USB storage devicescan be connected to the vehicleusing a 3.5 mm (1/8 in) cable or aUSB cable.



Drivers are encouraged to set upany auxiliary device while thevehicle is in P (Park). SeeDefensive Driving on page 9‑2 formore information on driverdistraction.

Using the 3.5mm (1/8 in)Auxiliary Input Jack

The radio system may have a3.5 mm (1/8 in) auxiliary input jacklocated on the lower right or left sideof the faceplate. This is not an audiooutput; do not plug the headphoneset into the front auxiliary input jack.An external audio device such as aniPod®, laptop computer, MP3 player,CD changer, etc. can be connectedto the auxiliary input jack for use asanother audio source.

To use a portable audio player,connect a 3.5 mm (1/8 in) cable tothe auxiliary input jack. When adevice is connected, press the CD/AUX button to begin playing audiofrom the device over the vehiclespeakers.

O (Power/Volume): Turn to adjustthe volume. Additional volumeadjustments may have to be madefrom the portable device if thevolume is too quiet or not loud.

BAND: Press to listen to the radiowhile a portable audio device isconnected to the auxiliary input. Theportable audio device continuesplaying until it is stopped orturned off.

CD/AUX (CD/Auxiliary): Press toplay a CD while a portable audiodevice is connected to the auxiliaryinput. Press again and the systembegins playing audio from theconnected portable audio player. If aportable audio player is notconnected, No Aux Input Devicemay display.

Using the USB Port

The radio may have a USB portlocated on the lower right side of thefaceplate. Radios that have a USBport can play .mp3 and .wma files

that are stored on a USB storagedevice as well as tracks that arestored on an iPod®.

USB Supported File and FolderStructure

The radio supports:. Up to 700 folders.. Up to 8 folders in depth.. Up to 65,535 files.. Folder and file names up to

64 bytes.. Files with an .mp3 or .wma file

extension.. AAC files stored on an iPod.. FAT16. FAT32

Root Directory

The root directory is treated as afolder. Files are stored in the rootdirectory when the disc or storagedevice does not contain folders.



Files accessed from the rootdirectory of a USB device display asF1 ROOT.

Empty Folder

Folders that do not contain files areskipped, and the player advances tothe next folder that contains files.

File Naming

The song name that displays is thesong name that is contained in theID3 tag. If the song name is notpresent in the ID3 tag, then theradio displays the file name withoutthe file extension as the track name.

Track names longer than 32characters or four pages areshortened. The display does notshow parts of words on the lastpage of text and the extension ofthe filename is not displayed.

Preprogrammed Playlists

Playlists that have an .m3u or .plsfile extension and are stored on aUSB device may be supported bythe radio with a USB port.

Order of Play

Tracks are played in the followingorder:. Play begins from the first track in

the first playlist and continuessequentially through all tracks ineach playlist. When the lasttrack of the last playlist hasplayed, play continues from thefirst track of the first playlist.

. Play begins from the first track inthe first folder and continuessequentially through all tracks ineach folder. When the last trackof the last folder has played,play continues from the firsttrack of the first folder.

When play enters a new folder, thedisplay does not automatically showthe new folder name unless thefolder mode has been chosen asthe default display. The new trackname displays.

Connecting a USB StorageDevice or iPod

The radio buttons, knobs andsoftkeys are used to control a USBstorage device or an iPod when it isconnected to the USB port.

To connect a USB storage device,connect the device to the USB portlocated on the front of the radio.

To connect an iPod, connect oneend of the USB cable that camewith the iPod to the iPod’s dockconnector and connect the otherend to the USB port located on thefront of the radio. If the vehicle is onand the USB connection works, “OKto disconnect” and a GM logo mayappear on the iPod and iPodappears on the radio's display.

The iPod charges while it isconnected to the USB port if theingition is in the ACC/ACCESSORYor ON/RUN position. When theignition is turned OFF, the iPodautomatically powers off and will notcharge or draw power from thevehicle's battery.



Older iPod's that are not supportedcan still be used by connecting it tothe 3.5 mm (1/8 in) auxiliary inputjack using a 3.5 mm (1/8 in) cable.

Using a USB Storage Deviceor iPod

The buttons and knobs on the radioand the softkeys below the radiodisplay are used to control a USBstorage device or an iPod.

Buttons and Knobs


f (Tune): Turn to select files.

© SEEK: Press to go to the start ofthe track, if more than ten secondshave played. Press and hold ©SEEK or press it multiple times tocontinue moving backward throughtracks.

¨ SEEK: Press to go to the nexttrack. Press and hold ¨ SEEK orpress it multiple times to continuemoving forward through tracks.

s REV (Reverse): Press and holdto reverse playback quickly. Soundis heard at a reduced volume.Releases REV to resume playing.

\ FWD (Fast Forward): Pressand hold to advance playbackquickly. Sound is heard at a reducedvolume. Release\ FWD toresume playing.

4 (Information): Press to displayadditional information about theselected track.

Softkeys


To use the softkeys, press a softkeybelow any tab that is displayed, or ifno tabs are displayed, press the firstor last softkey below the radiodisplay to display the tabs.


j (Pause): Press the softkey belowj to pause the track. The tabappears raised when pause is beingused. Press the softkey below jagain to resume playback.

Back: Press the softkey below theback tab to go back to the maindisplay screen on an iPod, or theroot directory on a USB storagedevice.

c (Folder View): Press thesoftkey belowc to view thecontents of the current folder on theUSB drive.

To browse and select files:

1. Press the softkey belowc.

2. Turn f to scroll through the listof folders.

3. Press f to select the desiredfolder. If there is more then onefolder, repeat Steps 1 and 2 untilthe desired folder is reached.



4. Turn f to scroll through the filesin the selected folder.

5. Press f to select the desired fileto be played.

To skip through large lists, the fivesoftkeys can be used to navigate inthe following order:. First softkey, first item in the list.. Second softkey, 1% through the

list each time the softkey ispressed.

. Third softkey, 5% through the listeach time the softkey is pressed.

. Fourth softkey, 10% through thelist each time the softkey ispressed.

. Fifth softkey, end of the list.

h (Music Navigator): Press thesoftkey belowh to view andselect a track on an iPod. Files aresorted by:. Playlists. Artists

. Albums

. Genres

. Songs

. Composers

To select tracks:

1. Press the softkey belowh.

2. Turn f to scroll through the listof menus.

3. Press f to select thedesired menu.

4. Turn f to scroll through thefolders or files in theselected menu.

5. Press f to select the track.

To skip through large lists, the fivesoftkeys can be used to navigate inthe following order:. First softkey, first item in the list.. Second softkey, 1% through the

list each time the softkey ispressed.

. Third softkey, 5% through the listeach time the softkey is pressed.

. Fourth softkey, 10% through thelist each time the softkey ispressed.

. Fifth softkey, end of the list.

" (Repeat All): Press the softkeybelow" to repeat all tracks. Thetab appears lowered when RepeatAll is being used. This is the defaultmode when a USB storage deviceor iPod is first connected.

' (Repeat Track): Press thesoftkey below' to repeat onetrack. The tab appears raised whenRepeat Track is being used.

Press the softkey below>,2,< or= to select betweenShuffle Off, Shuffle All Songs/Shuffle Songs, Shuffle Album,or Shuffle Folder.



> (Shuffle Off): Press thesoftkey below2 to turn shuffleoff. This is the default mode when aUSB storage device or iPod is firstconnected.

2 (Shuffle All Songs / ShuffleSongs): Press the softkey below= or< to shuffle all songs onthe USB storage device or iPod.

< (Shuffle Album): Press thesoftkey below> to shuffle allsongs in the current album onan iPod.

= (Shuffle Folder): Press thesoftkey below> to shuffle allsongs in the current folder on a USBstorage device.

Phone

BluetoothFor vehicles equipped withBluetooth capability, the system caninteract with many cell phones,allowing:. Placement and receipt of calls in

a hands-free mode.. Sharing of the cell phone’s

address book or contact list withthe vehicle.

To minimize driver distraction,before driving, and with the vehicleparked:. Become familiar with the

features of the cell phone.Organize the phone book andcontact lists clearly and deleteduplicate or rarely used entries.If possible, program speed dialor other shortcuts.

. Review the controls andoperation of the infotainmentsystem.

. Pair cell phone(s) to the vehicle.The system may not work withall cell phones. See “Pairing aPhone” in this section for moreinformation.

. If the cell phone has voicedialing capability, learn to usethat feature to access theaddress book or contact list. See“Voice Pass-Thru” in this sectionfor more information.



. See “Storing and Deleting PhoneNumbers” in this section formore information.

{ WARNING

When using a cell phone, it canbe distracting to look too long ortoo often at the screen of thephone or the infotainment(navigation) system. Taking youreyes off the road too long or toooften could cause a crashresulting in injury or death. Focusyour attention on driving.

Vehicles with a Bluetooth systemcan use a Bluetooth capable cellphone with a Hands Free Profile tomake and receive phone calls. Thesystem can be used while the key isin ON/RUN or ACC/ACCESSORYposition. The range of the Bluetoothsystem can be up to 9.1 m (30 ft).Not all phones support all functions,and not all phones are guaranteedto work with the in-vehicle Bluetooth

system. See www.gm.com/bluetoothfor more information on compatiblephones.

Voice Recognition

The Bluetooth system uses voicerecognition to interpret voicecommands to dial phone numbersand name tags.

For additional information say “Help”while you are in a voicerecognition menu.

Noise: Keep interior noise levels toa minimum. The system may notrecognize voice commands if thereis too much background noise.

When to Speak: A short tonesounds after the system respondsindicating when it is waiting for avoice command. Wait until the toneand then speak.

How to Speak: Speak clearly in acalm and natural voice.

Audio System

When using the in‐vehicle Bluetoothsystem, sound comes through thevehicle's front audio systemspeakers and overrides the audiosystem. Use the audio systemvolume knob, during a call, tochange the volume level. Theadjusted volume level remains inmemory for later calls. To preventmissed calls, a minimum volumelevel is used if the volume is turneddown too low.

Bluetooth Controls

Use the buttons located on thesteering wheel to operate the in‐vehicle Bluetooth system. SeeSteering Wheel Controls onpage 5‑2 for more information.

b g (Push To Talk) : Press toanswer incoming calls, to confirmsystem information, and to startspeech recognition.

xc (Phone On Hook): Press toend a call, reject a call, or to cancelan operation.



Pairing

A Bluetooth cell phone must bepaired to the Bluetooth system andthen connected to the vehicle beforeit can be used. See your cell phonemanufacturers user guide forBluetooth functions before pairingthe cell phone. If a Bluetooth phoneis not connected, calls will be madeusing OnStar® Hands‐Free Calling,if available. Refer to the OnStarowner's guide for more information.

Pairing Information. Up to five cell phones can be

paired to the Bluetooth system.. The pairing process is disabled

when the vehicle is moving.. Pairing only needs to be

completed once, unless thepairing information on the cellphone changes or the cell phoneis deleted from the system.

. Only one paired cell phone canbe connected to the Bluetoothsystem at a time.

. If multiple paired cell phones arewithin range of the system, thesystem connects to the firstavailable paired cell phone in theorder that they were first pairedto the system. To link to adifferent paired phone, see“Linking to a Different Phone”later in this section.

Pairing a Phone

1. Press and hold b g fortwo seconds.

2. Say “Bluetooth.”

3. Say “Pair.” The system respondswith instructions and a four‐digitPIN number. The PIN number isused in Step 5.

4. Start the pairing process on thecell phone that you want to pair.For help with this process, seeyour cell phone manufacturersuser guide.

5. Locate the device named “YourVehicle” in the list on the cellphone. Follow the instructionson the cell phone to enter thePIN number that was provided inStep 3. After the PIN number issuccessfully entered, the systemprompts you to provide a namefor the paired cell phone. Thisname will be used to indicatewhich phones are paired andconnected to the vehicle, see“Listing All Paired andConnected Phones” later in thissection for more information.

6. Repeat Steps 1 through 5 to pairadditional phones.



Listing All Paired and ConnectedPhones

The system can list all cell phonespaired to it. If a paired cell phone isalso connected to the vehicle, thesystem responds with “is connected”after that phone name.



3. Say “List.”

Deleting a Paired Phone

If the phone name you want todelete is unknown, see “Listing AllPaired and Connected Phones.”



3. Say “Delete.” The system asksfor which phone to delete.

4. Say the name of the phone youwant to delete.

Connecting to a Different Phone

To connect to a different cell phone,the Bluetooth system looks for thenext available cell phone in theorder in which all the available cellphones were paired. Depending onwhich cell phone you want toconnect to, you may have to usethis command several times.



3. Say “Change phone.”. If another cell phone is

found, the response will be“<Phone name> is nowconnected.”

. If another cell phone is notfound, the original phoneremains connected.

Storing and Deleting PhoneNumbers

The system can store up to30 phone numbers as name tags inthe Hands Free Directory that isshared between the Bluetooth andOnStar systems.

The following commands are useddelete and store phone numbers.

Store: This command will store aphone number, or a group ofnumbers as a name tag.

Digit Store: This command allowsa phone number to be stored as aname tag by entering the digits oneat a time.

Delete: This command is used todelete individual name tags.

Delete All Name Tags: Thiscommand deletes all stored nametags in the Hands Free CallingDirectory and the OnStarTurn byTurn Destinations Directory.



Using the “Store” Command


2. Say “Store.”

3. Say the phone number or groupof numbers you want to store allat once with no pauses, thenfollow the directions given by thesystem to save a name tag forthis number.

Using the “Digit Store” Command

If an unwanted number isrecognized by the system, say“Clear” at any time to clear the lastnumber.

To hear all of the numbersrecognized by the system, say“Verify” at any time.


2. Say “Digit Store.”

3. Say each digit, one at a time,that you want to store. Aftereach digit is entered, the systemrepeats back the digit it heardfollowed by a tone. After the lastdigit has been entered, say“Store,” and then follow thedirections given by the system tosave a name tag for this number.

Using the “Delete” Command


2. Say “Delete.”

3. Say the name tag you want todelete.

Using the “Delete All Name Tags”Command

This command deletes all storedname tags in the Hands FreeCalling Directory and theOnStarTurn by Turn DestinationsDirectory.

To delete all name tags:


2. Say “Delete all name tags.”

Listing Stored Numbers

The list command will list all thestored numbers and name tags.

Using the “List” Command


2. Say “Directory.”

3. Say “Hands Free Calling.”

4. Say “List.”

Making a Call

Calls can be made using thefollowing commands.

Dial or Call: The dial or callcommand can be usedinterchangeably to dial a phonenumber or a stored name tag.



Digit Dial: This command allows aphone number to be dialed byentering the digits one at a time.

Re‐dial : This command is used todial the last number used on the cellphone.

Using the “Dial” or “Call”Command


2. Say “Dial” or “Call.”

3. Say the entire number withoutpausing or say the name tag.

Once connected, the person calledwill be heard through the audiospeakers.

Using the “Digit Dial” Command

The digit dial command allows aphone number to be dialed byentering the digits one at a time.After each digit is entered, thesystem repeats back the digit itheard followed by a tone.

If an unwanted number isrecognized by the system, say“Clear” at any time to clear the lastnumber.

To hear all of the numbersrecognized by the system, say“Verify” at any time.


2. Say “Digit Dial.”

3. Say each digit, one at a time,that you want to dial. After eachdigit is entered, the systemrepeats back the digit it heardfollowed by a tone. After the lastdigit has been entered,say “Dial.”


Using the “Re‐dial” Command


2. After the tone, say “Re‐dial.”


Receiving a Call

When an incoming call is received,the audio system mutes and a ringtone is heard in the vehicle.

. Press b g to answer the call.

. Pressxc to ignore a call.

Call Waiting

Call waiting must be supported onthe cell phone and enabled by thewireless service carrier.

. Press b g to answer anincoming call when another callis active. The original call isplaced on hold.



. Press b g again to return to theoriginal call.

. To ignore the incoming call, noaction is required.

. Pressxc to disconnect thecurrent call and switch to the callon hold.

Three‐Way Calling

Three‐way calling must besupported on the cell phone andenabled by the wireless servicecarrier.

1. While on a call, press b g.2. Say “Three‐way call.”

3. Use the dial or call command todial the number of the third partyto be called.

4. Once the call is connected,press b g to link all the callerstogether.

Ending a Call

Pressxc to end a call.

Muting a Call

During a call, all sounds from insidethe vehicle can be muted so that theperson on the other end of the callcannot hear them.

To mute a call, press b g, and thensay “Mute Call.”

To cancel mute, press b g, andthen say “Un‐mute Call.”

Transferring a Call

Audio can be transferred betweenthe Bluetooth system and the cellphone.

The cell phone must be paired andconnected with the Bluetoothsystem before a call can betransferred. The connection processcan take up to two minutes after theignition is turned to ON/RUN.

To Transfer Audio From theBluetooth System to a Cell Phone

During a call with the audio in thevehicle:

1. Press b g.2. Say “Transfer Call.”

To Transfer Audio to the BluetoothSystem From a Cell Phone

During a call with the audio on thecell phone, press b g. The audiotransfers to the vehicle. If the audiodoes not transfer to the vehicle, usethe audio transfer feature on the cellphone. See your cell phonemanufacturers user guide for moreinformation.



Voice Pass-Thru

Voice pass‐thru allows access to thevoice recognition commands on thecell phone. See your cell phonemanufacturers user guide to see ifthe cell phone supports this feature.

To access contacts stored in the cellphone:


2. Say “Bluetooth.” The systemresponds “Bluetooth ready,”followed by a tone.

3. Say “Voice.” The systemresponds “OK, accessing<phone name>.”. The cell phone's normal

prompt messages will gothrough its cycle accordingto the phone's operatinginstructions.

Dual Tone Multi-Frequency(DTMF) Tones

The Bluetooth system can sendnumbers and the numbers stored asname tags during a call. You canuse this feature when calling amenu driven phone system. Accountnumbers can also be stored for use.

Sending a Number or Name TagDuring a Call

1. Press b g. The systemresponds “Ready,” followed bya tone.

2. Say “Dial.”

3. Say the number or name tagto send.

Clearing the System

Unless information is deleted out ofthe in‐vehicle Bluetooth system, itwill be retained indefinitely. Thisincludes all saved name tags in thephone book and phone pairinginformation. For information on howto delete this information, see theprevious sections on Deleting aPaired Phone and DeletingName Tags.

Other Information

The Bluetooth® word mark andlogos are owned by the Bluetooth®

SIG, Inc. and any use of such marksby General Motors is under license.Other trademarks and trade namesare those of their respective owners.

See Radio Frequency Statement onpage 13‑19 for FCC information.


Climate Controls 8-1

Climate Controls

Climate Control SystemsClimate Control Systems . . . . . . 8-1Automatic Climate ControlSystem . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-5

Air VentsAir Vents . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-9

Climate Control SystemsThe heating, cooling and ventilation for the vehicle can be controlled withthis system.

A. Fan Control

B. Recirculation

C. Temperature Control

D. Outside Air

E. Air Delivery Mode Control

F. Air Conditioning

G. Rear Window Defogger


8-2 Climate Controls

Operation

Temperature Control: Turnclockwise or counterclockwise toincrease or decrease thetemperature inside the vehicle.

When it is cold outside −18°C (0°F)or lower, use the engine coolantheater, if vehicle has one, to providewarmer air faster to the vehicle. Anengine coolant heater warms thecoolant the engine uses thatprovides heat to warm the inside ofthe vehicle. For more information,see Engine Heater on page 9‑19.

9 (Fan Control): Turn clockwiseor counterclockwise to increase ordecrease the fan speed. The fanmust be on to run theair-conditioning compressor.

Air Delivery Mode Control: Turnclockwise or counterclockwise tochange the current airflow mode.

Select from the following:

H (Vent): Air is directed to theinstrument panel outlets.

) (Bi-Level): Air is dividedbetween the instrument panel andfloor outlets. Some air will bedirected toward the side windows.

6 (Floor): Air is directed to thefloor outlets with some air directedto the windshield and side windowoutlets.

- (Defog): This mode clears thewindows of fog or moisture. Air isdirected to the windshield and flooroutlets, with some air directed to theside windows. When this mode isselected, the system automaticallyturns off recirculation and runs theair-conditioning compressor unlessthe outside temperature is at orbelow freezing. The air-conditioningcompressor operates although theindicator light is not on. Theair-conditioning indicator light turnsoff when defog is selected. If theair-conditioning button is pressedwhile in defog mode, the indicator

light will turn on. If the button ispressed again, the light will turn off.The recirculation mode cannot beselected while in the defog mode.Do not drive the vehicle until all thewindows are clear.

1 (Defrost): This mode quicklyclears the windshield of fog or frost.Air is directed to the windshield withsome air directed to the floor vents.In this mode, outside air is pulledinto the vehicle. The air-conditioningcompressor will not run unless theoutside temperature is at or belowfreezing. The air-conditioningcompressor operates although theindicator light is not on. Theair-conditioning indicator light turnsoff when defrost is selected. If theair-conditioning button is pressedwhile in defrost mode, the indicatorlight turns on. If the button ispressed again, the light turns off.Recirculation cannot be selectedwhile in the defrost mode.



To help clear the windshield quickly,do the following:

1. Select0.

2. Select the highest temperature.

3. Select the highest fan speed.

# (Air Conditioning): Press toturn the air conditioning system onor off. An indicator light comes on toshow it is on.

The air-conditioning systemremoves moisture from the air, so asmall amount of water might dripunder the vehicle while it is idling orafter the engine is turned off isnormal.

Maximum Air Conditioning

On hot days, open the windows tolet hot inside air escape; then closethem. This helps reduce the time ittakes for the vehicle to cool down.It also helps the air conditioningsystem operate more efficiently.

For quick cool down on hot days, dothe following:

1. Select the C vent mode.

2. Select the highest fan speed.

3. Select# air conditioning.

4. Select the?recirculation mode.

5. Select the coolest temperature.

Using these settings together forlong periods of time can cause theair inside of the vehicle to becometoo dry. To prevent this fromhappening, after the air in thevehicle has cooled, turn therecirculation mode off.

: (Outside Air): Press to turnthe outside air mode on. Anindicator light comes on to showthat it is on. Air from outside thevehicle will circulate throughout thevehicle. The outside air mode canbe used with all modes, but it

cannot be used with therecirculation mode. Press: tocancel the recirculation mode.

? (Recirculation): Press to turnthe recirculation mode on. Anindicator light comes on to showthat it is on. This mode recirculatesand helps to quickly cool the airinside the vehicle. It can be used toprevent outside air and odorsfrom entering the vehicle. Therecirculation indicator light blinksthree times if you try to userecirculation in a mode in which itcannot function.

Pressing this button cancels theoutside air mode. When switching tothe defog or defrost modes thesystem automatically moves fromrecirculation to outside air. Whenthe vehicle or fan is turned off andback on, the system defaults tooutside air automatically. Only userecirculation mode when it isneeded for comfort, since windowfogging can occur.



Rear Window Defogger

The rear window defogger uses awarming grid to remove fog or frostfrom the rear window.

< REAR: Press to turn the rearwindow defogger on or off. Anindicator light comes on to showthat the rear window defogger is on.Be sure to clear as much snow fromthe rear window as possible.

If driving below 80 km/h (50 mph),the rear window defogger turns offabout 15 minutes after the button ispressed. If turned on again, thedefogger only runs for aboutseven minutes before turning off.The defogger can also be turned offby turning off the engine.

If the vehicle's speed is maintainedabove 80 km/h (50 mph), the rearwindow defogger remains on oncethe button is pressed.

If the vehicle has heated outsidemirrors, the surface of the outsidemirrors heat when the rear windowdefogger is activated. See HeatedMirrors on page 2‑14.

Notice: Do not use anythingsharp on the inside of the rearwindow. If you do, you could cutor damage the warming grid, andthe repairs would not be coveredby the vehicle warranty. Do notattach a temporary vehiclelicense, tape, a decal, or anythingsimilar to the defogger grid.

Remote Start Climate ControlOperation

For vehicles with the remote startfeature, when it is activated theclimate control system heats orcools the inside of the vehicle usingthe modes that were set before thevehicle was turned off. The climatecontrol knobs will remain activeduring a remote start. However, theclimate control buttons will beinactive until the ignition is turnedon by the key. If the fan is off, theclimate control system will notoperate during remote start. SeeRemote Keyless Entry (RKE)System Operation on page 2‑3.



Automatic Climate Control SystemFor vehicles with this system, the heating, cooling, and ventilation can beautomatically controlled.

A. Fan Control

B. Air Conditioning

C. Recirculation

D. Outside Air

E. Rear Window Defogger

F. Air Delivery Mode Control

G. Display

H. Temperature Control

Automatic Operation

AUTO (Automatic): Select AUTOon both the fan speed control andthe air delivery mode control knobsto activate the automatic system.When automatic operation is activethe system controls the insidetemperature and air delivery.

To place the system in automaticmode do the following:

1. Turn the fan knob and the modeknob to the AUTO position.

The current set temperaturedisplays. When AUTO isselected, the air conditioningoperation and air inlet isautomatically controlled. The airconditioning compressor runswhile the outside temperature isover about 40°F (4°C). The airinlet will normally be set tooutside air. If it is hot outside,the air inlet may automaticallyswitch to recirculate inside air tohelp quickly cool down thevehicle.



2. Set the temperature.

An initial setting of 73°F (23°C)is recommended. Allow about20 minutes for the system toregulate. Pressw orx toadjust the temperature setting asnecessary. If the temperature isset at 60°F (15°C) the systemremains at the maximum coolingsetting. If the temperature is setat 90°F (32°C) the systemremains at the maximum heatsetting. Choosing eithermaximum setting does not causethe vehicle to heat or cool anyfaster.

Do not to cover the sensorlocated on the top of theinstrument panel near thewindshield. This sensorregulates air temperature basedon the intensity of the sun.

Also do not cover the sensorgrille on the lower right side ofthe climate control faceplate, asthis regulates the insidetemperature.

To avoid blowing cold air atengine start-up in cold weather,the system delays turning on thefan until warm air is available.The length of delay depends onthe engine coolant temperature.Turning the fan knob overridesthis delay and changes the fanto the selected speed.

Manual Operation

9 (Off): Select this position on thefan knob to turn off the entireclimate control system. Outside airstill enters the vehicle. The airflowdirection and temperature can beadjusted.

x /w Temperature Control:Press the arrows to increase ordecrease the temperature inside thevehicle.

9 (Fan Control): Turn clockwiseor counterclockwise to increase ordecrease the fan speed.

Air Delivery Mode Control: Turnclockwise or counterclockwise tochange the direction of the airflow inthe vehicle.

Select from the following:

H (Vent): Air is directed to theinstrument panel outlets.

) (Bi-Level): Air is dividedbetween the instrument paneloutlets and the floor outlets.

6 (Floor): Air is directed to thefloor outlets with some air directedto the side window outlets.

- (Defog): This mode clears thewindows of fog or moisture. Air isdirected to the floor and windshieldoutlets.

0 (Defrost): This mode clears thewindows of fog or frost more quickly.The system automatically controlsthe fan speed if defrost is selectedfrom the AUTO mode. If the outsidetemperature is 4°C (40°F) orwarmer, the air conditioningcompressor automatically runs tohelp dehumidify the air and dry the



windshield. The air conditioningindicator light blinks three times ifthe compressor is turned off while inthis mode.

# (Air Conditioning): Press turnthe air conditioning on and off. Anindicator light turns on to show theair conditioning is on.

When air conditioning is selected oris in AUTO mode, the system runsthe air conditioning automatically tocool and dehumidify the air enteringthe vehicle.

On hot days, open the windows longenough to let hot inside air escape.This reduces the time it takes for thevehicle to cool down. Then keep thewindows closed for the airconditioner to work its best.

On cool, but sunny days while usingmanual operation of the automaticsystem, use bi-level to deliver warmair to the floor and cooler air to theinstrument panel outlets. To warm orcool the air delivered, press thetemperature buttons to the desiredsetting.

In AUTO mode the system coolsand dehumidifies the air inside thevehicle. Also while in AUTO mode,the system maximizes itsperformance by using recirculationas necessary.

Heating: On cold days when usingmanual operation of the automaticsystem, use floor mode to deliver airto the floor outlets. To warm or coolthe air delivered, pressx orw tothe desired temperature setting.

To use the automatic mode, turn theknob to AUTO and pressx orw toadjust the temperature.

: (Outside Air): Press to turnthe outside air mode on. Anindicator light comes on to show it ison. Air from outside the vehicle willcirculate throughout the vehicle. Theoutside air mode can be used withall modes, but it cannot be usedwith the recirculation mode.Pressing this button cancels therecirculation mode.

h (Recirculation): Press to turnthe recirculation mode on. Anindicator light above the buttoncomes on to show it is on. Thismode recirculates and helps toquickly cool the air inside thevehicle. It can be used to helpprevent outside air and odorsfrom entering the vehicle. Therecirculation indicator light blinksthree times if you try to userecirculation in a mode in which itcannot function.

Pressing this button cancels theauto recirculation feature. Each timethe vehicle is started, the systemreverts to the auto recirculationfunction.

The recirculation mode cannot beused with the floor, defrost, or defogmodes. If recirculation is selected inthese modes, the indicator flashesthree times and turns off to indicatethat this is not allowed. This is toprevent window fogging.



When the weather is cool or damp,operating the system in recirculationfor extended periods of time cancause fogging of the vehicle'swindows. To clear the fog, selecteither defog or defrost. Make surethe air conditioning is on. Allow theair conditioning to run automaticallyto help dehumidify the air.

Rear Window Defogger

The rear window defogger uses awarming grid to remove fog from therear window.

< (Rear): Press to turn the rearwindow defogger on or off. Anindicator light comes on to showthat the rear window defogger is on.

If driving below 80 km/h (50 mph),the rear window defogger turns offabout 15 minutes after the button ispressed. If additional warming timeis needed, press the button again.

If the vehicle's speed is maintainedabove 80 km/h (50 mph), the rearwindow defogger remains on oncethe button is pressed.

For vehicles with heated outsidemirrors, the surface of the outsidemirrors will also heat when the rearwindow defogger is activated. SeeHeated Mirrors on page 2‑14.

Notice: Do not use a razor bladeor sharp object to clear the insiderear window. Do not adhereanything to the defogger gridlines in the rear glass. Theseactions may damage the reardefogger. Repairs would not becovered by your warranty.

Remote Start Climate ControlOperation

For vehicles with remote start, whenit is activated the climate controlsystem heats and cools the inside ofthe vehicle using the previoussystem settings before the vehiclewas turned off. The climate controlknobs will remain active during aremote start. However, the climatecontrol buttons will be inactive untilthe ignition is turned on by the key.

If the fan is off, the climate controlsystem will not operate duringremote start.

With the automatic climate controlsystem, the climate control displays“RS” in place of the temperature toindicate that remote start isactivated. For best performance,turn both the fan and mode knobs toAUTO. If the temperature is coldenough and the mode knob is set toAUTO, the system begins in defrostto clear the windows. See RemoteKeyless Entry (RKE) SystemOperation on page 2‑3.



Air VentsUse the lever located in the centerof each outlet by moving it either upand down or side-to-side, to changethe direction and amount of airflowin the vehicle.

Operation Tips. Clear away any ice, snow,

or leaves from the air inlets atthe base of the windshield thatmay block the flow of air into thevehicle.

. Do not use non-GM approvedhood deflectors as they couldadversely affect the performanceof the system.

. Keep the path under the frontseats clear of objects to helpcirculate the air inside of thevehicle more effectively.

. When an objectionable odoroutside the vehicle isencountered, use therecirculation mode, with thetemperature knob at acomfortable setting to preventthe odor from entering thevehicle through the ventilationsystem. This can be helpfulwhen driving through a longtunnel with poor ventilation.However, extended usage of thismode in cold or cool weathercan cause window fogging.



2 NOTES


Driving and Operating 9-1

Driving andOperating

Driving InformationDefensive Driving . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-2Drunk Driving . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-2Control of a Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . 9-3Braking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-3Steering . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-4Off-Road Recovery . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-6Loss of Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-6Driving on Wet Roads . . . . . . . . . 9-7Highway Hypnosis . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-8Hill and Mountain Roads . . . . . . 9-8Winter Driving . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-9If the Vehicle is Stuck . . . . . . . . 9-11Vehicle Load Limits . . . . . . . . . . 9-12

Starting and OperatingNew Vehicle Break-In . . . . . . . . 9-16Ignition Positions . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-16Starting the Engine . . . . . . . . . . 9-18Engine Heater . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-19Retained AccessoryPower (RAP) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-20

Shifting Into Park . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-20Shifting Out of Park . . . . . . . . . . 9-21Parking Over ThingsThat Burn . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-22

Engine ExhaustEngine Exhaust . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-22Running the Vehicle WhileParked . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-23

Automatic TransmissionAutomatic Transmission . . . . . 9-24Manual Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-25

BrakesAntilock BrakeSystem (ABS) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-27

Parking Brake . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-28Brake Assist . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-28

Ride Control SystemsTraction ControlSystem (TCS) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-29

Electronic StabilityControl (ESC) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-31

Cruise ControlCruise Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-32

FuelFuel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-35Recommended Fuel . . . . . . . . . 9-35Gasoline Specifications (U.S.and Canada Only) . . . . . . . . . . 9-36

California FuelRequirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-36

Fuels in Foreign Countries . . . 9-36Fuel Additives . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-36Fuel E85 (85% Ethanol) . . . . . 9-37Filling the Tank . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-39Filling a Portable FuelContainer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-40

TowingGeneral TowingInformation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-41

Driving Characteristics andTowing Tips . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-42

Trailer Towing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-45Towing Equipment . . . . . . . . . . . 9-47

Conversions and Add-OnsAdd-On ElectricalEquipment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-47


9-2 Driving and Operating

Driving Information

Defensive DrivingDefensive driving means “alwaysexpect the unexpected.” The firststep in driving defensively is to wearthe safety belt. See Safety Belts onpage 3‑9.

{ WARNING

Assume that other road users(pedestrians, bicyclists, and otherdrivers) are going to be carelessand make mistakes. Anticipatewhat they might do and be ready.In addition:

. Allow enough followingdistance between you andthe driver in front of you.

. Focus on the task of driving.

Driver distraction can causecollisions resulting in injury orpossible death. These simpledefensive driving techniquescould save your life.

Drunk Driving

{ WARNING

Drinking and then driving isvery dangerous. Your reflexes,perceptions, attentiveness, andjudgment can be affected by evena small amount of alcohol. Youcan have a serious — or evenfatal — collision if you drive afterdrinking. Do not drink and drive orride with a driver who has beendrinking. Ride home in a cab; or ifyou are with a group, designate adriver who will not drink.

Death and injury associated withdrinking and driving is a globaltragedy.

Alcohol affects four things thatanyone needs to drive a vehicle:judgment, muscular coordination,vision, and attentiveness.



Police records show that almost40 percent of all motorvehicle-related deaths involvealcohol. In most cases, thesedeaths are the result of someonewho was drinking and driving. Inrecent years, more than17,000 annual motor vehicle-relateddeaths have been associated withthe use of alcohol, with about250,000 people injured.

For persons under 21, it is againstthe law in every U.S. state to drinkalcohol. There are good medical,psychological, and developmentalreasons for these laws.

The obvious way to eliminate theleading highway safety problem isfor people never to drink alcoholand then drive.

Medical research shows thatalcohol in a person's system canmake crash injuries worse,especially injuries to the brain,spinal cord, or heart. This meansthat when anyone who hasbeen drinking — driver or

passenger — is in a crash, thatperson's chance of being killed orpermanently disabled is higher thanif the person had not been drinking.

Control of a VehicleThe following three systems helpto control the vehicle whiledriving — brakes, steering, andaccelerator. At times, as whendriving on snow or ice, it is easy toask more of those control systemsthan the tires and road can provide.Meaning, you can lose control of thevehicle.

Adding non‐dealer accessories canaffect vehicle performance. SeeAccessories and Modifications onpage 10‑3.

BrakingSee Brake System Warning Light onpage 5‑18.

Braking action involves perceptiontime and reaction time. Deciding topush the brake pedal is perceptiontime. Actually doing it isreaction time.

Average reaction time is aboutthree‐fourths of a second. But that isonly an average. It might be lesswith one driver and as long astwo or three seconds or more withanother. Age, physical condition,alertness, coordination, andeyesight all play a part. So doalcohol, drugs, and frustration. Buteven in three‐fourths of a second, avehicle moving at 100 km/h(60 mph) travels 20 m (66 ft). Thatcould be a lot of distance in anemergency, so keeping enoughspace between the vehicle andothers is important.



And, of course, actual stoppingdistances vary greatly with thesurface of the road, whether it ispavement or gravel; the condition ofthe road, whether it is wet, dry,or icy; tire tread; the condition of thebrakes; the weight of the vehicle;and the amount of brake forceapplied.

Avoid needless heavy braking.Some people drive inspurts — heavy accelerationfollowed by heavy braking — ratherthan keeping pace with traffic. Thisis a mistake. The brakes might nothave time to cool between hardstops. The brakes will wear outmuch faster with a lot of heavybraking. Keeping pace with thetraffic and allowing realistic followingdistances eliminates a lot ofunnecessary braking. That meansbetter braking and longer brake life.

If the engine ever stops while thevehicle is being driven, brakenormally but do not pump thebrakes. If the brakes are pumped,the pedal could get harder to push

down. If the engine stops, there willstill be some power brake assist butit will be used when the brake isapplied. Once the power assist isused up, it can take longer to stopand the brake pedal will be harderto push.

Adding non‐dealer accessories canaffect vehicle performance. SeeAccessories and Modifications onpage 10‑3.

Steering

Electric Power Steering

If the vehicle has the electric powersteering system and the enginestalls while driving, the powersteering assist system will continueto operate until you are able to stopthe vehicle. If power steering assistis lost because the electric powersteering system is not functioning,the vehicle can be steered but it willtake more effort.

If you turn the steering wheel ineither direction several times until itstops, or hold the steering wheel inthe stopped position for anextended amount of time, you maynotice a reduced amount of powersteering assist. The normal amountof power steering assist shouldreturn shortly after a few normalsteering movements.

The electric power steeringsystem does not require regularmaintenance. If you suspectsteering system problems, contactyour dealer for service repairs.

Hydraulic Power Steering

If the vehicle has the hydraulicpower steering system and powersteering assist is lost because theengine stops or the power steeringsystem is not functioning, thevehicle can be steered but it willtake more effort.



Steering Tips

It is important to take curves at areasonable speed.

Traction in a curve depends on thecondition of the tires and the roadsurface, the angle at which thecurve is banked, and vehicle speed.While in a curve, speed is the onefactor that can be controlled.

If there is a need to reduce speed,do it before entering the curve, whilethe front wheels are straight.

Try to adjust the speed so you candrive through the curve. Maintain areasonable, steady speed. Wait toaccelerate until out of the curve, andthen accelerate gently into thestraightaway.

Steering in Emergencies

There are times when steering canbe more effective than braking. Forexample, you come over a hill andfind a truck stopped in your lane,or a car suddenly pulls out fromnowhere, or a child darts out frombetween parked cars and stops rightin front of you. These problems canbe avoided by braking— if you canstop in time. But sometimes youcannot stop in time because there isno room. That is the time forevasive action— steering aroundthe problem.

The vehicle can perform very well inemergencies like these. First applythe brakes. See Braking onpage 9‑3. It is better to remove asmuch speed as possible from acollision. Then steer around theproblem, to the left or rightdepending on the space available.

An emergency like this requiresclose attention and a quick decision.If holding the steering wheel at therecommended 9 and 3 o'clockpositions, it can be turned a full180 degrees very quickly withoutremoving either hand. But you haveto act fast, steer quickly, and just asquickly straighten the wheel onceyou have avoided the object.

The fact that such emergencysituations are always possible is agood reason to practice defensivedriving at all times and wear safetybelts properly.



Off-Road RecoveryThe vehicle's right wheels can dropoff the edge of a road onto theshoulder while driving.

If the level of the shoulder is onlyslightly below the pavement,recovery should be fairly easy. Easeoff the accelerator and then, if thereis nothing in the way, steer so thatthe vehicle straddles the edge of thepavement. Turn the steering wheel8 to 13 cm (3 to 5 in), aboutone-eighth turn, until the right front

tire contacts the pavement edge.Then turn the steering wheel to gostraight down the roadway.

Loss of ControlLet us review what driving expertssay about what happens when thethree control systems— brakes,steering, and acceleration— do nothave enough friction where the tiresmeet the road to do what the driverhas asked.

In any emergency, do not give up.Keep trying to steer and constantlyseek an escape route or area ofless danger.

Skidding

In a skid, a driver can lose control ofthe vehicle. Defensive drivers avoidmost skids by taking reasonablecare suited to existing conditions,and by not overdriving thoseconditions. But skids are alwayspossible.

The three types of skids correspondto the vehicle's three controlsystems. In the braking skid, thewheels are not rolling. In thesteering or cornering skid, too muchspeed or steering in a curve causestires to slip and lose cornering force.And in the acceleration skid, toomuch throttle causes the drivingwheels to spin.

If the vehicle starts to slide, easeyour foot off the accelerator pedaland quickly steer the way you wantthe vehicle to go. If you startsteering quickly enough, the vehiclemay straighten out. Always be readyfor a second skid if it occurs.

Of course, traction is reduced whenwater, snow, ice, gravel, or othermaterial is on the road. For safety,slow down and adjust your driving tothese conditions. It is important toslow down on slippery surfacesbecause stopping distance is longerand vehicle control more limited.



While driving on a surface withreduced traction, try to avoidsudden steering, acceleration,or braking, including reducingvehicle speed by shifting to a lowergear. Any sudden changes couldcause the tires to slide. You mightnot realize the surface is slipperyuntil the vehicle is skidding. Learn torecognize warning clues— such asenough water, ice, or packed snowon the road to make a mirroredsurface— and slow down when youhave any doubt.

Remember: Antilock brakes helpavoid only the braking skid.

Driving on Wet RoadsRain and wet roads can reducevehicle traction and affect yourability to stop and accelerate.Always drive slower in these typesof driving conditions and avoiddriving through large puddles anddeep‐standing or flowing water.

{ WARNING

Wet brakes can cause crashes.They might not work as well in aquick stop and could causepulling to one side. You couldlose control of the vehicle.

After driving through a largepuddle of water or a car/vehiclewash, lightly apply the brakepedal until the brakes worknormally.

(Continued)

WARNING (Continued)

Flowing or rushing water createsstrong forces. Driving throughflowing water could cause thevehicle to be carried away. If thishappens, you and other vehicleoccupants could drown. Do notignore police warnings and bevery cautious about trying to drivethrough flowing water.

Hydroplaning

Hydroplaning is dangerous. Watercan build up under the vehicle'stires so they actually ride on thewater. This can happen if the road iswet enough and you are going fastenough. When the vehicle ishydroplaning, it has little or nocontact with the road.

There is no hard and fast rule abouthydroplaning. The best advice is toslow down when the road is wet.



Other Rainy Weather Tips

Besides slowing down, other wetweather driving tips include:. Allow extra following distance.. Pass with caution.. Keep windshield wiping

equipment in good shape.. Keep the windshield washer fluid

reservoir filled.. Have good tires with proper

tread depth. See Tires onpage 10‑42.

. Turn off cruise control.

Highway HypnosisAlways be alert and pay attention toyour surroundings while driving.If you become tired or sleepy, find asafe place to park the vehicleand rest.

Other driving tips include:. Keep the vehicle well ventilated.. Keep interior temperature cool.. Keep your eyes moving — scan

the road ahead and to the sides.. Check the rearview mirror and

vehicle instruments often.

Hill and Mountain RoadsDriving on steep hills or throughmountains is different than drivingon flat or rolling terrain. Tips fordriving in these conditions include:. Keep the vehicle serviced and in

good shape.. Check all fluid levels and brakes,

tires, cooling system, andtransmission.

. Shift to a lower gear when goingdown steep or long hills.

{ WARNING

If you do not shift down, thebrakes could get so hot that theywould not work well. You wouldthen have poor braking or evennone going down a hill. You couldcrash. Shift down to let the engineassist the brakes on a steepdownhill slope.



{ WARNING

Coasting downhill in N (Neutral)or with the ignition off isdangerous. The brakes will haveto do all the work of slowing downand they could get so hot thatthey would not work well. Youwould then have poor braking oreven none going down a hill. Youcould crash. Always have theengine running and the vehicle ingear when going downhill.

. Stay in your own lane. Do notswing wide or cut across thecenter of the road. Drive atspeeds that let you stay in yourown lane.

. Top of hills: Bealert — something couldbe in your lane (stalled car,accident).

. Pay attention to special roadsigns (falling rocks area, windingroads, long grades, passing orno-passing zones) and takeappropriate action.

Winter Driving

Driving on Snow or Ice

Drive carefully when there is snowor ice between the tires and theroad, creating less traction or grip.Wet ice can occur at about 0°C(32°F) when freezing rain begins tofall, resulting in even less traction.Avoid driving on wet ice or infreezing rain until roads can betreated with salt or sand.

Drive with caution, whatever thecondition. Accelerate gently sotraction is not lost. Accelerating tooquickly causes the wheels to spinand makes the surface under thetires slick, so there is even lesstraction.

Try not to break the fragile traction.If you accelerate too fast, the drivewheels will spin and polish thesurface under the tires even more.

The Antilock Brake System (ABS)on page 9‑27 improves vehiclestability during hard stops onslippery roads, but apply the brakessooner than when on dry pavement.

Allow greater following distance onany slippery road and watch forslippery spots. Icy patches canoccur on otherwise clear roads inshaded areas. The surface of acurve or an overpass can remain icywhen the surrounding roads areclear. Avoid sudden steeringmaneuvers and braking whileon ice.

Turn off cruise control on slipperysurfaces.



Blizzard Conditions

Being stuck in snow can be aserious situation. Stay with thevehicle unless there is help nearby.If possible, use the RoadsideAssistance Program (U.S. andCanada) on page 13‑8 or RoadsideAssistance Program (Mexico) onpage 13‑10. To get help and keepeveryone in the vehicle safe:. Turn on the hazard warning

flashers.. Tie a red cloth to an outside

mirror.

{ WARNING

Snow can trap engine exhaustunder the vehicle. This maycause exhaust gases to getinside. Engine exhaust containsCarbon Monoxide (CO) whichcannot be seen or smelled. It cancause unconsciousness and evendeath.

(Continued)

WARNING (Continued)

If the vehicle is stuck in the snow:. Clear away snow from aroundthe base of your vehicle,especially any that is blockingthe exhaust pipe.

. Check again from time totime to be sure snow doesnot collect there.

. Open a window about 5 cm(2 in) on the side of thevehicle that is away from thewind to bring in fresh air.

. Fully open the air outlets onor under the instrumentpanel.

. Adjust the climate controlsystem to a setting thatcirculates the air inside thevehicle and set the fan speedto the highest setting. SeeClimate Control System in theIndex.

(Continued)

WARNING (Continued)

For more information aboutcarbon monoxide, see EngineExhaust on page 9‑22.

Snow can trap exhaust gasesunder your vehicle. This cancause deadly CO (CarbonMonoxide) gas to get inside. COcould overcome you and kill you.You cannot see it or smell it, soyou might not know it is in yourvehicle. Clear away snow fromaround the base of your vehicle,especially any that is blocking theexhaust.

Run the engine for short periodsonly as needed to keep warm, butbe careful.

To save fuel, run the engine for onlyshort periods as needed to warmthe vehicle and then shut the engineoff and close the window most ofthe way to save heat. Repeat thisuntil help arrives but only when you



feel really uncomfortable from thecold. Moving about to keep warmalso helps.

If it takes some time for help toarrive, now and then when you runthe engine, push the acceleratorpedal slightly so the engine runsfaster than the idle speed. Thiskeeps the battery charged to restartthe vehicle and to signal for helpwith the headlamps. Do this as littleas possible to save fuel.

If the Vehicle is StuckSlowly and cautiously spin thewheels to free the vehicle whenstuck in sand, mud, ice, or snow.

If the vehicle has a traction system,it can often help to free a stuckvehicle. Refer to the vehicle'straction system in the Index. If stucktoo severely for the traction systemto free the vehicle, turn the tractionsystem off and use the rockingmethod.

{ WARNING

If the vehicle's tires spin at highspeed, they can explode, and youor others could be injured. Thevehicle can overheat, causing anengine compartment fire or otherdamage. Spin the wheels as littleas possible and avoid goingabove 55 km/h (35 mph).

For information about using tirechains on the vehicle, see TireChains on page 10‑65.

Rocking the Vehicle to Getit Out

Turn the steering wheel left andright to clear the area around thefront wheels. Turn off any traction orstability system. Shift back and forthbetween R (Reverse) and a forwardgear, spinning the wheels as little aspossible. To prevent transmissionwear, wait until the wheels stopspinning before shifting gears.Release the accelerator pedal whileshifting, and press lightly on theaccelerator pedal when thetransmission is in gear. Slowlyspinning the wheels in the forwardand reverse directions causes arocking motion that could free thevehicle. If that does not get thevehicle out after a few tries, it mightneed to be towed out. If the vehicledoes need to be towed out, seeTowing the Vehicle on page 10‑88.



Vehicle Load LimitsIt is very important to know howmuch weight the vehicle cancarry. This weight is called thevehicle capacity weight andincludes the weight of alloccupants, cargo and allnonfactory‐installed options.Two labels on the vehicle showhow much weight it mayproperly carry, the Tire andLoading Information label andthe Certification label.

{ WARNING

Do not load the vehicle anyheavier than the GrossVehicle Weight Rating(GVWR), or either themaximum front or rear GrossAxle Weight Rating (GAWR).This can cause systems tobreak and change the way the

(Continued)

WARNING (Continued)

vehicle handles. This couldcause loss of control and acrash. Overloading can alsoshorten the life of the vehicle.

Tire and Loading InformationLabel

Label Example

A vehicle-specific Tire andLoading Information label isattached to the vehicle's center

pillar (B-pillar). With the driver'sdoor open, you will find the labelattached below the door lockpost. The Tire and LoadingInformation label shows thenumber of occupant seatingpositions (A), and the maximumvehicle capacity weight (B) inkilograms and pounds.

The Tire and LoadingInformation label also shows thetire size of the originalequipment tires (C) and therecommended cold tire inflationpressures (D). For moreinformation on tires and inflationsee Tires on page 10‑42 andTire Pressure on page 10‑51.

There is also important loadinginformation on the Certificationlabel. It tells you the GrossVehicle Weight Rating (GVWR)and the Gross Axle Weight



Rating (GAWR) for the front andrear axle. See “CertificationLabel” later in this section.

Steps for Determining CorrectLoad Limit

1. Locate the statement“The combined weight ofoccupants and cargo shouldnever exceed XXX kg orXXX lbs” on your vehicle'splacard.

2. Determine the combinedweight of the driver andpassengers that will be ridingin your vehicle.

3. Subtract the combinedweight of the driver andpassengers from XXX kg orXXX lbs.

4. The resulting figure equalsthe available amount of cargoand luggage load capacity.For example, if the “XXX”amount equals 1400 lbs and

there will be five 150 lbpassengers in your vehicle,the amount of available cargoand luggage load capacity is650 lbs (1400 − 750 (5 x 150)= 650 lbs).

5. Determine the combinedweight of luggage and cargobeing loaded on the vehicle.That weight may not safelyexceed the available cargoand luggage load capacitycalculated in Step 4.

6. If your vehicle will be towinga trailer, the load from yourtrailer will be transferred toyour vehicle. Consult thismanual to determine how thisreduces the available cargoand luggage load capacity ofyour vehicle.

See Trailer Towing on page 9‑45for important information ontowing a trailer, towing safetyrules, and trailering tips.

Example 1

A. Vehicle Capacity Weight forExample 1 = 453 kg(1,000 lbs).

B. Subtract Occupant Weight@ 68 kg (150 lbs) × 2 =136 kg (300 lbs).

C. Available Occupant andCargo Weight = 317 kg(700 lbs).



Example 2


B. Subtract Occupant Weight@ 68 kg (150 lbs) × 5 =340 kg (750 lbs).

C. Available Cargo Weight =113 kg (250 lbs).

Example 3


B. Subtract Occupant Weight@ 91 kg (200 lbs) × 5 =453 kg (1,000 lbs).

C. Available Cargo Weight =0 kg (0 lbs).

Refer to the vehicle's Tire andLoading Information label forspecific information about thevehicle's capacity weight and

seating positions. The combinedweight of the driver, passengers,and cargo should never exceedthe vehicle's capacity weight.

Certification Label

Label Example

A vehicle-specific Certificationlabel is attached to the driverside center pillar (B-pillar). Thelabel tells the gross weightcapacity of the vehicle, calledthe Gross Vehicle Weight Rating(GVWR). The GVWR includesthe weight of the vehicle, all



occupants, fuel, and cargo.Never exceed the GVWR forthe vehicle, or the Gross AxleWeight Rating (GAWR) for eitherthe front or rear axle.

And, if there is a heavy load, itshould be spread out. See“Steps for Determining CorrectLoad Limit” earlier in thissection.

{ WARNING

Do not load the vehicle anyheavier than the GrossVehicle Weight Rating(GVWR), or either themaximum front or rear GrossAxle Weight Rating (GAWR).This can cause systems tobreak and change the way thevehicle handles. This couldcause loss of control and acrash. Overloading can alsoshorten the life of the vehicle.

If you put things inside thevehicle— like suitcases, tools,packages, or anythingelse— they will go as fast as thevehicle goes. If you have to stopor turn quickly, or if there is acrash, they will keep going.

{ WARNING

Things inside the vehicle canstrike and injure people in asudden stop or turn, or in acrash.

. Put things in the cargoarea of the vehicle. In thecargo area, put them asfar forward as possible.Try to spread the weightevenly.

(Continued)

WARNING (Continued)

. Never stack heavierthings, like suitcases,inside the vehicle so thatsome of them are abovethe tops of the seats.

. Do not leave anunsecured child restraintin the vehicle.

. Secure loose items in thevehicle.

. Do not leave a seat foldeddown unless needed.



Starting andOperating

New Vehicle Break-InNotice: The vehicle does notneed an elaborate break-in. But itwill perform better in the long runif you follow these guidelines:. Do not drive at any oneconstant speed, fast or slow,for the first 805 km(500miles). Do not makefull-throttle starts. Avoiddownshifting to brake orslow the vehicle.

. Avoid making hard stops forthe first 322 km (200miles) orso. During this time the newbrake linings are not yetbroken in. Hard stops withnew linings can meanpremature wear and earlierreplacement. Follow thisbreaking-in guideline everytime you get new brakelinings.

. Do not tow a trailer duringbreak-in. See Trailer Towingon page 9‑45 for the trailertowing capabilities of thevehicle and moreinformation.

Following break‐in, engine speedand load can be graduallyincreased.

Ignition Positions

The ignition switch has four differentpositions.

To shift out of P (Park), the ignitionmust be in ON/RUN or ACC/ACCESSORY and the brake pedalmust be applied.

Notice: Using a tool to force thekey to turn in the ignition couldcause damage to the switch orbreak the key. Use the correctkey, make sure it is all the way in,



and turn it only with your hand.If the key cannot be turned byhand, see your dealer.

9 (STOPPING THE ENGINE/LOCK/OFF): When the vehicle isstopped, turn the ignition switch toLOCK/OFF to turn the engine off.Retained Accessory Power (RAP)will remain active. See RetainedAccessory Power (RAP) onpage 9‑20

This position locks the ignition.It also locks the transmission. Thekey can only be removed inLOCK/OFF.

Do not turn the engine off when thevehicle is moving. This will cause aloss of power assist in the brakeand steering systems and disablethe airbags.

In an emergency:

1. Brake using a firm and steadypressure. Do not pump thebrakes repeatedly. This maydeplete power assist, requiringincreased brake pedal force.

2. Shift the vehicle to neutral. Thiscan be done while the vehicle ismoving. After shifting to neutral,firmly apply the brakes and steerthe vehicle to a safe location.

3. Come to a complete stop, shiftto P (Park), and turn the ignitionto LOCK/OFF. On vehicles withan automatic transmission, theshift lever must be in P (Park) toturn the ignition switch to theLOCK/OFF position.

4. Set the parking brake. SeeParking Brake on page 9‑28

The steering can bind with thewheels turned off center. If thishappens, move the steering wheelfrom right to left while turning thekey to ACC/ACCESSORY. If thisdoesn't work, the vehicle needsservice.

ACC (ACC/ACCESSORY): Thisposition lets you use things like theradio and windshield wipers whilethe engine is not running.

R (ON/RUN): This position can beused to operate the electricalaccessories and to display someinstrument panel warning lights. Theswitch will stay in this position whilethe engine is running.

If you leave the key in the ACC/ACCESSORY or ON/RUN positionwith the engine off, the battery couldbe drained. You may not be able tostart the vehicle if the battery isallowed to drain for an extendedperiod of time.

/ (START): This position starts theengine. When the engine starts,release the key. The ignition switchwill return to the ON/RUN positionfor driving.

A warning tone will sound when thedriver door is opened, the ignition isin ACC/ACCESSORY or LOCK/OFFand the key is in the ignition.



Starting the EngineMove the shift lever to P (Park) orN (Neutral). The engine will not startin any other position. To restart theengine when the vehicle is alreadymoving, use N (Neutral) only.

Notice: Do not try to shift toP (Park) if the vehicle is moving.If you do, you could damage thetransmission. Shift to P (Park)only when the vehicle is stopped.

Starting Procedure

1. With your foot off the acceleratorpedal, turn the ignition to START.When the engine starts, let go ofthe key. The idle speed will slowdown as the engine warms. Donot race the engine immediatelyafter starting it. Operate theengine and transmission gentlyto allow the oil to warm up andlubricate all moving parts.

The vehicle has aComputer-Controlled CrankingSystem. This feature assists instarting the engine and protects

components. If the ignition key isturned to the START position,and then released when theengine begins cranking, theengine will continue cranking fora few seconds or until thevehicle starts. If the engine doesnot start and the key is held inSTART, cranking will be stoppedafter 15 seconds to preventcranking motor damage. Toprevent gear damage, thissystem also prevents cranking ifthe engine is already running.Engine cranking can be stoppedby turning the ignition switch tothe ACC/ACCESSORY orLOCK/OFF position.

Notice: Cranking the engine forlong periods of time, by returningthe key to the START positionimmediately after cranking hasended, can overheat and damagethe cranking motor, and drain thebattery. Wait at least 15 secondsbetween each try, to let thecranking motor cool down.

2. If the engine does not start after5 to 10 seconds, especially invery cold weather (below −18°Cor 0°F), it could be flooded withtoo much gasoline. Try pushingthe accelerator pedal all the wayto the floor and holding it thereas you hold the key in STARTfor up to a maximum of15 seconds. Wait at least15 seconds between each try, toallow the cranking motor to cooldown. When the engine starts,let go of the key and accelerator.If the vehicle starts briefly butthen stops again, repeat thesesteps. This clears the extragasoline from the engine. Do notrace the engine immediatelyafter starting it. Operate theengine and transmission gentlyuntil the oil warms up andlubricates all moving parts.

Notice: The engine is designed towork with the electronics in thevehicle. If you add electrical partsor accessories, you could changethe way the engine operates.



Before adding electricalequipment, check with yourdealer. If you do not, the enginemight not perform properly. Anyresulting damage would not becovered by the vehicle warranty.

Engine HeaterThe engine coolant heater canprovide easier starting and betterfuel economy during engine warm‐up in cold weather conditions at orbelow −18°C (0°F). Vehicles with anengine coolant heater should beplugged in at least four hours beforestarting the vehicle. An internalthermostat in the plug-end of thecord may exist which will preventengine coolant heater operation attemperatures above −18°C (0°F).

To Use the Engine CoolantHeater

1. Turn off the engine.

2. Open the hood and unwrap theelectrical cord. With a 4 cylinderengine, the engine coolantheater cord is located near theair cleaner box on the passengerside of the engine compartment.With a V6 engine, the enginecoolant heater cord is located onthe driver side around thebattery box. See EngineCompartment Overview onpage 10‑6 for more informationon location.

{ WARNING

Plugging the cord into anungrounded outlet could cause anelectrical shock. Also, the wrongkind of extension cord couldoverheat and cause a fire. Youcould be seriously injured. Plug

(Continued)

WARNING (Continued)

the cord into a properly groundedthree-prong 110-volt AC outlet.If the cord will not reach, use aheavy-duty three-prong extensioncord rated for at least 15 amps.

3. Plug the cord into a normal,grounded 110-volt AC outlet.

4. Before starting the engine, besure to unplug and store thecord as it was before to keep itaway from moving engine partsand prevent damage.

The length of time the heater shouldremain plugged in depends onseveral factors. Ask a dealer in thearea where you will be parking thevehicle for the best advice on this.



Retained AccessoryPower (RAP)These vehicle accessories can beused for up to 10 minutes after theengine is turned off:. Audio System. Power Windows. Heated Seats (if equipped). Sunroof (if equipped)

These features continue to work upto 10 minutes after the ignition isturned to LOCK/OFF.

The power windows, heated seats,and sunroof will work until any dooris opened.

The radio continues to work until thedriver door is opened.

All these features operate when thekey is in the ON/RUN or ACC/ACCESSORY.

Shifting Into Park

{ WARNING

It can be dangerous to get out ofthe vehicle if the shift lever is notfully in P (Park) with the parkingbrake firmly set. The vehicle canroll. If you have left the enginerunning, the vehicle can movesuddenly. You or others could beinjured. To be sure the vehicle willnot move, even when you are onfairly level ground, use the stepsthat follow. If you are pulling atrailer, see Driving Characteristicsand Towing Tips on page 9‑42.

1. Hold the brake pedal down andset the parking brake. SeeParking Brake on page 9‑28 formore information.

2. Move the shift lever into P (Park)by holding in the button on theshift lever and pushing the shiftlever all the way toward the frontof the vehicle.

3. Turn the ignition key toLOCK/OFF.

4. Remove the key and take it withyou. If you can leave the vehiclewith the ignition key in yourhand, the vehicle is in P (Park).



Leaving the Vehicle with theEngine Running

{ WARNING

It can be dangerous to leave thevehicle with the engine running.The vehicle could move suddenlyif the shift lever is not fully inP (Park) with the parking brakefirmly set. And, if you leave thevehicle with the engine running, itcould overheat and even catchfire. You or others could beinjured. Do not leave the vehiclewith the engine running.

If you have to leave the vehicle withthe engine running, be sure thevehicle is in P (Park) and theparking brake is firmly set beforeyou leave it. After you have movedthe shift lever into P (Park), hold theregular brake pedal down. Then,see if you can move the shift leveraway from P (Park) without firstpushing the button.

If you can, it means that the shiftlever was not fully locked inP (Park).

Torque Lock

Torque lock is when the weightof the vehicle puts too much forceon the parking pawl in thetransmission. This happens whenparking on a hill and shifting thetransmission into P (Park) is notdone properly and then it is difficultto shift out of P (Park). To preventtorque lock, set the parking brakeand then shift into P (Park). To findout how, see “Shifting Into Park”listed previously.

If torque lock does occur, yourvehicle may need to be pusheduphill by another vehicle to relievethe parking pawl pressure, so youcan shift out of P (Park).

Shifting Out of ParkThis vehicle is equipped with anelectronic shift lock release system.The shift lock release isdesigned to:. Prevent ignition key removal

unless the shift lever is inP (Park) with the shift leverbutton fully released.

. Prevent movement of the shiftlever out of P (Park), unless theignition is in ON/RUN or ACC/ACCESSORY and the brakepedal is applied.

The shift lock release is alwaysfunctional except in the case of anuncharged or low voltage (less than9 volt) battery.

If the vehicle has an unchargedbattery or a battery with low voltage,try charging or jump starting thebattery. See Jump Starting onpage 10‑84



To shift out of P (Park):

1. Apply the brake pedal.

2. Press the shift lever button.

3. Move the shift lever to thedesired position.

If still unable to shift out of P (Park):

1. Fully release the shift leverbutton.

2. Hold the brake pedal down andpress the shift lever buttonagain.

3. Move the shift lever to thedesired position.

If you are still having a problemshifting, see your dealer.

Parking Over ThingsThat Burn

{ WARNING

Things that can burn could touchhot exhaust parts under thevehicle and ignite. Do not parkover papers, leaves, dry grass,or other things that can burn.

Engine Exhaust

{ WARNING

Engine exhaust contains CarbonMonoxide (CO) which cannot beseen or smelled. Exposure to COcan cause unconsciousness andeven death.

Exhaust may enter the vehicle if:. The vehicle idles in areaswith poor ventilation (parkinggarages, tunnels, deep snowthat may block underbodyairflow or tail pipes).

. The exhaust smells orsounds strange or different.

. The exhaust system leaksdue to corrosion or damage.

. The vehicle exhaust systemhas been modified, damagedor improperly repaired.

(Continued)



WARNING (Continued)

. There are holes or openingsin the vehicle body fromdamage or after-marketmodifications that are notcompletely sealed.

If unusual fumes are detected orif it is suspected that exhaust iscoming into the vehicle:

. Drive it only with the windowscompletely down.

. Have the vehicle repairedimmediately.

Never park the vehicle with theengine running in an enclosedarea such as a garage or abuilding that has no fresh airventilation.

Running the VehicleWhile ParkedIt is better not to park with theengine running. But if you ever haveto, here are some things to know.

{ WARNING

Idling a vehicle in an enclosedarea with poor ventilation isdangerous. Engine exhaust mayenter the vehicle. Engine exhaustcontains Carbon Monoxide (CO)which cannot be seen or smelled.It can cause unconsciousnessand even death. Never run theengine in an enclosed area thathas no fresh air ventilation. Formore information, see EngineExhaust on page 9‑22.

{ WARNING

It can be dangerous to get out ofthe vehicle if the automatictransmission shift lever is not fullyin P (Park) with the parking brakefirmly set. The vehicle can roll. Donot leave the vehicle when theengine is running unless youhave to. If you have left theengine running, the vehicle canmove suddenly. You or otherscould be injured. To be sure thevehicle will not move, even whenyou are on fairly level ground,always set the parking brake andmove the shift lever to P (Park).

Follow the proper steps to be surethe vehicle will not move. SeeShifting Into Park on page 9‑20.

If parking on a hill and pulling atrailer, see Driving Characteristicsand Towing Tips on page 9‑42.



AutomaticTransmission

The automatic transmission has ashift lever located on the consolebetween the seats.

P (Park): This position locks thefront wheels. It is the best positionto use when you start the enginebecause the vehicle cannot moveeasily.

{ WARNING

It is dangerous to get out of thevehicle if the shift lever is not fullyin P (Park) with the parking brakefirmly set. The vehicle can roll.

Do not leave the vehicle when theengine is running unless youhave to. If you have left theengine running, the vehicle canmove suddenly. You or otherscould be injured. To be sure thevehicle will not move, even whenyou are on fairly level ground,always set the parking brake andmove the shift lever to P (Park).See Shifting Into Park onpage 9‑20. If you are pulling atrailer, see Trailer Towing onpage 9‑45.

Make sure the shift lever is fully inP (Park) before starting the engine.The vehicle has an automatictransmission shift lock controlsystem. You must fully apply the

brake pedal then press the shiftlever button before you can shiftfrom P (Park) while the ignition keyis in ON/RUN. If you cannot shift outof P (Park), ease pressure on theshift lever and push the shift leverall the way into P (Park) as youmaintain brake application. Thenmove the shift lever into anothergear. See Shifting Out of Park onpage 9‑21.

R (Reverse): Use this gear toback up.

Notice: Shifting to R (Reverse)while the vehicle is movingforward could damage thetransmission. The repairs wouldnot be covered by the vehiclewarranty. Shift to R (Reverse) onlyafter the vehicle is stopped.

To rock the vehicle back and forth toget out of snow, ice, or sand withoutdamaging the transmission, see Ifthe Vehicle is Stuck on page 9‑11.



N (Neutral): In this position, theengine does not connect with thewheels. To restart the engine whenthe vehicle is already moving, useN (Neutral) only. Also, useN (Neutral) when the vehicle isbeing towed.

{ WARNING

Shifting into a drive gear while theengine is running at high speed isdangerous. Unless your foot isfirmly on the brake pedal, thevehicle could move very rapidly.You could lose control and hitpeople or objects. Do not shiftinto a drive gear while the engineis running at high speed.

Notice: Shifting out of P (Park) orN (Neutral) with the enginerunning at high speed maydamage the transmission. Therepairs would not be covered bythe vehicle warranty. Be sure theengine is not running at highspeed when shifting the vehicle.

D (Drive): This position is fornormal driving. It provides the bestfuel economy. If you need morepower for passing, and you are:. Going less than 56 km/h

(35 mph), push the acceleratorpedal about halfway down.

. Going about 56 km/h (35 mph) ormore, push the accelerator allthe way down.

M (Manual Mode): This position,allows you to change gears similarto a manual transmission. If thevehicle has this feature, see DriverShift Control (DSC).

Manual Mode

Driver Shift Control (DSC)

To use this feature, do the following:

1. Move the shift lever fromD (Drive) rearward toM (Manual).

While driving in manual mode,the transmission will remain inthe driver selected gear. Whencoming to a stop in the manualposition, the vehicle willautomatically shift into2 (Second) gear.



2. Press the + (plus) end of thebutton on the side of the shifterto upshift, or push the − (minus)end of the button to downshift.

The Driver Information Center (DIC)in the instrument cluster will changefrom the currently displayedmessage to the letter “M”, forManual position, and a numberindicating the requested gear.

While using the DSC feature thetransmission will have firmer shiftingand sportier performance. You canuse this for sport driving or whenclimbing hills to stay in gear longeror to downshift for more power orengine braking.

The transmission will only allowyou to shift into gears appropriatefor the vehicle speed and enginerevolutions per minute (RPM):. The transmission will not

automatically shift to the nexthigher gear if the vehicle speedor engine RPM is too low.

. The transmission will not allowshifting to the next lower gear ifthe vehicle speed or engineRPM is too high.

Second or Third Gear StartFeature

When accelerating the vehicle froma stop in snowy and icy conditions,you may want to shift the gearselect tap switch into Second orThird gear. A higher gear allows youto gain more traction on slipperysurfaces.

With the DSC feature, the vehiclecan be set to pull away in Second orThird gear.

1. Move the shift lever fromD (Drive) into theM (Manual Mode).

2. With the vehicle stopped,press (+) end of the button toselect Second or Third gear. Thevehicle will start from a stopposition in Second or Third gear.

3. Once moving select the desireddrive gear.



Brakes

Antilock BrakeSystem (ABS)This vehicle has the Antilock BrakeSystem (ABS), an advancedelectronic braking system that helpsprevent a braking skid.

When the engine is started and thevehicle begins to drive away, ABSchecks itself. A momentary motor orclicking noise might be heard whilethis test is going on, and it mighteven be noticed that the brakepedal moves a little. This is normal.

If there is a problem with ABS, thiswarning light stays on. See AntilockBrake System (ABS) Warning Lighton page 5‑19.

If driving safely on a wet road and itbecomes necessary to slam on thebrakes and continue braking toavoid a sudden obstacle, acomputer senses that the wheelsare slowing down. If one of thewheels is about to stop rolling, thecomputer will separately work thebrakes at each wheel.

ABS can change the brake pressureto each wheel, as required, fasterthan any driver could. This can helpthe driver steer around the obstaclewhile braking hard.

As the brakes are applied, thecomputer keeps receiving updateson wheel speed and controlsbraking pressure accordingly.

Remember: ABS does not changethe time needed to get a foot up tothe brake pedal or always decreasestopping distance. If you get tooclose to the vehicle in front of you,there will not be enough time toapply the brakes if that vehicle

suddenly slows or stops. Alwaysleave enough room up ahead tostop, even with ABS.

Using ABS

Do not pump the brakes. Just holdthe brake pedal down firmly and letABS work. You might hear the ABSpump or motor operating and feelthe brake pedal pulsate, but this isnormal.

Braking in Emergencies

ABS allows the driver to steer andbrake at the same time. In manyemergencies, steering can helpmore than even the very bestbraking.



Parking Brake

To set the parking brake, push downthe parking brake pedal with yourleft foot. If the ignition is on, thebrake system warning light willcome on. See Brake SystemWarning Light on page 5‑18.

To release the parking brake, holdthe regular brake pedal down withyour right foot. Push downmomentarily on the parking brakepedal with your left foot until youfeel the pedal release. If the parkingbrake is not released when you

begin to drive, the brake systemwarning light comes on and a chimesounds as a warning that theparking brake is still on.

The PUSH PARK PEDAL messagewill also display in the DriverInformation Center (DIC) as areminder to release the parkingbrake. See Brake System Messageson page 5‑26.

Notice: Driving with the parkingbrake on can overheat the brakesystem and cause prematurewear or damage to brake systemparts. Make sure that the parkingbrake is fully released and thebrake warning light is off beforedriving.

If you are towing a trailer and areparking on a hill, see DrivingCharacteristics and Towing Tips onpage 9‑42.

Brake AssistThis vehicle has a brake assistfeature designed to assist the driverin stopping or decreasing vehiclespeed in emergency drivingconditions. This feature uses thestability system hydraulic brakecontrol module to supplement thepower brake system underconditions where the driver hasquickly and forcefully applied thebrake pedal in an attempt to quicklystop or slow down the vehicle. Thestability system hydraulic brakecontrol module increases brakepressure at each corner of thevehicle until the ABS activates.Minor brake pedal pulsation orpedal movement during this time isnormal and the driver shouldcontinue to apply the brake pedal asthe driving situation dictates. Thebrake assist feature willautomatically disengage when thebrake pedal is released or brakepedal pressure is quicklydecreased.



Ride Control Systems

Traction ControlSystem (TCS)The vehicle may have a TractionControl System (TCS) that limitswheel spin. This is especially usefulin slippery road conditions. Thesystem operates only if it sensesthat the front wheels are spinningtoo much or are beginning to losetraction. When this happens, thesystem works the front brakes andreduces engine power by closingthe throttle and managing enginespark to limit wheel spin.

This light will flash when the tractioncontrol system is limiting wheel spin.

The system may be heard or feltwhile it is working, but this isnormal.

If the vehicle is in cruise controlwhen TCS begins to limit wheelspin, the cruise control willautomatically disengage. The cruisecontrol may be re-engaged whenroad conditions allow. See CruiseControl on page 9‑32.

When this light is on solid and eitherthe SERVICE TRACTION orTRACTION OFF message isdisplayed, the system will not limitwheel spin.

Adjust your driving accordingly. SeeRide Control System Messages onpage 5‑27 for more information.

The Traction Control System isautomatically enabled whenever thevehicle is started. To limit wheelspin, especially in slippery roadconditions, always leave the systemenabled. TCS can be turned off ifneeded.

It is recommended to leave thesystem on for normal drivingconditions, but it may be necessaryto turn the system off if the vehicleis stuck in sand, mud, ice or snow,and you want to “rock” the vehicle toattempt to free it. It may also benecessary to turn off the systemwhen driving in extreme off-roadconditions where high wheel spin isrequired. See If the Vehicle is Stuckon page 9‑11.



To turn the system off or on, pressand release this button located onthe center console.

The DIC will display the appropriatemessage as described previouslywhen the button is pressed.

Traction Control Operation

Traction control limits wheel spin byreducing engine power to thewheels (engine speed management)and by applying brakes to eachindividual wheel (brake-tractioncontrol) as necessary.

The traction control system isenabled automatically when thevehicle is started, and it will activateand flash the ESC/TCS light anddisplay the LOW TRACTIONmessage if it senses either of thefront wheels are spinning orbeginning to lose traction while

driving. For more information on theLOW TRACTION message, seeRide Control System Messages onpage 5‑27.

Notice: If the wheel(s) of one axleare allowed to spin excessivelywhile the ESC/TCS, ABS andBrake warning lights and theSERVICE ESC and/or SERVICETRACTION messages aredisplayed, the differential couldbe damaged. The repairs wouldnot be covered by the vehiclewarranty. Reduce engine powerand do not spin the wheel(s)excessively while these lights andthis message are displayed.

Notice: When traction control isturned off, it is possible to losetraction. If you attempt to shiftwith the front wheels spinningwith a loss of traction, it ispossible to cause damage to thetransmission. Do not attempt toshift when the front wheels do nothave traction. Damage caused by

misuse of the vehicle is notcovered. See your warranty bookfor additional information.

The traction control system mayactivate on dry or rough roads orunder conditions such as heavyacceleration while turning orabrupt upshifts/downshifts of thetransmission. When this happens, areduction in acceleration may benoticed, or a noise or vibration maybe heard. This is normal.

If the vehicle is in cruise controlwhen the system activates, theESC/TCS light will flash and thecruise control will automaticallydisengage. The cruise controlmay be re-engaged when roadconditions allow. See Cruise Controlon page 9‑32.

Adding non‐dealer accessories canaffect the vehicle's performance.See Accessories and Modificationson page 10‑3 for more information.



Electronic StabilityControl (ESC)The vehicle has an ElectronicStability Control (ESC) systemwhich combines antilock brake,traction and stability control systemsand helps the driver maintaindirectional control of the vehicle inmost driving conditions.

When you first start the vehicle andbegin to drive away, the systemperforms several diagnostic checksto ensure there are no problems.The system may be heard or feltwhile it is working. This is normaland does not mean there is aproblem with the vehicle. Thesystem should initialize before thevehicle reaches 32 km/h (20 mph).

If the system fails to turn on oractivate, the ESC/TCS light will beon solid, and the ESC OFF orSERVICE ESC message will bedisplayed.

For more information, see RideControl System Messages onpage 5‑27.

This light will flash on the instrumentpanel cluster when the ESC systemis both on and activated.

The system may be heard or feltwhile it is working; this is normal.

When the light is on solid and eitherthe SERVICE ESC or ESC OFFmessage is displayed, the systemwill not assist the driver inmaintaining directional control of thevehicle. Adjust your drivingaccordingly. See Ride ControlSystem Messages on page 5‑27.

The Electronic Stability Control(ESC) system is automaticallyenabled whenever the vehicle isstarted. To assist the driver withvehicle directional control,especially in slippery roadconditions, the system shouldalways be left on. But, ESC can beturned off if needed.

If the vehicle is in cruise controlwhen the system begins to assistthe driver maintain directionalcontrol of the vehicle, the ESC/TCSlight will flash and the cruise controlwill automatically disengage. Thecruise control system may bere-engaged when road conditionsallow. See Cruise Control onpage 9‑32.



The ESC/TCS button is located onthe instrument panel.

The traction control system can beturned off or back on by pressingthe ESC/TCS button. To disableboth traction control and ESC, pressand hold the button briefly.

When the ESC system is turned off,the TRACTION OFF and ESC OFFmessages will appear, and the ESC/TCS light will be on solid to warnthe driver that both traction controland ESC are disabled.

It is recommended to leave thesystem on for normal drivingconditions, but it may be necessaryto turn the system off if the vehicleis stuck in sand, mud, ice or snow,and you want to “rock” the vehicle toattempt to free it. It may also benecessary to turn off the system

when driving in extreme off-roadconditions where high wheel spin isrequired. See If the Vehicle is Stuckon page 9‑11.

ESC may also turn off automaticallyif it determines that a problem existswith the system. The ESC OFF andSERVICE ESC messages and theESC/TCS light will be on solid towarn the driver that ESC is disabledand requires service. If the problemdoes not clear after restarting thevehicle, see your dealer for service.See Ride Control System Messageson page 5‑27 for more information.

Adding non‐dealer accessories canaffect the vehicle's performance.See Accessories and Modificationson page 10‑3 for more information.

Cruise ControlCruise control lets a speed of about40 km/h (25 mph) or more bemaintained without keeping yourfoot on the accelerator. This canreally help on long trips. Cruisecontrol does not work at speedsbelow 40 km/h (25 mph).

When the brakes are applied, thecruise control shuts off.

If the vehicle is in cruise control andthe Traction Control System (TCS)or Enhanced Traction System (ETS)begins to limit wheel spin, the cruisecontrol automatically disengages.See Traction Control System (TCS)on page 9‑29 and ElectronicStability Control (ESC) onpage 9‑31. When road conditionsallow, the cruise control can beused again.



{ WARNING

Cruise control can be dangerouswhere you cannot drive safely ata steady speed. So, do not usethe cruise control on windingroads or in heavy traffic.

Cruise control can be dangerouson slippery roads. On such roads,fast changes in tire traction cancause excessive wheel slip, andyou could lose control. Do not usecruise control on slippery roads.

The cruise control buttons arelocated on the steering wheel.

I (On/Off): Press to turn thecruise control system on and off.

RES+ (Resume): Press briefly tomake the vehicle resume apreviously set speed or press andhold to accelerate.

SET− (Set): Press to set the speedand activate cruise control or makethe vehicle decelerate.

Setting Cruise Control

If the cruise button is on when not inuse, it could get bumped and go intocruise when not desired. Keep thecruise control switch off when cruiseis not being used.

1. PressI to turn cruise controlon. The indicator light on thebutton comes on.

2. Get up to the desired speed.

3. Press the SET− and release it.The cruise symbol displays inthe instrument panel cluster toshow the system is engaged.

4. Take your foot off the acceleratorpedal.



Resuming a Set Speed

If the cruise control is set at adesired speed and then the brakesare applied, the cruise control isdisengaged without erasing the setspeed from memory. The cruisesymbol in the instrument panelcluster also goes out indicatingcruise is no longer engaged. Oncethe vehicle speed is 40 km/h(25 mph) or greater, press the RES+button on the steering wheel. Thevehicle returns to the previously setspeed and stays there.

Increasing Speed While UsingCruise Control

If the cruise control system isalready activated,. Press and hold the RES+ button

on the steering wheel until thedesired speed is reached, thenrelease it.

. To increase the vehicle speed insmall amounts, press the RES+button briefly. Each time this isdone, the vehicle goes about1.6 km/h (1 mph) faster.

Reducing Speed While UsingCruise Control

If the cruise control system isalready activated,. Press and hold the SET− on the

steering wheel until the lowerspeed desired is reached, thenrelease it.

. To slow down in small amounts,press the SET− button briefly.Each time this is done, thevehicle goes about 1.6 km/h(1 mph) slower.

Passing Another Vehicle WhileUsing Cruise Control

Use the accelerator pedal toincrease the vehicle speed. Whenyou take your foot off the pedal, thevehicle will slow down to thepreviously set cruise control speed.

Using Cruise Control on Hills

How well the cruise control workson hills depends upon the vehiclespeed, load, and the steepness ofthe hills. When going up steep hills,you might have to step on theaccelerator pedal to maintain thevehicle speed. When goingdownhill, you might have to brake orshift to a lower gear to keep thevehicle at a lower speed. When thebrakes are applied this ends thecruise control.

Ending Cruise Control

There are two ways to end cruisecontrol:. To disengage the cruise control,

step lightly on the brake pedal.. To turn off cruise control, press

theI button.

Erasing Speed Memory

The cruise control set speed iserased from memory, by pressingtheI button or if the ignition isturned off.



FuelUse of the recommended fuelis an important part of the propermaintenance of this vehicle. To helpkeep the engine clean and maintainoptimum vehicle performance, werecommend the use of gasolineadvertised as TOP TIER DetergentGasoline.

Look for the TOP TIER label on thefuel pump to ensure gasoline meetsenhanced detergency standardsdeveloped by auto companies. A listof marketers providing TOP TIERDetergent Gasoline can be found atwww.toptiergas.com.

The eighth digit of the VehicleIdentification Number (VIN) showsthe code letter or number thatidentifies the vehicle's engine. TheVIN is at the top left of theinstrument panel. See VehicleIdentification Number (VIN) onpage 12‑1.

Vehicles that have a FlexFuel badgeand a yellow fuel cap can use eitherunleaded gasoline or ethanol fuelcontaining up to 85% ethanol (E85).See Fuel E85 (85% Ethanol) onpage 9‑37. For all other vehicles,

use only the unleaded gasolinedescribed under RecommendedFuel on page 9‑35.

Recommended FuelIf the vehicle has the 2.4L L4 engine(VIN Code 1) or the 2.4L L4 engine(VIN Code U), use regular unleadedgasoline with a posted octane ratingof 87 or higher. If the octane ratingis less than 87, an audible knockingnoise, commonly referred to asspark knock, might be heard whendriving. If this occurs, use agasoline rated at 87 octane orhigher as soon as possible. If heavyknocking is heard when usinggasoline rated at 87 octane orhigher, the engine needs service.

If the vehicle has the 3.6L V6 engine(VIN Code 7), use regular unleadedgasoline with a posted octanerating of 87 or higher. For bestperformance or trailer towing, youcould choose to use middle grade89 octane unleaded gasoline. If theoctane rating is less than 87, an



audible knocking noise, commonlyreferred to as spark knock, might beheard when driving. If this occurs,use a gasoline rated at 87 octane orhigher as soon as possible. If heavyknocking is heard when usinggasoline rated at 87 octane orhigher, the engine needs service.

Gasoline Specifications(U.S. and Canada Only)At a minimum, gasoline shouldmeet ASTM specification D 4814 inthe United States or CAN/CGSB‐3.5 or 3.511 in Canada.Some gasolines contain anoctane-enhancing additive calledmethylcyclopentadienyl manganesetricarbonyl (MMT). We recommendagainst the use of gasolinescontaining MMT. See Fuel Additiveson page 9‑36 for additionalinformation.

California FuelRequirementsIf the vehicle is certified to meetCalifornia Emissions Standards, it isdesigned to operate on fuels thatmeet California specifications. Seethe underhood emission controllabel. If this fuel is not available instates adopting California EmissionsStandards, the vehicle will operatesatisfactorily on fuels meetingfederal specifications, but emissioncontrol system performance mightbe affected. The malfunctionindicator lamp could turn on and thevehicle might fail a smog‐check test.See Malfunction Indicator Lamp onpage 5‑15. If this occurs, return toyour authorized dealer for diagnosis.If it is determined that the conditionis caused by the type of fuel used,repairs might not be covered by thevehicle warranty.

Fuels in ForeignCountriesNever use leaded gasoline or anyother fuel not recommended in theprevious text on fuel. Costly repairscaused by use of improper fuelwould not be covered by the vehiclewarranty.

To check the fuel availability, ask anauto club, or contact a major oilcompany that does business in thecountry where you will be driving.

Fuel AdditivesTo provide cleaner air, all gasolinesin the United States are nowrequired to contain additives thathelp prevent engine and fuel systemdeposits from forming, allowing theemission control system to workproperly. In most cases, nothingshould have to be added to the fuel.However, some gasolines containonly the minimum amount ofadditive required to meet U.S.Environmental Protection Agency



regulations. To help keep fuelinjectors and intake valves cleanand avoid problems due to dirtyinjectors or valves, look for gasolinethat is advertised as TOP TIERDetergent Gasoline. Look for theTOP TIER label on the fuel pump toensure gasoline meets enhanceddetergency standards developed bythe auto companies. A list ofmarketers providing TOP TIERDetergent Gasoline can be found atwww.toptiergas.com.

For customers who do not use TOPTIER Detergent Gasoline regularly,one bottle of GM Fuel SystemTreatment PLUS, added to the fueltank at every engine oil change, canhelp clean deposits from fuelinjectors and intake valves. GM FuelSystem Treatment PLUS is the onlygasoline additive recommended byGeneral Motors. It is available atyour dealer.

Gasolines containing oxygenates,such as ethers and ethanol, andreformulated gasolines might beavailable in your area. Werecommend that you use thesegasolines, if they comply with thespecifications described earlier.However, E85 (85% ethanol) andother fuels containing more than10% ethanol must not be used invehicles that were not designed forthose fuels.

Notice: This vehicle was notdesigned for fuel that containsmethanol. Do not use fuelcontaining methanol. It cancorrode metal parts in the fuelsystem and also damage plasticand rubber parts. That damagewould not be covered under thevehicle warranty.

Some gasolines that arenot reformulated for lowemissions can contain anoctane-enhancing additive calledmethylcyclopentadienyl manganesetricarbonyl (MMT); ask the attendantwhere you buy gasoline whether the

fuel contains MMT. We recommendagainst the use of such gasolines.Fuels containing MMT can reducespark plug life and affect emissioncontrol system performance. Themalfunction indicator lamp mightturn on. If this occurs, return to yourdealer for service.

Fuel E85 (85% Ethanol)Vehicles that have a FlexFuel badgeand a yellow fuel cap can use eitherunleaded gasoline or ethanol fuelcontaining up to 85% ethanol (E85).For all other vehicles, use only theunleaded gasoline described underRecommended Fuel on page 9‑35.

We encourage the use of E85 invehicles that are designed to use it.The ethanol in E85 is a “renewable”fuel, meaning it is made fromrenewable sources such as cornand other crops.



Many service stations will not havean 85% ethanol fuel (E85) pumpavailable. The U.S. Department ofEnergy has an alternative fuelswebsite (www.afdc.energy.gov/afdc/locator/stations/) that can help youfind E85 fuel. Those stations that dohave E85 should have a labelindicating ethanol content. Do notuse the fuel if the ethanol content isgreater than 85%.

At a minimum, E85 should meetASTM Specification D 5798. Bydefinition, this means that fuellabeled E85 will have an ethanolcontent between 70% and 85%.Filling the fuel tank with fuelmixtures that do not meet ASTMspecifications can affect driveabilityand could cause the malfunctionindicator lamp to come on.

To ensure quick starts in thewintertime, the E85 fuel must beformulated properly for your climateaccording to ASTM specificationD 5798. If you have trouble startingon E85, it could be because the E85fuel is not properly formulated foryour climate. If this happens,switching to gasoline or addinggasoline to the fuel tank canimprove starting. For good startingand heater efficiency below 0°C(32°F), the fuel mix in the fuel tankshould contain no more than70% ethanol. It is best not toalternate repeatedly betweengasoline and E85. If you do switchfuels, it is recommended that youadd as much fuel as possible — donot add less than 11 L (3 gal) whenrefueling. You should drive thevehicle immediately after refuelingfor at least 11 km (7 mi) to allow thevehicle to adapt to the change inethanol concentration.

E85 has less energy per liter(gallon) than gasoline, so you willneed to refill the fuel tank moreoften when using E85 than whenyou are using gasoline. See Fillingthe Tank on page 9‑39.

Notice: Some additives are notcompatible with E85 fuel and canharm the vehicle's fuel system.Do not add anything to E85.Damage caused by additiveswould not be covered by thevehicle warranty.

Notice: This vehicle was notdesigned for fuel that containsmethanol. Do not use fuelcontaining methanol. It cancorrode metal parts in the fuelsystem and also damage plasticand rubber parts. That damagewould not be covered under thevehicle warranty.



Filling the Tank

{ WARNING

Fuel vapor burns violently and afuel fire can cause bad injuries.To help avoid injuries to you andothers, read and follow all theinstructions on the fuel pumpisland. Turn off the engine whenrefueling. Do not smoke near fuelor when refueling the vehicle. Donot use cellular phones. Keepsparks, flames, and smokingmaterials away from fuel. Do notleave the fuel pump unattendedwhen refueling the vehicle. This isagainst the law in some places.Do not re-enter the vehicle whilepumping fuel. Keep children awayfrom the fuel pump; never letchildren pump fuel.

The fuel cap is behind the fueldoor on the vehicle's passengerside. To open the fuel door, push therearward center edge in and releaseand it will open.

Turn the tethered fuel capcounterclockwise to remove. If thevehicle has E85 fuel capability, thefuel cap will be yellow and state thatE85 or gasoline can be used. SeeFuel E85 (85% Ethanol) onpage 9‑37. While refueling, hang thetethered fuel cap from the hook onthe fuel door. Reinstall the cap byturning it clockwise until it clicks.

If the cap is not properly installed,the Malfunction Indicator Lampcome on. See Malfunction IndicatorLamp on page 5‑15 for moreinformation.



{ WARNING

Fuel can spray out on you if youopen the fuel cap too quickly.If you spill fuel and thensomething ignites it, you could bebadly burned. This spray canhappen if the tank is nearly full,and is more likely in hot weather.Open the fuel cap slowly and waitfor any hiss noise to stop. Thenunscrew the cap all the way.

Do not top off or overfill the tank andwait a few seconds before removingthe nozzle. Clean fuel from paintedsurfaces as soon as possible. SeeExterior Care on page 10‑90.

{ WARNING

If a fire starts while you arerefueling, do not remove thenozzle. Shut off the flow of fuel byshutting off the pump or bynotifying the station attendant.Leave the area immediately.

Notice: If a new fuel cap isneeded, be sure to get the righttype of cap from your dealer. Thewrong type of fuel cap might notfit properly, might cause themalfunction indicator lamp tolight, and could damage the fueltank and emissions system. SeeMalfunction Indicator Lamp onpage 5‑15.

Filling a Portable FuelContainer

{ WARNING

Never fill a portable fuel containerwhile it is in the vehicle. Staticelectricity discharge from thecontainer can ignite the fuelvapor. You can be badly burnedand the vehicle damaged if thisoccurs. To help avoid injury to youand others:

. Dispense fuel only intoapproved containers.

. Do not fill a container while itis inside a vehicle, in avehicle's trunk, pickup bed,or on any surface other thanthe ground.

(Continued)



WARNING (Continued)

. Bring the fill nozzle in contactwith the inside of the fillopening before operating thenozzle. Contact should bemaintained until the filling iscomplete.

. Do not smoke whilepumping fuel.

. Do not use a cellular phonewhile pumping fuel.

Towing

General TowingInformationOnly use towing equipment that hasbeen designed for the vehicle.Contact your dealer or traileringdealer for assistance with preparingthe vehicle for towing a trailer.

See the following trailer towinginformation in this section:. For information on driving while

towing a trailer, see “DrivingCharacteristics andTowing Tips.”

. For maximum vehicle and trailerweights, see “Trailer Towing.”

. For information on equipment totow a trailer, see “TowingEquipment.”

For information on towing a disabledvehicle, see Towing the Vehicle onpage 10‑88. For information ontowing the vehicle behind anothervehicle such as a motor home, seeRecreational Vehicle Towing onpage 10‑88.



Driving Characteristicsand Towing Tips

{ WARNING

The driver can lose control whenpulling a trailer if the correctequipment is not used or thevehicle is not driven properly. Forexample, if the trailer is tooheavy, the brakes may not workwell— or even at all. The driverand passengers could beseriously injured. The vehicle mayalso be damaged; the resultingrepairs would not be covered bythe vehicle warranty. Pull a traileronly if all the steps in this sectionhave been followed. Ask yourdealer for advice and informationabout towing a trailer with thevehicle.

The vehicle can tow a trailer whenequipped with the proper trailertowing equipment. For traileringcapacity, see Trailer Towing onpage 9‑45. Trailering changeshandling, acceleration, braking,durability and fuel economy. Withthe added weight, the engine,transmission, wheel assemblies andtires are forced to work harder andunder greater loads. The trailer alsoadds wind resistance, increasing thepulling requirements. For safetrailering, correctly use the propertrailering equipment.

The following information hasimportant trailering tips and rules foryour safety and that of yourpassengers. Read this sectioncarefully before pulling a trailer.

Pulling a Trailer

Here are some important points:. There are many laws, including

speed limit restrictions that applyto trailering. Check for legalrequirements with state orprovincial police.

. Do not tow a trailer at all duringthe first 1 600 km (1,000 miles)the new vehicle is driven. Theengine, axle or other parts couldbe damaged.

. During the first 800 km(500 miles) that a trailer istowed, do not drive over 80 km/h(50 mph) and do not make startsat full throttle. This reduces wearon the vehicle.

. The vehicle can tow in D (Drive).Use a lower gear if thetransmission shifts too often.

. Obey speed limit restrictions. Donot drive faster than themaximum posted speed fortrailers, or no more than 90 km/h(55 mph), to reduce wear on thevehicle.



Driving with a Trailer

Towing a trailer requires experience.Get familiar with handling andbraking with the added trailerweight. The vehicle is now longerand not as responsive as thevehicle is by itself.

Check all trailer hitch parts andattachments, safety chains,electrical connectors, lamps, tiresand mirror adjustments. If the trailerhas electric brakes, start the vehicleand trailer moving and then applythe trailer brake controller by handto be sure the brakes are working.

During the trip, check regularly to besure that the load is secure, and thelamps and trailer brakes are workingproperly.

Towing with a Stability ControlSystem

When towing, the sound of thestability control system might beheard. The system is reacting to thevehicle movement caused by thetrailer, which mainly occurs duringcornering. This is normal whentowing heavier trailers.

Following Distance

Stay at least twice as far behind thevehicle ahead as you would whendriving the vehicle without a trailer.This can help to avoid situationsthat require heavy braking andsudden turns.

Passing

More passing distance is neededwhen towing a trailer. Because therig is longer, it is necessary to gofarther beyond the passed vehiclebefore returning to the lane.

Backing Up

Hold the bottom of the steeringwheel with one hand. To move thetrailer to the left, move that hand tothe left. To move the trailer to theright, move your hand to the right.Always back up slowly and,if possible, have someoneguide you.

Making Turns

Notice: Making very sharp turnswhile trailering could cause thetrailer to come in contact with thevehicle. The vehicle could bedamaged. Avoid making verysharp turns while trailering.

When turning with a trailer, makewider turns than normal so thetrailer will not strike soft shoulders,curbs, road signs, trees or otherobjects. Use the turn signal well inadvance and avoid jerky or suddenmaneuvers.



Turn Signals When Towing aTrailer

The turn signal indicatorson the instrument panel flashwhenever signaling a turn or lanechange. Properly hooked up, thetrailer lamps also flash, telling otherdrivers the vehicle is turning,changing lanes or stopping.

When towing a trailer, the arrows onthe instrument panel flash for turnseven if the bulbs on the trailer areburned out. Check occasionally tobe sure the trailer bulbs are stillworking.

Driving on Grades

Reduce speed and shift to alower gear before starting down along or steep downgrade. If thetransmission is not shifted down, thebrakes might have to be used somuch that they would get hot and nolonger work well.

The vehicle can tow in D (Drive).Use a lower gear if the transmissionshifts too often.

When towing at high altitude onsteep uphill grades, engine coolantboils at a lower temperature than atnormal altitudes. If the engine isturned off immediately after towingat high altitude on steep uphillgrades, the vehicle could showsigns similar to engine overheating.To avoid this, let the engine runwhile parked, preferably on levelground, with the transmission inP (Park) for a few minutes beforeturning the engine off. If theoverheat warning comes on, seeEngine Overheating on page 10‑20.

Parking on Hills

{ WARNING

Parking the vehicle on a hill withthe trailer attached can bedangerous. If something goeswrong, the rig could start to move.People can be injured, and boththe vehicle and the trailer can bedamaged. When possible, alwayspark the rig on a flat surface.

If parking the rig on a hill:

1. Press the brake pedal, but donot shift into P (Park) yet. Turnthe wheels into the curb if facingdownhill or into traffic if facinguphill.

2. Have someone place chocksunder the trailer wheels.

3. When the wheel chocks are inplace, release the brake pedaluntil the chocks absorb the load.



4. Reapply the brake pedal. Thenapply the parking brake and shiftinto P (Park).

5. Release the brake pedal.

Leaving After Parking on a Hill

1. Apply and hold the brake pedal.

2. Start the engine.

3. Shift into a gear.

4. Release the parking brake.

5. Let up on the brake pedal.

6. Drive slowly until the trailer isclear of the chocks.

7. Stop and have someone pick upand store the chocks.

Maintenance When TrailerTowing

The vehicle needs service moreoften when pulling a trailer. See thismanual's Maintenance Schedule orIndex for more information. Thingsthat are especially important intrailer operation are automatictransmission fluid, engine oil, axlelubricant, belts, cooling system andbrake system. Inspect these beforeand during the trip.

Check periodically to see that allhitch nuts and bolts are tight.

Engine Cooling When TrailerTowing

The cooling system may temporarilyoverheat during severe operatingconditions. See Engine Overheatingon page 10‑20.

Trailer TowingBefore pulling a trailer, there arethree important considerations thathave to do with weight:. The weight of the trailer.. The weight of the trailer tongue.. The total weight on your

vehicle's tires.

Weight of the Trailer

How heavy can a trailer safely be?

It should never weigh more than454 kg (1,000 lbs). But even thatcan be too heavy.

It depends on how the rig is used.For example, speed, altitude, roadgrades, outside temperature andhow much the vehicle is used to pulla trailer are all important. It candepend on any special equipmenton the vehicle, and the amount oftongue weight the vehicle can carry.See “Weight of the Trailer Tongue”later in this section for moreinformation.



Maximum trailer weight is calculatedassuming only the driver is in thetow vehicle and it has all therequired trailering equipment. Theweight of additional optionalequipment, passengers and cargo inthe tow vehicle must be subtractedfrom the maximum trailer weight.

Ask your dealer for traileringinformation or advice, or write us atour Customer Assistance Offices.See Customer Assistance Offices(U.S. and Canada) on page 13‑5 orCustomer Assistance Offices(Mexico) on page 13‑5 for moreinformation.

Weight of the Trailer Tongue

The tongue load (A) of any trailer isan important weight to measurebecause it affects the total grossweight of the vehicle. The GrossVehicle Weight (GVW) includes thecurb weight of the vehicle, anycargo carried in it, and the peoplewho will be riding in the vehicle.

If there are a lot of options,equipment, passengers or cargo inthe vehicle, it will reduce the tongueweight the vehicle can carry, whichwill also reduce the trailer weight thevehicle can tow. If towing a trailer,the tongue load must be added tothe GVW because the vehicle willbe carrying that weight, too. SeeVehicle Load Limits on page 9‑12for more information.

The trailer tongue (A) should weigh10‐15 percent of the total loadedtrailer weight (B).

After loading the trailer, weigh thetrailer and then the tongue,separately, to see if the weights areproper. If they are not, adjustmentsmight be made by moving someitems around in the trailer.

Total Weight on Your Vehicle'sTires

Be sure the vehicle's tires areinflated to the upper limit for coldtires. These numbers can be foundon the Tire-Loading Informationlabel. See Vehicle Load Limits onpage 9‑12. Make sure not to go overthe GVW limit for the vehicle,including the weight of the trailertongue.



Towing Equipment

Hitches

Use the correct hitch equipment.See your dealer or a hitch dealer forassistance.. The rear bumper on the vehicle

is not intended for hitches. Donot attach rental hitches or otherbumper-type hitches to it. Useonly a frame-mounted hitch thatdoes not attach to the bumper.

. Will any holes be made in thebody of the vehicle when thetrailer hitch is installed? If thereare, seal the holes when thehitch is removed. If the holes arenot sealed, dirt, water, anddeadly carbon monoxide (CO)from the exhaust can get into thevehicle. See Engine Exhaust onpage 9‑22.

Safety Chains

Always attach chains between thevehicle and the trailer. Cross thesafety chains under the tongue ofthe trailer to help prevent the tonguefrom contacting the road if itbecomes separated from the hitch.Leave enough slack so the rig canturn. Never allow safety chains todrag on the ground.

Trailer Brakes

Does the trailer have its ownbrakes? Be sure to read and followthe instructions for the trailer brakesso they are installed, adjusted, andmaintained properly.

Because the vehicle has antilockbrakes, do not tap into the vehicle'sbrake system. If this is done, bothbrake systems will not work well,or at all.

Conversions andAdd-Ons

Add-On ElectricalEquipmentNotice: Do not add anythingelectrical to the vehicle unlessyou check with your dealer first.Some electrical equipment candamage the vehicle and thedamage would not be covered bythe vehicle's warranty. Someadd-on electrical equipment cankeep other components fromworking as they should.

Add-on equipment can drain thevehicle's 12‐volt battery, even if thevehicle is not operating.

The vehicle has an airbag system.Before attempting to add anythingelectrical to the vehicle, seeServicing the Airbag-EquippedVehicle on page 3‑36 and AddingEquipment to the Airbag-EquippedVehicle on page 3‑37.



2 NOTES


Vehicle Care 10-1

Vehicle Care

General InformationGeneral Information . . . . . . . . . . 10-2California Proposition65 Warning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-3

California PerchlorateMaterials Requirements . . . . 10-3

Accessories andModifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-3

Vehicle ChecksDoing Your OwnService Work . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-4

Hood . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-5Engine CompartmentOverview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-6

Engine Oil . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-9Engine Oil Life System . . . . . 10-13Automatic TransmissionFluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-14

Engine Air Cleaner/Filter . . . . 10-14Cooling System . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-16Engine Coolant . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-16Engine Overheating . . . . . . . . 10-20Overheated EngineProtectionOperating Mode . . . . . . . . . . . 10-21

Power Steering Fluid . . . . . . . 10-22Washer Fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-23Brakes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-24Brake Fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-25Battery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-26Starter Switch Check . . . . . . . 10-27Automatic Transmission ShiftLock Control FunctionCheck . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-27

Ignition Transmission LockCheck . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-28

Park Brake and P (Park)Mechanism Check . . . . . . . . 10-28

Wiper BladeReplacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-29

Headlamp AimingHeadlamp Aiming . . . . . . . . . . 10-29

Bulb ReplacementBulb Replacement . . . . . . . . . . 10-30Halogen Bulbs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-30Taillamps, Turn Signal, andStoplamps (LS and LT) . . . . 10-30

Taillamps, Turn Signal, andStoplamps (LTZ) . . . . . . . . . . 10-32

Back-Up Lamps . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-33License Plate Lamp . . . . . . . . 10-34Replacement Bulbs . . . . . . . . . 10-34

Electrical SystemElectrical SystemOverload . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-35

Fuses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-35Engine Compartment FuseBlock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-36

Instrument Panel FuseBlock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-38

Rear Compartment FuseBlock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-40

Wheels and TiresTires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-42Winter Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-43Low-Profile Tires . . . . . . . . . . . 10-44Tire Sidewall Labeling . . . . . . 10-44Tire Designations . . . . . . . . . . . 10-47Tire Terminology andDefinitions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-48

Tire Pressure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-51Tire Pressure for High-SpeedOperation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-52

Tire Pressure MonitorSystem . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-53

Tire Pressure MonitorOperation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-54

Tire Inspection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-57Tire Rotation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-57


10-2 Vehicle Care

When It Is Time for NewTires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-59

Buying New Tires . . . . . . . . . . . 10-59Different Size Tires andWheels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-61

Uniform Tire QualityGrading . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-62

Wheel Alignment and TireBalance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-63

Wheel Replacement . . . . . . . . 10-64Tire Chains . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-65If a Tire Goes Flat . . . . . . . . . . 10-65Tire Sealant andCompressor Kit . . . . . . . . . . . 10-67

Storing the Tire Sealant andCompressor Kit . . . . . . . . . . . 10-74

Tire Changing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-75Compact Spare Tire . . . . . . . . 10-83

Jump StartingJump Starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-84

TowingTowing the Vehicle . . . . . . . . . 10-88Recreational VehicleTowing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-88

Appearance CareExterior Care . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-90Interior Care . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-94Floor Mats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-97

General InformationFor service and parts needs, visityour dealer. You will receivegenuine GM parts and GM-trainedand supported service people.

Genuine GM parts have one ofthese marks:


Vehicle Care 10-3

California Proposition65 WarningMost motor vehicles, including thisone, contain and/or emit chemicalsknown to the State of California tocause cancer and birth defects orother reproductive harm. Engineexhaust, many parts and systems,many fluids, and some componentwear by-products contain and/oremit these chemicals.

California PerchlorateMaterials RequirementsCertain types of automotiveapplications, such as airbaginitiators, seat belt pretensioners,and lithium batteries contained inRemote Keyless Entry transmitters,may contain perchlorate materials.Special handling may be necessary.For additional information, seewww.dtsc.ca.gov/hazardouswaste/perchlorate.

Accessories andModificationsAdding non‐dealer accessories tothe vehicle can affect vehicleperformance and safety, includingsuch things as airbags, braking,stability, ride and handling,emissions systems, aerodynamics,durability, and electronic systemslike antilock brakes, traction control,and stability control. Some of theseaccessories could even causemalfunction or damage not coveredby the vehicle warranty.

Damage to vehicle componentsresulting from the installation or useof non‐GM certified parts, includingcontrol module modifications, is notcovered under the terms of thevehicle warranty and may affectremaining warranty coverage foraffected parts.


10-4 Vehicle Care

GM Accessories are designed tocomplement and function with othersystems on the vehicle. Your GMdealer can accessorize the vehicleusing genuine GM Accessories.When you go to your GM dealer andask for GM Accessories, you willknow that GM-trained andsupported service technicians willperform the work using genuine GMAccessories.

Also, see Adding Equipment to theAirbag-Equipped Vehicle onpage 3‑37.

Vehicle Checks

Doing Your OwnService Work

{ WARNING

You can be injured and thevehicle could be damaged if youtry to do service work on a vehiclewithout knowing enough about it.

. Be sure you havesufficient knowledge,experience, the properreplacement parts, and toolsbefore attempting any vehiclemaintenance task.

. Be sure to use the propernuts, bolts, and otherfasteners. Metric and Englishfasteners can be easilyconfused. If the wrongfasteners are used, parts canlater break or fall off. Youcould be hurt.

If doing some of your own servicework, use the proper servicemanual. It tells you much moreabout how to service the vehiclethan this manual can. To order theproper service manual, see ServicePublications Ordering Informationon page 13‑15.

This vehicle has an airbag system.Before attempting to do your ownservice work, see Servicing theAirbag-Equipped Vehicle onpage 3‑36.

Keep a record with all parts receiptsand list the mileage and the date ofany service work performed. SeeMaintenance Records on page 11‑8.


Vehicle Care 10-5

HoodTo open the hood:

1. Pull the hood release handlewith this symbol on it. It islocated inside the vehicle to theleft of the steering column. 2. Then go to the front of the

vehicle and push the secondaryhood release handle toward thedriver side of the vehicle.

3. Lift the hood.

4. After the hood is slightly lifted, itwill continue to open to the fullposition. Before closing thehood, be sure all the filler capsare on properly. Lower the hooduntil the lifting force of the strutis reduced, then release thehood to latch fully. Check tomake sure the hood is closedand repeat the process ifnecessary.


10-6 Vehicle Care

Engine Compartment Overview

2.4 L L4 Engine


Vehicle Care 10-7

A. Engine Air Cleaner/Filter onpage 10‑14.

B. Engine Cooling Fan (Out ofView). See Cooling System onpage 10‑16.

C. Engine Oil Fill Cap. See “Whento Add Engine Oil” underEngine Oil on page 10‑9.

D. Engine Oil Dipstick (Out ofView). See “Checking EngineOil” under Engine Oil onpage 10‑9.

E. Engine Coolant Surge Tank.See Engine Coolant onpage 10‑16.

F. Pressure Cap. See CoolingSystem on page 10‑16.

G. Brake Master CylinderReservoir. See “Brake Fluid”under Brakes on page 10‑24.

H. Battery on page 10‑26.

I. Windshield Washer FluidReservoir. See “Adding WasherFluid” under Washer Fluid onpage 10‑23.

J. See Engine Compartment FuseBlock on page 10‑36.


10-8 Vehicle Care

3.6 L V6 Engine


Vehicle Care 10-9

A. Engine Air Cleaner/Filter onpage 10‑14.

B. Power Steering Fluid Reservoir.See Power Steering Fluid onpage 10‑22.

C. Engine Oil Fill Cap. See “Whento Add Engine Oil” underEngine Oil on page 10‑9.

D. Engine Oil Dipstick. See“Checking Engine Oil” underEngine Oil on page 10‑9.

E. Electric Engine Cooling Fans(Out of View). See CoolingSystem on page 10‑16.

F. Engine Coolant Surge Tank.See Engine Coolant onpage 10‑16.

G. Pressure Cap. See CoolingSystem on page 10‑16.

H. Brake Master CylinderReservoir. See “Brake Fluid”under Brakes on page 10‑24.

I. Automatic Transmission FluidDipstick (Out of View). See“Checking the Fluid Level”under Automatic TransmissionFluid on page 10‑14.

J. See Battery on page 10‑26.

K. Engine Compartment FuseBlock on page 10‑36.

L. Windshield Washer FluidReservoir. See “Adding WasherFluid” under Washer Fluid onpage 10‑23.

Engine OilTo ensure proper engineperformance and long life, carefulattention must be paid to engine oil.Following these simple, butimportant steps will help protectyour investment:. Always use engine oil approved

to the proper specification and ofthe proper viscosity grade. See“Selecting the Right Engine Oil”in this section.

. Check the engine oil levelregularly and maintain theproper oil level. See “CheckingEngine Oil” and “When to AddEngine Oil” in this section.

. Change the engine oil at theappropriate time. See Engine OilLife System on page 10‑13.

. Always dispose of engine oilproperly. See “What to Do withUsed Oil” in this section.


10-10 Vehicle Care

Checking Engine Oil

It is a good idea to check the engineoil level at each fuel fill. In order toget an accurate reading, the vehiclemust be on level ground. Theengine oil dipstick handle is a yellowloop. See Engine CompartmentOverview on page 10‑6 for thelocation of the engine oil dipstick.

Obtaining an accurate oil levelreading is essential:

1. If the engine has been runningrecently, turn off the engine andallow several minutesfor the oilto drain back into the oil pan.Checking the oil level too soonafter engine shutoff will notprovide an accurate oil levelreading.

2. Pull out the dipstick and clean itwith a paper towel or cloth, thenpush it back in all the way.Remove it again, keeping the tipdown, and check the level.

When to Add Engine Oil

L4 Engine

V6 Engine

If the oil is below the MIN(minimum) mark for the L4 engine orbelow the cross‐hatched area at thetip of the dipstick for the V6 engine,add 1 L (1 qt) of the recommendedoil and then recheck the level. See“Selecting the Right Engine Oil” inthis section for an explanation ofwhat kind of oil to use. For engineoil crankcase capacity, seeCapacities and Specifications onpage 12‑2.

Notice: Do not add too much oil.Oil levels above or below theacceptable operating rangeshown on the dipstick are harmfulto the engine. If you find that youhave an oil level above theoperating range, i.e., the enginehas so much oil that the oil levelgets above the upper mark thatshows the proper operatingrange, the engine could bedamaged. You should drain outthe excess oil or limit driving ofthe vehicle and seek a serviceprofessional to remove theexcess amount of oil.

See Engine Compartment Overviewon page 10‑6 for the location of theengine oil fill cap.

Add enough oil to put the levelsomewhere in the proper operatingrange. Push the dipstick all the wayback in when through.


Vehicle Care 10-11

Selecting the Right Engine Oil

Selecting the right engine oildepends on both the proper oilspecification and viscosity grade:

Specification

Use and ask for engine oils with thedexos™ certification mark. Oilsmeeting the requirements of thevehicle should have the dexoscertification mark on the container.This certification mark indicates thatthe oil has been approved to thedexos specification.

This vehicle was filled at the factorywith dexos‐approved engine oil.

Notice: Use only engine oil that isapproved to the dexosspecification or an equivalentengine oil of the appropriateviscosity grade. Engine oilsapproved to the dexosspecification will show the dexossymbol on the container. Failureto use the recommended engineoil or equivalent can result inengine damage not covered bythe vehicle warranty. If you areunsure whether the oil isapproved to the dexosspecification, ask your serviceprovider.

Use of Substitute Engine Oils ifdexos is unavailable: In the eventthat dexos‐approved engine oil isnot available at an oil change or formaintaining proper oil level, youmay use substitute engine oildisplaying the API Starburst symboland of SAE 5W-30 viscosity grade.Use of oils that do not meet thedexos specification, however, mayresult in reduced performance undercertain circumstances.

Viscosity Grade

SAE 5W-30 is the best viscositygrade for the vehicle. Do not useother viscosity oils such asSAE 10W‐30, 10W‐40, or 20W-50.


10-12 Vehicle Care

Cold Temperature Operation: In anarea of extreme cold, where thetemperature falls below −29°C

(−20°F), an SAE 0W-30 oil shouldbe used. An oil of this viscositygrade will provide easier coldstarting for the engine at extremelylow temperatures. When selectingan oil of the appropriate viscositygrade, be sure to always selectan oil that meets the requiredspecification, dexos. See“Specification” earlier in thissection for more information.

Engine Oil Additives/EngineOil Flushes

Do not add anything to the oil. Therecommended oils with the dexosspecification and displaying thedexos certification mark are all thatis needed for good performance andengine protection.

Engine oil system flushes are notrecommended and could causeengine damage not covered by thevehicle warranty.

What to Do with Used Oil

Used engine oil contains certainelements that can be unhealthy foryour skin and could even causecancer. Do not let used oil stay onyour skin for very long. Clean yourskin and nails with soap and water,or a good hand cleaner. Wash orproperly dispose of clothing or ragscontaining used engine oil. See themanufacturer's warnings about theuse and disposal of oil products.

Used oil can be a threat to theenvironment. If you change yourown oil, be sure to drain all the oilfrom the filter before disposal. Neverdispose of oil by putting it in thetrash or pouring it on the ground,into sewers, or into streams orbodies of water. Recycle it by takingit to a place that collects used oil.


Vehicle Care 10-13

Engine Oil Life System

When to Change Engine Oil

This vehicle has a computer systemthat indicates when to change theengine oil and filter. This is basedon engine revolutions and enginetemperature, and not on mileage.Based on driving conditions, themileage at which an oil change isindicated can vary considerably. Forthe oil life system to work properly,the system must be reset every timethe oil is changed.

When the system has calculatedthat oil life has been diminished, itindicates that an oil change isnecessary. A CHANGE OIL SOONmessage comes on. See Engine OilMessages on page 5‑26. Changethe oil as soon as possible withinthe next 1 000 km (600miles). It ispossible that, if driving under the

best conditions, the oil life systemmight indicate that an oil change isnot necessary for up to a year. Theengine oil and filter must bechanged at least once a year and,at this time, the system must bereset. Your dealer has trainedservice people who will perform thiswork and reset the system. It is alsoimportant to check the oil regularlyover the course of an oil draininterval and keep it at the properlevel.

If the system is ever resetaccidentally, the oil must bechanged at 5 000 km (3,000 miles)since the last oil change.Remember to reset the oil lifesystem whenever the oil is changed.

How to Reset the Engine OilLife System

Reset the system whenever theengine oil is changed so that thesystem can calculate the nextengine oil change. To reset thesystem:

1. Turn the ignition to ON/RUN,with the engine off.

2. Press and hold the DIC INFOand reset buttons, on the leftside of the steering wheel, at thesame time to enter thepersonalization menu. The OILLIFE RESET message displays.See Driver Information Center(DIC) on page 5‑22 and EngineOil Messages on page 5‑26.

3. Press and hold the reset buttonuntil the DIC display showsACKNOWLEDGED.

4. Turn the key to LOCK/OFF.

The system is reset when theCHANGE OIL SOON messageis off.


10-14 Vehicle Care

If the CHANGE OIL SOONmessage comes back on when thevehicle is started, the engine oil lifesystem has not reset. Repeat theprocedure.

Automatic TransmissionFluidIt is not necessary to checkthe transmission fluid level.A transmission fluid leak is theonly reason for fluid loss. If a leakoccurs, take the vehicle to thedealer and have it repaired as soonas possible.

Change the fluid and filter at theintervals listed in ScheduledMaintenance on page 11‑2, and besure to use the transmission fluidlisted in Recommended Fluids andLubricants on page 11‑6.

Notice: Use of the incorrectautomatic transmission fluid maydamage the vehicle, and thedamages may not be covered bythe vehicle warranty. Always usethe automatic transmission fluidlisted in Recommended Fluidsand Lubricants on page 11‑6.

For the 2.4 L and 3.6 L engines, thetransmission fluid will not reach theend of the dipstick unless thetransmission is at operatingtemperature. If the transmission fluidlevel needs to be checked, pleasetake the vehicle to the dealer.

Engine Air Cleaner/FilterSee Engine Compartment Overviewon page 10‑6 for the location of theengine air cleaner/filter.

When to Inspect the Engine AirCleaner/Filter

Inspect the air cleaner/filter at thescheduled maintenance intervalsand replace it at the first oil changeafter each 80 000 km (50,000 mi)interval. See ScheduledMaintenance on page 11‑2 for moreinformation. If driving in dusty/dirtyconditions, inspect the filter at eachengine oil change.

How to Inspect the Engine AirCleaner/Filter

To inspect the air cleaner/filter,remove the filter from the vehicleand lightly shake the filter to releaseloose dust and dirt. If the filterremains covered with dirt, a newfilter is required.


Vehicle Care 10-15

To inspect or replace the engine aircleaner/filter:

1. Remove the spring clamps thathold the cover on.

2. Lift off the cover.

3. Inspect or replace the engine aircleaner/filter.

4. Align the filter correctly using thealignment tab.

5. Install the cover by guiding thetabs on the rim of the top coverinto the bottom hinges and turnthe cover down to close it.

6. The spring clips will engageeasily, if the cover is properlyseated.

{ WARNING

Operating the engine with the aircleaner/filter off can cause you orothers to be burned. The aircleaner not only cleans the air; ithelps to stop flames if the enginebackfires. Use caution whenworking on the engine and do notdrive with the air cleaner/filter off.

Notice: If the air cleaner/filter isoff, dirt can easily get into theengine, which could damage it.Always have the air cleaner/filterin place when you are driving.


10-16 Vehicle Care

Cooling SystemThe cooling system allows theengine to maintain the correctworking temperature.

3.6 L V6 Engine Shown, 2.4 L L4Engine Similar

A. Engine Cooling Fans(Out of View)

B. Engine Coolant Surge Tank

C. Pressure Cap

{ WARNING

An electric engine cooling fanunder the hood can start up evenwhen the engine is not runningand can cause injury. Keephands, clothing, and tools awayfrom any underhood electric fan.

{ WARNING

Heater and radiator hoses, andother engine parts, can be veryhot. Do not touch them. If you do,you can be burned.

Do not run the engine if there is aleak. If you run the engine, itcould lose all coolant. That couldcause an engine fire, and youcould be burned. Get any leakfixed before you drive the vehicle.

Notice: Using coolant other thanDEX-COOL® can cause prematureengine, heater core, or radiatorcorrosion. In addition, the enginecoolant could require changingsooner, at 50 000 km (30,000mi)or 24months, whichever occursfirst. Any repairs would not becovered by the vehicle warranty.Always use DEX-COOL(silicate-free) coolant in thevehicle.

Engine CoolantThe cooling system in the vehicle isfilled with DEX-COOL® enginecoolant. This coolant is designed toremain in the vehicle for 5 years or240 000 km (150,000mi), whicheveroccurs first.

The following explains the coolingsystem and how to check and addcoolant when it is low. If there is aproblem with engine overheating,see Engine Overheating onpage 10‑20.


Vehicle Care 10-17

What to Use

{ WARNING

Adding only plain water or someother liquid to the cooling systemcan be dangerous. Plain waterand other liquids, can boil beforethe proper coolant mixture will.The coolant warning system is setfor the proper coolant mixture.With plain water or the wrongmixture, the engine could get toohot but you would not get theoverheat warning. The enginecould catch fire and you or otherscould be burned. Use a50/50 mixture of clean, drinkablewater and DEX-COOL coolant.

Use a 50/50 mixture of clean,drinkable water and DEX-COOLcoolant. If using this mixture,nothing else needs to be added.This mixture:. Gives freezing protection down

to −37°C (−34°F), outsidetemperature.

. Gives boiling protection up to129°C (265°F), enginetemperature.

. Protects against rust andcorrosion.

. Will not damage aluminum parts.

. Helps keep the proper enginetemperature.

Notice: If an improper coolantmixture is used, the engine couldoverheat and be badly damaged.The repair cost would not becovered by the vehicle warranty.Too much water in the mixturecan freeze and crack the engine,radiator, heater core, and otherparts.

Never dispose of engine coolant byputting it in the trash, pouring it onthe ground, or into sewers, streams,or bodies of water. Have the coolantchanged by an authorized servicecenter, familiar with legalrequirements regarding usedcoolant disposal. This will helpprotect the environment and yourhealth.

Checking Coolant

The vehicle must be on a levelsurface when checking the coolantlevel.

Check to see if coolant is visible inthe coolant surge tank. If the coolantinside the coolant surge tank isboiling, do not do anything else untilit cools down. If coolant is visiblebut the coolant level is not at orabove the FULL COLD mark, add a50/50 mixture of clean, drinkablewater and DEX-COOL coolant at thecoolant surge tank, but be sure thecooling system is cool before this isdone. See Engine Overheating onpage 10‑20 for more information.


10-18 Vehicle Care

The coolant level should be at orabove the FULL COLD mark on thecoolant surge tank. If it is not, theremay be a leak at the pressure capor in the radiator hoses, heaterhoses, radiator, water pump,or somewhere else in the coolingsystem.

How to Add Coolant to theCoolant Surge Tank

{ WARNING

An electric engine cooling fanunder the hood can start up evenwhen the engine is not runningand can cause injury. Keephands, clothing, and tools awayfrom any underhood electric fan.

{ WARNING

Steam and scalding liquids from ahot cooling system can blow outand burn you badly. They areunder pressure, and if you turnthe surge tank pressurecap— even a little— they cancome out at high speed. Neverturn the cap when the coolingsystem, including the surge tankpressure cap, is hot. Wait for thecooling system and surge tankpressure cap to cool if you everhave to turn the pressure cap.

{ WARNING

You can be burned if you spillcoolant on hot engine parts.Coolant contains ethylene glycoland it will burn if the engine partsare hot enough. Do not spillcoolant on a hot engine.

Notice: This vehicle has aspecific coolant fill procedure.Failure to follow this procedurecould cause the engine tooverheat and be severelydamaged.

If coolant is needed, add the properDEX-COOL coolant mixture at thecoolant surge tank.


Vehicle Care 10-19

1. Remove the coolant surge tankpressure cap when the coolingsystem, including the coolantsurge tank pressure cap andupper radiator hose, is no longerhot. Turn the pressure capslowly counterclockwise abouttwo or two and one-half turns.

If a hiss is heard, wait for that tostop. This will allow anypressure still left to be ventedout the discharge hose.

2. Keep turning the pressure capslowly, and remove it.

3. Fill the coolant surge tank withthe proper mixture, to the FULLCOLD mark. Wait aboutfive minutes, then check to see ifthe level is below the mark. If thelevel is below the FULL COLDmark, add additional coolant tobring the level up to the mark.Repeat this procedure until thelevel remains constant at theFULL COLD mark for at leastfive minutes.

4. With the coolant surge tankpressure cap off, start theengine and let it run until theupper radiator hose can be feltgetting hot. Watch out for theengine cooling fans.

By this time, the coolant levelinside the coolant surge tankmight be lower. If the level islower than the FULL COLDmark, add more of the propermixture to the coolant surge tankuntil the level reaches the FULLCOLD mark.

5. Replace the pressure cap. Besure the pressure cap ishand-tight and fully seated.

Notice: If the pressure cap is nottightly installed, coolant loss andpossible engine damage mayoccur. Be sure the cap is properlyand tightly secured.


10-20 Vehicle Care

Engine OverheatingThe vehicle has several indicatorsto warn of engine overheating.

There is an engine coolanttemperature gauge as well as anengine coolant temperature warninglight on the vehicle's instrumentpanel cluster. See Engine CoolantTemperature Gauge on page 5‑11and Engine Coolant TemperatureWarning Light on page 5‑20.

If it is decided not to lift the hoodwhen this warning appears, butinstead get service help right away.See Roadside Assistance Program(U.S. and Canada) on page 13‑8 orRoadside Assistance Program(Mexico) on page 13‑10.

If it is decided to lift the hood, makesure the vehicle is parked on a levelsurface.

Then check to see if the enginecooling fans are running. If theengine is overheating, both fansshould be running. If they are not,do not continue to run the engineand have the vehicle serviced.

Notice: Engine damage fromrunning the engine withoutcoolant is not covered by thewarranty.

If Steam is Coming from theEngine Compartment

{ WARNING

Steam from an overheated enginecan burn you badly, even if youjust open the hood. Stay awayfrom the engine if you see or hearsteam coming from it. Just turn itoff and get everyone away fromthe vehicle until it cools down.Wait until there is no sign ofsteam or coolant before you openthe hood.

(Continued)

WARNING (Continued)

If you keep driving when theengine is overheated, the liquidsin it can catch fire. You or otherscould be badly burned. Stop theengine if it overheats, and get outof the vehicle until the engineis cool.

If No Steam is Coming fromthe Engine Compartment

If an engine overheat warning isdisplayed but no steam can be seenor heard, the problem may not betoo serious. Sometimes the enginecan get a little too hot when thevehicle:. Climbs a long hill on a hot day.. Stops after high-speed driving.. Idles for long periods in traffic.. Tows a trailer.


Vehicle Care 10-21

If the overheat warning is displayedwith no sign of steam:

1. Turn the air off.

2. Turn the heater on to the highesttemperature and to the highestfan speed. Open the windows asnecessary.

3. In heavy traffic, let the engineidle in N (Neutral) while stopped.If it is safe to do so, pull off theroad, shift to P (Park) orN (Neutral) and let theengine idle.

If the temperature overheat gaugeis no longer in the overheat zone oran overheat warning no longerdisplays, the vehicle can be driven.Continue to drive the vehicle slowlyfor about 10 minutes. Keep a safevehicle distance from the vehicle infront. If the warning does not comeback on, continue to drive normally.

If the warning continues, pull over,stop, and park the vehicleright away.

If there is no sign of steam, idle theengine for three minutes whileparked. If the warning is stilldisplayed, turn off the engine until itcools down. Also, see “OverheatedEngine Protection Operating Mode”following.

Overheated EngineProtectionOperating ModeThis emergency operating modeallows the vehicle to be driven to asafe place in an emergencysituation. If an overheated enginecondition exists, an overheatprotection mode which alternatesfiring groups of cylinders helpsprevent engine damage. In thismode, a significant loss in power

and engine performance will benoticed. The temperature gauge willindicate an overheat conditionexists. Driving extended km (mi)and/or towing a trailer in theoverheat protection mode should beavoided.

Notice: After driving in theoverheated engine protectionoperating mode, to avoid enginedamage, allow the engine to coolbefore attempting any repair. Theengine oil will be severelydegraded. Repair the cause ofcoolant loss, change the oil andreset the oil life system. SeeEngine Oil on page 10‑9.


10-22 Vehicle Care

Power Steering Fluid

See Engine Compartment Overviewon page 10‑6 for reservoir location.

When to Check Power SteeringFluid

Power steering fluid is used in allvehicles with the V6 engine.Vehicles with the 4-cylinder enginehave electric power steering and donot use power steering fluid.

It is not necessary to regularlycheck power steering fluid unless aleak is suspected in the system,or an unusual noise is heard. A fluidloss in this system could indicate aproblem. Have the system inspectedand repaired.

How to Check Power SteeringFluid

To check the power steering fluid:

1. Turn the key off and let theengine compartment cool down.

2. Wipe the cap and the top of thereservoir clean.

3. Unscrew the cap and wipe thedipstick with a clean rag.

4. Replace the cap and completelytighten it.

5. Remove the cap again and lookat the fluid level on the dipstick.

The fluid level should be betweenthe MIN (Minimum) and MAX(Maximum) marks when the engineis cold, and at the MAX mark whenthe engine is hot. If the fluid is at theMIN mark when the engine is coldor hot, power steering fluid shouldbe added.

The fluid level should be within thecrosshatch area on the dipstick.

If the fluid is at or below the ADD orMIN mark on the dipstick, add justenough fluid to bring the level withinthe crosshatch area.

What to Use

To determine what kind of fluid touse, see Recommended Fluids andLubricants on page 11‑6. Alwaysuse the proper fluid.


Vehicle Care 10-23

Washer Fluid

What to Use

When windshield washer fluid isneeded, be sure to read themanufacturer's instructions beforeuse. If operating the vehicle in anarea where the temperature may fallbelow freezing, use a fluid that hassufficient protection againstfreezing.

Adding Washer Fluid

When the windshield washer fluidreservoir is low, a LOW WASHERFLUID message displays on theDriver Information Center (DIC).See Driver Information Center (DIC)on page 5‑22 for more information.

Open the cap with the washersymbol on it. Add washer fluid untilthe tank is full. See EngineCompartment Overview onpage 10‑6 for reservoir location.

Notice:. When using concentratedwasher fluid, follow themanufacturer's instructionsfor adding water.

. Do not mix water withready-to-use washer fluid.Water can cause the solutionto freeze and damage thewasher fluid tank and otherparts of the washer system.Also, water does not clean aswell as washer fluid.

. Fill the washer fluid tankonly three-quarters fullwhen it is very cold. Thisallows for fluid expansion iffreezing occurs, which coulddamage the tank if it iscompletely full.

. Do not use engine coolant(antifreeze) in the windshieldwasher. It can damage thewindshield washer systemand paint.


10-24 Vehicle Care

BrakesThis vehicle has disc brakes. Discbrake pads have built-in wearindicators that make a high-pitchedwarning sound when the brake padsare worn and new pads are needed.The sound can come and go or beheard all the time the vehicle ismoving, except when applying thebrake pedal firmly.

{ WARNING

The brake wear warning soundmeans that soon the brakes willnot work well. That could lead toa crash. When the brake wearwarning sound is heard, have thevehicle serviced.

Notice: Continuing to drive withworn-out brake pads could resultin costly brake repair.

Some driving conditions or climatescan cause a brake squeal when thebrakes are first applied or lightlyapplied. This does not meansomething is wrong with the brakes.

Properly torqued wheel nuts arenecessary to help prevent brakepulsation. When tires are rotated,inspect brake pads for wear andevenly tighten wheel nuts in theproper sequence to torquespecifications in Capacities andSpecifications on page 12‑2.

Brake linings should always bereplaced as complete axle sets.

Brake Pedal Travel

See your dealer if the brake pedaldoes not return to normal height,or if there is a rapid increase inpedal travel. This could be a signthat brake service might berequired.

Brake Adjustment

Every time the brakes are applied,with or without the vehicle moving,the brakes adjust for wear.

Replacing Brake System Parts

The braking system on a vehicle iscomplex. Its many parts have to beof top quality and work well togetherif the vehicle is to have really goodbraking. The vehicle was designedand tested with top-quality brakeparts. When parts of the brakingsystem are replaced, be sure to getnew, approved replacement parts.If this is not done, the brakes mightnot work properly. For example,installing disc brake pads that arewrong for the vehicle, can changethe balance between the front andrear brakes — for the worse. Thebraking performance expected canchange in many other ways if thewrong replacement brake parts areinstalled.


Vehicle Care 10-25

Brake Fluid

The brake master cylinder reservoiris filled with DOT 3 brake fluid asindicated on the reservoir cap. SeeEngine Compartment Overview onpage 10‑6 for the location of thereservoir.

There are only two reasons why thebrake fluid level in the reservoirmight go down:. The brake fluid level goes down

because of normal brake liningwear. When new linings areinstalled, the fluid level goesback up.

. A fluid leak in the brakehydraulic system can also causea low fluid level. Have the brakehydraulic system fixed, since aleak means that sooner or laterthe brakes will not work well.

Do not top off the brake fluid.Adding fluid does not correct a leak.If fluid is added when the linings areworn, there will be too much fluidwhen new brake linings areinstalled. Add or remove brake fluid,as necessary, only when work isdone on the brake hydraulic system.

{ WARNING

If too much brake fluid is added, itcan spill on the engine and burn,if the engine is hot enough. Youor others could be burned, andthe vehicle could be damaged.Add brake fluid only when work isdone on the brake hydraulicsystem.

When the brake fluid falls to a lowlevel, the brake warning light comeson. See Brake System WarningLight on page 5‑18.

What to Add

Use only new DOT 3 brake fluidfrom a sealed container. SeeRecommended Fluids andLubricants on page 11‑6.


10-26 Vehicle Care

Always clean the brake fluidreservoir cap and the area aroundthe cap before removing it. Thishelps keep dirt from entering thereservoir.

{ WARNING

With the wrong kind of fluid in thebrake hydraulic system, thebrakes might not work well. Thiscould cause a crash. Always usethe proper brake fluid.

Notice:. Using the wrong fluid canbadly damage brakehydraulic system parts. Forexample, just a few drops ofmineral-based oil, such asengine oil, in the brakehydraulic system candamage brake hydraulicsystem parts so badly thatthey will have to be replaced.Do not let someone put inthe wrong kind of fluid.

. If brake fluid is spilled on thevehicle's painted surfaces,the paint finish can bedamaged. Be careful not tospill brake fluid on thevehicle. If you do, wash it offimmediately.

BatteryRefer to the replacement numbershown on the original battery labelwhen a new battery is needed. SeeEngine Compartment Overview onpage 10‑6 for battery location.

{ DANGER

Battery posts, terminals, andrelated accessories contain leadand lead compounds, chemicalsknown to the State of California tocause cancer and reproductiveharm. Wash hands after handling.

Vehicle Storage

{ WARNING

Batteries have acid that can burnyou and gas that can explode.You can be badly hurt if you arenot careful. See Jump Starting onpage 10‑84 for tips on workingaround a battery withoutgetting hurt.

Infrequent Usage: Remove theblack, negative (−) cable from thebattery to keep the battery fromrunning down.

Extended Storage: Remove theblack, negative (−) cable from thebattery or use a battery tricklecharger.


Vehicle Care 10-27

Starter Switch Check

{ WARNING

When you are doing thisinspection, the vehicle couldmove suddenly. If the vehiclemoves, you or others could beinjured.

1. Before starting this check, besure there is enough roomaround the vehicle.

2. Firmly apply both the parkingbrake and the regular brake.See Parking Brake onpage 9‑28.

Do not use the acceleratorpedal, and be ready to turn offthe engine immediately if itstarts.

3. Try to start the engine in eachgear. The vehicle should startonly in P (Park) or N (Neutral).If the vehicle starts in any otherposition, contact your dealer forservice.

Automatic TransmissionShift Lock ControlFunction Check

{ WARNING

When you are doing thisinspection, the vehicle couldmove suddenly. If the vehiclemoves, you or others could beinjured.

1. Before starting this check, besure there is enough roomaround the vehicle. It should beparked on a level surface.

2. Firmly apply the parking brake.See Parking Brake onpage 9‑28.

Be ready to apply the regularbrake immediately if the vehiclebegins to move.

3. With the engine off, turn theignition on, but do not start theengine. Without applying theregular brake, try to move theshift lever out of P (Park) withnormal effort. If the shift levermoves out of P (Park), contactyour dealer for service.


10-28 Vehicle Care

Ignition TransmissionLock CheckWhile parked, and with the parkingbrake set, try to turn the ignition toLOCK/OFF in each shift leverposition.. The ignition should turn to

LOCK/OFF only when the shiftlever is in P (Park).

. The ignition key should comeout only in LOCK/OFF.

Contact your dealer if service isrequired.

Park Brake and P (Park)Mechanism Check

{ WARNING

When you are doing this check,the vehicle could begin to move.You or others could be injuredand property could be damaged.Make sure there is room in frontof the vehicle in case it begins toroll. Be ready to apply the regularbrake at once should the vehiclebegin to move.

Park on a fairly steep hill, with thevehicle facing downhill. Keepingyour foot on the regular brake, setthe parking brake.. To check the parking brake's

holding ability: With the enginerunning and the transmission inN (Neutral), slowly remove footpressure from the regular brakepedal. Do this until the vehicle isheld by the parking brake only.

. To check the P (Park)mechanism's holding ability:With the engine running, shift toP (Park). Then release theparking brake followed by theregular brake.

Contact your dealer if service isrequired.


Vehicle Care 10-29

Wiper Blade ReplacementWindshield wiper blades should beinspected for wear or cracking. SeeScheduled Maintenance onpage 11‑2 for more information.

It is a good idea to clean or replacethe wiper blade assembly on aregular basis or when worn. Forproper windshield wiper bladelength and type, see MaintenanceReplacement Parts on page 11‑7.

Notice: Allowing the wiper bladearm to touch the windshield whenno wiper blade is installed coulddamage the windshield. Anydamage that occurs would not becovered by your warranty. Do notallow the wiper blade arm totouch the windshield.

To replace the wiper blade:

1. Pull the windshield wiper armconnector away from thewindshield.

2. Press the button in the middle ofthe wiper arm connector, andpull the wiper blade away fromthe arm connector.

3. Remove the wiper blade.

4. Reverse steps 1 through 3 forwiper blade replacement.

Headlamp AimingHeadlamp aim has been preset atthe factory and should need nofurther adjustment.

However, if the vehicle is damagedin a crash, the headlamp aim maybe affected. Aim adjustment to thelow-beam headlamps may benecessary if oncoming drivers flashtheir high-beam headlamps at you(for vertical aim).

If the headlamps need to bere-aimed, it is recommended thatthe vehicle be taken to a dealer forservice.


10-30 Vehicle Care

Bulb ReplacementFor the proper type of replacementbulbs, see Replacement Bulbs onpage 10‑34.

For any bulb‐changing procedurenot listed in this section, contactyour dealer.

Halogen Bulbs

{ WARNING

Halogen bulbs have pressurizedgas inside and can burst if youdrop or scratch the bulb. You orothers could be injured. Be sureto read and follow the instructionson the bulb package.

Taillamps, Turn Signal,and Stoplamps(LS and LT)

A. Back‐up Lamp

B. Stoplamp, Taillamp and TurnSignal Lamp

1. Open the trunk. See Trunk onpage 2‑9 for more information.


Vehicle Care 10-31

2. Remove the two rearconvenience net hooks holdingthe trunk trim and move the trimaside.

3. Remove the three wing nuts (A),which hold the taillampassembly, from inside the trunk.

4. Remove the taillamp assembly.

5. Turn the bulb socket (B)counterclockwise to remove itfrom the lamp assembly (A).

6. Pull the bulb from the socket (B).

7. Install a new bulb.

8. Reverse Steps 2 through 5 toreinstall the taillampassembly (A).


10-32 Vehicle Care

Taillamps, Turn Signal,and Stoplamps (LTZ)

A. Back‐up Lamp

B. Stoplamp, Taillamp and TurnSignal Lamp


2. Remove the two rearconvenience net hooks holdingthe trunk trim and move the trimaside.

3. Remove the three wing nuts (A),which hold the taillampassembly, from inside the trunk.

4. Remove the taillamp assembly.


Vehicle Care 10-33

5. Disconnect the wiring harnessconnector (C) from the LED (B).

6. Turn the LED (B)counterclockwise to remove it.

7. Install a new LED (B).

8. Reverse Steps 2 through 6 toreinstall the taillampassembly (A).

Back-Up Lamps


2. Remove the push pins holdingthe trunk trim (B).

3. Move the trim aside far enoughto gain access to the bulbassembly (A).


10-34 Vehicle Care

4. Turn the bulb socket (B)counterclockwise to remove fromthe lamp assembly.

5. Pull the bulb (A) from thesocket (B).

6. Install the new bulb.

7. Reverse Steps 1 through 4 toreinstall.

License Plate LampTo replace the license platelamp bulb:

1. Remove the license plate bezelassembly by turning the twoscrews counterclockwise.

2. Turn and pull the license platelamp assembly forward throughthe fascia opening.

3. Turn the bulb socketcounterclockwise and pull thebulb straight out of the socket.

4. Push the new bulb in and turn itclockwise to install.

5. Reverse Steps 1 through 3 toreinstall.

Replacement Bulbs

Exterior LampBulb

Number

Back-up Lamp 921

License Plate Lamp 168

Rear Turn SignalLamp/Taillamp(LS and LT)

3157K LL

Rear LED TurnSignal Lamp/Taillamp (LTZ)

GM P/N25874489

For replacement bulbs not listedhere, contact the dealer.


Vehicle Care 10-35

Electrical System

Electrical SystemOverloadThe vehicle has fuses and circuitbreakers to protect against anelectrical system overload.

When the current electrical load istoo heavy, the circuit breaker opensand closes, protecting the circuituntil the current load returns tonormal or the problem is fixed. Thisgreatly reduces the chance of circuitoverload and fire caused byelectrical problems.

Fuses and circuit breakers protectthe following in the vehicle:. Headlamp Wiring. Windshield Wiper Motor. Power Windows and Other

Power Accessories

Replace a bad fuse with a new oneof the identical size and rating.

If there is a problem on the road anda fuse needs to be replaced, thesame amperage fuse can beborrowed. Choose some feature ofthe vehicle that is not needed to useand replace it as soon as possible.

Headlamp Wiring

An electrical overload may causethe lamps to go on and off, or insome cases to remain off. Have theheadlamp wiring checked right awayif the lamps go on and off orremain off.

Windshield Wipers

If the wiper motor overheats due toheavy snow or ice, the windshieldwipers will stop until the motor coolsand will then restart.

Although the circuit is protectedfrom electrical overload, overloaddue to heavy snow or ice maycause wiper linkage damage.Always clear ice and heavy snowfrom the windshield before using thewindshield wipers.

If the overload is caused by anelectrical problem and not snow orice, be sure to get it fixed.

FusesThe wiring circuits in the vehicle areprotected from short circuits byfuses. This greatly reduces thechance of damage caused byelectrical problems.

To check a fuse, look at thesilver-colored band inside the fuse.If the band is broken or melted,replace the fuse. Be sure to replacea bad fuse with a new one of theidentical size and rating.

Fuses of the same amperage canbe temporarily borrowed fromanother fuse location, if a fuse goesout. Replace the fuse as soon aspossible.


10-36 Vehicle Care

To identify and check fuses, circuitbreakers, and relays, see EngineCompartment Fuse Block onpage 10‑36, Instrument Panel FuseBlock on page 10‑38, and RearCompartment Fuse Block onpage 10‑40.

Engine CompartmentFuse BlockThe engine compartment fuse blockis located on the driver side of theengine compartment, near thebattery.

Notice: Spilling liquid on anyelectrical component on thevehicle may damage it. Alwayskeep the covers on any electricalcomponent.

The vehicle may not be equippedwith all of the fuses, relays, andfeatures shown.

Fuses Usage

1 Air Conditioner Clutch

2Electronic ThrottleControl

Fuses Usage

3 Not Used

4Transmission ControlModule Ignition 1

5Mass AirflowSensor (LY7)

6 Emission


Vehicle Care 10-37

Fuses Usage

7 Left HeadlampLow-Beam

8 Horn

9Right HeadlampLow-Beam

10 Front Fog Lamps

11Left HeadlampHigh-Beam

12Right HeadlampHigh-Beam

13Engine ControlModule BATT

14 Windshield Wiper

15Antilock BrakeSystem (IGN 1)

16Engine ControlModule IGN 1

17 Cooling Fan 1

Fuses Usage

18 Cooling Fan 2

19Run Relay, Heating,Ventilation, AirConditioning Blower

20Body ControlModule 1

21Body Control ModuleRun/Crank

22Rear ElectricalCenter 1

23Rear ElectricalCenter 2

24Antilock BrakeSystem

25Body ControlModule 2

26 Starter

41Electric PowerSteering

Fuses Usage

42 Transmission ControlModule Battery

43

Ignition Module(LE9 & LE5);Injectors, IgnitionCoils Odd (LY7)

44Injectors (LE9 & LE5);Injectors, IgnitionCoils Even (LY7)

45Post Cat 02 SensorHeaters (LY7)

46 Daytime RunningLamps

47Center High-MountedStoplamp

50 Driver Power Window

51 Not Used

52 AIR Solenoid

54Regulated VoltageControl


10-38 Vehicle Care

Fuses Usage

55 DC/AC Inverter

56Antilock BrakeSystem BATT

Relays Usage

28 Cooling Fan 1

29Cooling Fan Series/Parallel

30 Cooling Fan 2

31 Starter

32 Run/Crank, Ignition

33 Powertrain

34 Air ConditioningClutch

35 High Beam

Relays Usage

36 Front Fog Lamps

37 Horn

38 Low-Beam Headlamp

39 Windshield Wiper 1

40 Windshield Wiper 2

48Daytime RunningLamps

49 Stoplamps

53 AIR Solenoid

Diodes Usage

27 Wiper

Instrument Panel FuseBlock

The instrument panel fuse block islocated on the instrument panelnear the floor on the passenger sideof the vehicle.

Remove the panel cover to accessthe fuse block, then remove the fuseblock cover to access the fuses.


Vehicle Care 10-39

The vehicle may not be equippedwith all of the fuses, relays andfeatures shown.

Fuses Usage

POWERMIRRORS

Power Mirrors

EPSElectronic PowerSteering

Fuses Usage

RUN/CRANK

Cruise ControlSwitch, PassengerAirbag StatusIndicator

Fuses Usage

HVACBLOWERHIGH

Heating VentilationAir ConditioningBlower - HighSpeed Relay

CLUSTER/THEFT

Instrument PanelCluster, TheftDeterrent System

ONSTAROnStar®

(If Equipped)

NOTINSTALLED

Not Used

AIRBAG(IGN)

Airbag (Ignition)

HVACCTRL (BATT)

Heating VentilationAir ConditioningControl DiagnosticLink Connector(Battery)

PEDAL Not Used

WIPER SWWindshield Wiper/Washer Switch

IGNSENSOR

Ignition Switch


10-40 Vehicle Care

Fuses Usage

STRG WHLILLUM

Steering WheelIllumination

NOTINSTALLED

Not Used

RADIO Audio System

INTERIORLIGHTS

Interior Lamps

NOTINSTALLED Not Used

POWERWINDOWS

Power Windows

HVACCTRL (IGN)

Heating VentilationAir ConditioningControl (Ignition)

HVACBLOWER

Heating VentilationAir ConditioningBlower Switch

DOOR LOCK Door Locks

ROOF/HEAT SEAT

Sunroof,Heated Seat

NOTINSTALLED

Not Used

Fuses Usage

NOTINSTALLED

Not Used

AIRBAG(BATT)

Airbag (Battery)

SPAREFUSEHOLDER

Spare Fuse Holder

SPAREFUSEHOLDER

Spare Fuse Holder

SPAREFUSEHOLDER

Spare Fuse Holder

SPAREFUSEHOLDER

Spare Fuse Holder

FUSEPULLER

Fuse Puller

Rear Compartment FuseBlock

The rear compartment fuse block islocated in the trunk of the vehicle.Access the fuse block through thetrunk panel on the driver side of therear cargo area.


Vehicle Care 10-41

The vehicle may not be equippedwith all of the fuses, relays, andfeatures shown.

Fuses Usage

1Passenger SeatControls

2 Driver Seat Controls

3 Not Used

Fuses Usage

4 Not Used

5Emission 2, CanisterVent Solenoid

6Park Lamps,Instrument PanelDimming

Fuses Usage

7 Not Used

8 Not Used

9 Not Used

10 Sunroof Controls

11 Not Used

12 Not Used

13 Audio Amplifier

14 Heated Seat Controls

15 Not Used

16

Remote Keyless Entry(RKE) System, XM™Satellite Radio(If Equipped)

17 Back-up Lamps

18 Not Used

19 Not Used

20Auxiliary PowerOutlets

21 Not Used


10-42 Vehicle Care

Fuses Usage

22 Trunk Release

23 Rear Defog

24 Heated Mirrors

25 Fuel Pump

Relays Usage

26Rear WindowDefogger

27 Park Lamps

28 Not Used

29 Not Used

Relays Usage

30 Not Used

31 Not Used

32 Not Used

33 Back-up Lamps

34 Not Used

35 Not Used

36 Trunk Release

37 Fuel Pump

38 (Diode) Cargo Lamp

Wheels and Tires

TiresYour new vehicle comes withhigh-quality tires made by aleading tire manufacturer. If youever have questions about yourtire warranty and where toobtain service, see your vehicleWarranty booklet for details. Foradditional information refer tothe tire manufacturer.

{ WARNING

. Poorly maintained andimproperly used tires aredangerous.

. Overloading the tires cancause overheating as a resultof too much flexing. Therecould be a blowout and aserious crash. See VehicleLoad Limits on page 9‑12.

(Continued)


Vehicle Care 10-43

WARNING (Continued)

. Underinflated tires pose thesame danger as overloadedtires. The resulting crashcould cause serious injury.Check all tires frequently tomaintain the recommendedpressure. Tire pressureshould be checked when thetires are cold.

. Overinflated tires are morelikely to be cut, punctured,or broken by a suddenimpact — such as whenhitting a pothole. Keep tires atthe recommended pressure.

. Worn or old tires can cause acrash. If the tread is badlyworn, replace them.

. Replace any tires that havebeen damaged by impactswith potholes, curbs, etc.

(Continued)

WARNING (Continued)

. Improperly repaired tires cancause a crash. Only thedealer or an authorized tireservice center should repair,replace, dismount, and mountthe tires.

. Do not spin the tires inexcess of 55 km/h (35 mph)on slippery surfaces such assnow, mud, ice, etc.Excessive spinning maycause the tires to explode.

See Tire Pressure for High-SpeedOperation on page 10‑52 forinflation pressure adjustment forhigh-speed driving.

Winter TiresConsider installing winter tires onthe vehicle if frequent driving onsnow or ice covered roads isexpected. All season tires providegood overall performance on mostsurfaces, but they may not offer thetraction or the same level ofperformance as winter tires onsnow or ice covered roads.

Winter tires, in general, aredesigned for increased traction onsnow and ice covered roads. Withwinter tires, there may be decreaseddry road traction, increased roadnoise, and shorter tread life. Afterchanging to winter tires, be alert forchanges in vehicle handling andbraking.


10-44 Vehicle Care

See your dealer for detailsregarding winter tire availability andproper tire selection. Also, seeBuying New Tires on page 10‑59.

If using snow tires:. Use tires of the same brand and

tread type on all four wheelpositions.

. Use only radial ply tires of thesame size, load range, andspeed rating as the originalequipment tires.

Winter tires with the same speedrating as the original equipment tiresmay not be available for H, V, W, Y,and ZR speed rated tires. If wintertires with a lower speed rating arechosen, never exceed the tire'smaximum speed capability.

Low-Profile TiresIf your vehicle has P225/50R18or P225/50R17 size tires, theyare classified as low‐profileperformance tires. These tiresare designed for very responsivedriving on wet or dry pavement.You may also notice more roadnoise with low‐profileperformance tires and that theytend to wear faster.

Notice: If the vehicle haslow‐profile tires, they are moresusceptible to damage fromroad hazards or curb impactthan standard profile tires.

Tire and/or wheel assemblydamage can occur whencoming into contact with roadhazards like, potholes,or sharp edged objects,or when sliding into a curb.The vehicle warranty does notcover this type of damage.Keep tires set to the correctinflation pressure and, whenpossible avoid contact withcurbs, potholes, and otherroad hazards.

Tire Sidewall LabelingUseful information about a tire ismolded into its sidewall. Theexamples below show a typicalpassenger vehicle tire and acompact spare tire sidewall.


Vehicle Care 10-45

Passenger (P‐Metric) Tire Example

(A) Tire Size: The tire size is acombination of letters andnumbers used to define aparticular tire's width, height,aspect ratio, construction type,and service description. See the“Tire Size” illustration later in thissection for more detail.

(B) TPC Spec (TirePerformance CriteriaSpecification): Originalequipment tires designed toGM's specific tire performancecriteria have a TPC specificationcode molded onto the sidewall.GM's TPC specifications meet orexceed all federal safetyguidelines.

(C) DOT (Department ofTransportation): TheDepartment of Transportation(DOT) code indicates that thetire is in compliance withthe U.S. Department ofTransportation Motor VehicleSafety Standards.

(D) Tire Identification Number(TIN): The letters and numbersfollowing the DOT (Departmentof Transportation) code arethe Tire Identification Number(TIN). The TIN shows themanufacturer and plant code,tire size, and date the tire wasmanufactured. The TIN ismolded onto both sides of thetire, although only one side mayhave the date of manufacture.

(E) Tire Ply Material: The typeof cord and number of plies inthe sidewall and under the tread.

(F) Uniform Tire QualityGrading (UTQG): Tiremanufacturers are required tograde tires based on threeperformance factors: treadwear,traction, and temperatureresistance. For more informationsee Uniform Tire QualityGrading on page 10‑62.


10-46 Vehicle Care

(G) Maximum Cold InflationLoad Limit: Maximum load thatcan be carried and themaximum pressure needed tosupport that load.

Compact Spare Tire Example

(A) Tire Ply Material: The typeof cord and number of plies inthe sidewall and under the tread.

(B) Temporary Use Only: Thecompact spare tire or temporaryuse tire has a tread life ofapproximately 5 000 km(3,000 mi) and should not bedriven at speeds over 105 km/h(65 mph). The compact sparetire is for emergency use when aregular road tire has lost air andgone flat. If the vehicle has acompact spare tire, seeCompact Spare Tire onpage 10‑83 and If a Tire GoesFlat on page 10‑65.

(C) Tire Identification Number(TIN): The letters and numbersfollowing the DOT (Departmentof Transportation) code isthe Tire Identification Number(TIN). The TIN shows themanufacturer and plant code,tire size, and date the tire wasmanufactured. The TIN ismolded onto both sides of thetire, although only one side mayhave the date of manufacture.

(D) Maximum Cold InflationLoad Limit: Maximum loadthat can be carried and themaximum pressure needed tosupport that load.

(E) Tire Inflation: Thetemporary use tire or compactspare tire should be inflated to420 kPa (60 psi). For moreinformation on tire pressure andinflation see Tire Pressure onpage 10‑51.

(F) Tire Size: A combination ofletters and numbers define atire's width, height, aspect ratio,construction type, and servicedescription. The letter T as thefirst character in the tire sizemeans the tire is for temporaryuse only.


Vehicle Care 10-47

(G) TPC Spec (TirePerformance CriteriaSpecification): Originalequipment tires designed toGM's specific tire performancecriteria have a TPC specificationcode molded onto the sidewall.GM's TPC specifications meet orexceed all federal safetyguidelines.

Tire Designations

Tire Size

The following is an example of atypical passenger vehicletire size.

(A) Passenger (P‐Metric) Tire:The United States version of ametric tire sizing system. Theletter P as the first character inthe tire size means a passengervehicle tire engineered tostandards set by the U.S. Tireand Rim Association.

(B) Tire Width: The three‐digitnumber indicates the tire sectionwidth in millimeters fromsidewall to sidewall.

(C) Aspect Ratio: A two‐digitnumber that indicates the tireheight‐to‐width measurements.For example, if the tire sizeaspect ratio is 60, as shown in

item C of the illustration, it wouldmean that the tire's sidewall is60 percent as high as it is wide.

(D) Construction Code: Aletter code is used to indicatethe type of ply construction inthe tire. The letter R meansradial ply construction; theletter D means diagonal or biasply construction; and the letter Bmeans belted‐bias plyconstruction.

(E) Rim Diameter: Diameter ofthe wheel in inches.

(F) Service Description: Thesecharacters represent the loadindex and speed rating of thetire. The load index representsthe load carrying capacity a tireis certified to carry. The speedrating is the maximum speed atire is certified to carry a load.


10-48 Vehicle Care

Tire Terminology andDefinitionsAir Pressure: The amount ofair inside the tire pressingoutward on each square inch ofthe tire. Air pressure isexpressed in psi (pounds persquare inch) or kPa (kilopascal).

Accessory Weight: Thecombined weight of optionalaccessories. Some examples ofoptional accessories are,automatic transmission, powersteering, power brakes, powerwindows, power seats, and airconditioning.

Aspect Ratio: The relationshipof a tire's height to its width.

Belt: A rubber coated layer ofcords that is located betweenthe plies and the tread. Cordsmay be made from steel or otherreinforcing materials.

Bead: The tire bead containssteel wires wrapped by steelcords that hold the tire ontothe rim.

Bias Ply Tire: A pneumatic tirein which the plies are laid atalternate angles less than90 degrees to the centerline ofthe tread.

Cold Tire Pressure: Theamount of air pressure in a tire,measured in kPa (kilopascal)or psi (pounds per square inch)before a tire has built up heatfrom driving. See Tire Pressureon page 10‑51.

Curb Weight: The weight of amotor vehicle with standard andoptional equipment including themaximum capacity of fuel, oil,and coolant, but withoutpassengers and cargo.

DOT Markings: A code moldedinto the sidewall of a tiresignifying that the tire is incompliance with the U.S.Department of Transportation(DOT) Motor Vehicle SafetyStandards. The DOT codeincludes the Tire IdentificationNumber (TIN), an alphanumericdesignator which can alsoidentify the tire manufacturer,production plant, brand, anddate of production.

GVWR: Gross Vehicle WeightRating. See Vehicle Load Limitson page 9‑12.

GAWR FRT: Gross Axle WeightRating for the front axle. SeeVehicle Load Limits onpage 9‑12.


Vehicle Care 10-49

GAWR RR: Gross Axle WeightRating for the rear axle. SeeVehicle Load Limits onpage 9‑12.

Intended Outboard Sidewall:The side of an asymmetrical tire,that must always face outwardwhen mounted on a vehicle.

Kilopascal (kPa): The metricunit for air pressure.

Light Truck (LT‐Metric) Tire: Atire used on light duty trucks andsome multipurpose passengervehicles.

Load Index: An assignednumber ranging from 1 to 279that corresponds to the loadcarrying capacity of a tire.

Maximum Inflation Pressure:The maximum air pressure towhich a cold tire can be inflated.The maximum air pressure ismolded onto the sidewall.

Maximum Load Rating: Theload rating for a tire at themaximum permissible inflationpressure for that tire.

Maximum Loaded VehicleWeight: The sum of curbweight, accessory weight,vehicle capacity weight, andproduction options weight.

Normal Occupant Weight: Thenumber of occupants a vehicleis designed to seat multiplied by68 kg (150 lbs). See VehicleLoad Limits on page 9‑12.

Occupant Distribution:Designated seating positions.

Outward Facing Sidewall: Theside of an asymmetrical tire thathas a particular side that facesoutward when mounted on avehicle. The side of the tire thatcontains a whitewall, bearswhite lettering, or bearsmanufacturer, brand, and/ormodel name molding that ishigher or deeper than the samemoldings on the other sidewallof the tire.

Passenger (P-Metric) Tire: Atire used on passenger cars andsome light duty trucks andmultipurpose vehicles.

Recommended InflationPressure: Vehiclemanufacturer's recommendedtire inflation pressure as shownon the tire placard. See TirePressure on page 10‑51 andVehicle Load Limits onpage 9‑12.


10-50 Vehicle Care

Radial Ply Tire: A pneumatictire in which the ply cords thatextend to the beads are laid at90 degrees to the centerline ofthe tread.

Rim: A metal support for a tireand upon which the tire beadsare seated.

Sidewall: The portion of a tirebetween the tread and the bead.

Speed Rating: Analphanumeric code assignedto a tire indicating the maximumspeed at which a tire canoperate.

Traction: The friction betweenthe tire and the road surface.The amount of grip provided.

Tread: The portion of a tire thatcomes into contact withthe road.

Treadwear Indicators: Narrowbands, sometimes called wearbars, that show across the treadof a tire when only 1.6 mm(1/16 in) of tread remains. SeeWhen It Is Time for New Tireson page 10‑59.

UTQGS (Uniform Tire QualityGrading Standards): A tireinformation system thatprovides consumers withratings for a tire's traction,temperature, and treadwear.Ratings are determined bytire manufacturers usinggovernment testing procedures.The ratings are molded into thesidewall of the tire. See UniformTire Quality Grading onpage 10‑62.

Vehicle Capacity Weight:The number of designatedseating positions multiplied by68 kg (150 lbs) plus the ratedcargo load. See Vehicle LoadLimits on page 9‑12.

Vehicle Maximum Load on theTire: Load on an individual tiredue to curb weight, accessoryweight, occupant weight, andcargo weight.

Vehicle Placard: A labelpermanently attached to avehicle showing the vehiclecapacity weight and the originalequipment tire size andrecommended inflation pressure.See “Tire and LoadingInformation Label” under VehicleLoad Limits on page 9‑12.


Vehicle Care 10-51

Tire PressureTires need the correct amount ofair pressure to operateeffectively.

Notice: Neither tireunderinflation noroverinflation is good.Underinflated tires, or tiresthat do not have enough air,can result in:. Tire overloading andover-heating which couldlead to a blowout.

. Premature orirregular wear.

. Poor handling.

. Reduced fuel economy.

Overinflated tires, or tires thathave too much air, canresult in:. Unusual wear.. Poor handling.. Rough ride.. Needless damage fromroad hazards.

A vehicle-specific Tire andLoading Information label isattached to the vehicle. Thislabel shows the vehicle's originalequipment tires and the correctinflation pressures for the tireswhen they are cold. Therecommended cold tire inflationpressure, shown on the label, isthe minimum amount of airpressure needed to support thevehicle's maximum load carryingcapacity.

For additional informationregarding how much weight thevehicle can carry, and anexample of the Tire and LoadingInformation label, see VehicleLoad Limits on page 9‑12. Howyou load the vehicle affectsvehicle handling and ridecomfort. Never load the vehiclewith more weight than it wasdesigned to carry.

When to Check

Check the tires once a month ormore. Do not forget to check thecompact spare tire, if the vehiclehas one. The compact spareshould be at 420 kPa (60 psi).For additional informationregarding the compact sparetire, seeCompact Spare Tire onpage 10‑83.


10-52 Vehicle Care

How to Check

Use a good quality pocket-typegauge to check tire pressure.You cannot tell if the tires areproperly inflated simply bylooking at them. Radial tires maylook properly inflated even whenthey are underinflated. Checkthe tire's inflation pressure whenthe tires are cold. Cold meansthe vehicle has been sitting forat least three hours or driven nomore than 1.6 km (1 mi).

Remove the valve cap from thetire valve stem. Press the tiregauge firmly onto the valve toget a pressure measurement.If the cold tire inflation pressurematches the recommendedpressure on the Tire andLoading Information label, nofurther adjustment is necessary.If the inflation pressure is low,add air until you reach therecommended amount.

If you overfill the tire, release airby pushing on the metal stem inthe center of the tire valve. Re‐check the tire pressure with thetire gauge.

Be sure to put the valve capsback on the valve stems. Theyhelp prevent leaks by keepingout dirt and moisture.

Tire Pressure forHigh-Speed Operation

{ WARNING

Driving at high speeds, 160 km/h(100mph) or higher, puts anadditional strain on tires.Sustained high-speed drivingcauses excessive heat build upand can cause sudden tire failure.You could have a crash and youor others could be killed. Somehigh-speed rated tires require

(Continued)

WARNING (Continued)

inflation pressure adjustment forhigh speed operation. Whenspeed limits and road conditionsare such that a vehicle can bedriven at high speeds, make surethe tires are rated for high speedoperation, in excellent condition,and set to the correct cold tireinflation pressure for thevehicle load.

Set the cold tire inflation pressure to35 psi (241 kPa) for the front andrear tires, when operating yourvehicle at high-speed conditions.When you end high-speed drivingreturn the tires to the cold inflationpressure shown on the Tire andLoading Information label. SeeVehicle Load Limits on page 9‑12and Tire Pressure on page 10‑51.


Vehicle Care 10-53

Tire Pressure MonitorSystemThe Tire Pressure Monitor System(TPMS) uses radio and sensortechnology to check tire pressurelevels. The TPMS sensors monitorthe air pressure in your tires andtransmit tire pressure readings to areceiver located in the vehicle.

Each tire, including the spare(if provided), should be checkedmonthly when cold and inflated tothe inflation pressure recommendedby the vehicle manufacturer on thevehicle placard or tire inflationpressure label. (If your vehicle hastires of a different size than the sizeindicated on the vehicle placard ortire inflation pressure label, youshould determine the proper tireinflation pressure for those tires.)

As an added safety feature, yourvehicle has been equipped with atire pressure monitoring system(TPMS) that illuminates a low tire

pressure telltale when one or moreof your tires is significantlyunder‐inflated.

Accordingly, when the low tirepressure telltale illuminates, youshould stop and check your tires assoon as possible, and inflate themto the proper pressure. Driving on asignificantly under‐inflated tirecauses the tire to overheat and canlead to tire failure. Under‐inflationalso reduces fuel efficiency and tiretread life, and may affect thevehicle's handling and stoppingability.

Please note that the TPMS isnot a substitute for proper tiremaintenance, and it is the driver'sresponsibility to maintain correct tirepressure, even if under‐inflation hasnot reached the level to triggerillumination of the TPMS low tirepressure telltale.

Your vehicle has also beenequipped with a TPMS malfunctionindicator to indicate when thesystem is not operating properly.

The TPMS malfunction indicator iscombined with the low tire pressuretelltale. When the system detects amalfunction, the telltale will flash forapproximately one minute and thenremain continuously illuminated.This sequence will continue uponsubsequent vehicle start‐ups aslong as the malfunction exists.

When the malfunction indicator isilluminated, the system may not beable to detect or signal low tirepressure as intended. TPMSmalfunctions may occur for a varietyof reasons, including the installationof replacement or alternate tires orwheels on the vehicle that preventthe TPMS from functioning properly.Always check the TPMS malfunctiontelltale after replacing one or moretires or wheels on your vehicle toensure that the replacement oralternate tires and wheels allow theTPMS to continue to functionproperly.

See Tire Pressure MonitorOperation on page 10‑54 foradditional information.


10-54 Vehicle Care

Federal CommunicationsCommission (FCC) andIndustry Canada

See Radio Frequency Statement onpage 13‑19 for informationregarding Part 15 of the FederalCommunications Commission (FCC)rules and Industry CanadaStandards RSS-210/220/310.

Tire Pressure MonitorOperationThis vehicle may have a TirePressure Monitor System (TPMS).The TPMS is designed to warn thedriver when a low tire pressurecondition exists. TPMS sensors aremounted onto each tire and wheelassembly, excluding the spare tireand wheel assembly. The TPMSsensors monitor the air pressure inthe tires and transmits the tirepressure readings to a receiverlocated in the vehicle.

When a low tire pressure conditionis detected, the TPMS turns on thelow tire pressure warning lightlocated on the instrument cluster.If the warning light comes on, stopas soon as possible and inflate thetires to the recommended pressureshown on the tire loadinginformation label. See Vehicle LoadLimits on page 9‑12.

A message to check the pressure ina specific tire displays in the DriverInformation Center (DIC). The lowtire pressure warning light and theDIC warning message come on ateach ignition cycle until the tires areinflated to the correct inflationpressure. Using the DIC, tirepressure levels can be viewed. Foradditional information and details

about the DIC operation anddisplays see Tire Messages onpage 5‑29.

The low tire pressure warning lightmay come on in cool weather whenthe vehicle is first started, and thenturn off as the vehicle is driven. Thiscould be an early indicator that theair pressure is getting low andneeds to be inflated to the properpressure.

A Tire and Loading Information labelshows the size of the originalequipment tires and the correctinflation pressure for the tires whenthey are cold. See Vehicle LoadLimits on page 9‑12, for an exampleof the Tire and Loading Informationlabel and its location. Also see TirePressure on page 10‑51.

The TPMS system can warn abouta low tire pressure condition but itdoes not replace normal tiremaintenance. See Tire Inspectionon page 10‑57, Tire Rotation onpage 10‑57 and Tires onpage 10‑42.


Vehicle Care 10-55

Notice: Tire sealant materials arenot all the same. A non-approvedtire sealant could damage theTPMS sensors. TPMS sensordamage caused by using anincorrect tire sealant is notcovered by the vehicle warranty.Always use only theGM-approved tire sealantavailable through your dealer orincluded in the vehicle.

Factory-installed Tire Inflator Kitsuse a GM approved liquid tiresealant. Using non-approved tiresealants could damage the TPMSsensors. See Tire Sealant andCompressor Kit on page 10‑67 forinformation regarding the inflator kitmaterials and instructions.

TPMS Malfunction Light andMessage

The TPMS will not function properlyif one or more of the TPMS sensorsare missing or inoperable. When thesystem detects a malfunction, thelow tire pressure warning lightflashes for about one minute andthen stays on for the remainder ofthe ignition cycle. A DIC warningmessage also displays. Themalfunction light and DIC warningmessage come on at each ignitioncycle until the problem is corrected.Some of the conditions that cancause these to come on are:. One of the road tires has been

replaced with the spare tire. Thespare tire does not have aTPMS sensor. The malfunctionlight and the DIC messageshould go off after the road tireis replaced and the sensormatching process is performedsuccessfully. See "TPMS SensorMatching Process" later in thissection.

. The TPMS sensor matchingprocess was not done or notcompleted successfully afterrotating the tires. Themalfunction light and the DICmessage should go off aftersuccessfully completing thesensor matching process. See"TPMS Sensor MatchingProcess" later in this section.

. One or more TPMS sensors aremissing or damaged. Themalfunction light and the DICmessage should go off when theTPMS sensors are installed andthe sensor matching process isperformed successfully. Seeyour dealer for service.

. Replacement tires or wheels donot match the original equipmenttires or wheels. Tires and wheelsother than those recommendedcould prevent the TPMS fromfunctioning properly. See BuyingNew Tires on page 10‑59.


10-56 Vehicle Care

. Operating electronic devices orbeing near facilities using radiowave frequencies similar to theTPMS could cause the TPMSsensors to malfunction.

If the TPMS is not functioningproperly, it cannot detect or signal alow tire condition. See your dealerfor service if the TPMS malfunctionlight and DIC message come onand stay on.

TPMS Sensor MatchingProcess

Each TPMS sensor has a uniqueidentification code. The identificationcode needs to be matched to a newtire/wheel position after rotating thevehicle’s tires or replacing one ormore of the TPMS sensors. TheTPMS sensor matching processshould also be performed afterreplacing a spare tire with a roadtire containing the TPMS sensor.The malfunction light and the DICmessage should go off at the nextignition cycle. The sensors arematched to the tire/wheel positions,

using a TPMS relearn tool, in thefollowing order: driver side front tire,passenger side front tire, passengerside rear tire, and driver side rear.See your dealer for service or topurchase a relearn tool.

There are two minutes to matchthe first tire/wheel position, andfive minutes overall to match allfour tire/wheel positions. If it takeslonger, the matching process stopsand must be restarted.

The TPMS matching process is:

1. Set the parking brake.

2. Turn the ignition to ON/RUN withthe engine off.

3. Press and hold the RemoteKeyless Entry (RKE)transmitter's LOCK andUNLOCK buttons, at the sametime, for about five seconds tostart the TPMS learn mode. Thehorn sounds twice indicating theTPMS receiver is ready and inlearn mode.

4. Start with the driver side fronttire. The driver side front turnsignal also comes on to indicatethat corner's sensor is ready tobe learned.

5. Place the relearn tool againstthe tire sidewall, near the valvestem. Then press the button toactivate the TPMS sensor.A horn chirp confirms that thesensor identification code hasbeen matched to this tire andwheel position.

6. The passenger side front turnsignal comes on to indicate thatcorner sensor is ready to belearned. Proceed to thepassenger side front tire andrepeat the procedure in Step 5.

7. The passenger side rear turnsignal comes on to indicate thatcorner sensor is ready to belearned. Proceed to thepassenger side rear tire andrepeat the procedure in Step 5.


Vehicle Care 10-57

8. The driver side rear turn signalcomes on to indicate that cornersensor is ready to be learned.Proceed to the driver side reartire, and repeat the procedure inStep 5.

9. After hearing the single hornchirp for the driver side rear tire,two additional horn chirps soundto indicate the tire learningprocess is done. Turn theignition switch to LOCK/OFF.

If no tires are learned afterentering the TPMS learn mode,or if communication with thereceiver stops, or if the time limithas expired, turn the ignitionswitch to LOCK/OFF and startover beginning with Step 2.

10. Set all four tires to therecommended air pressurelevel as indicated on the Tireand Loading Information label.

Tire InspectionGM recommends that the tires,including the spare tire, if thevehicle has one, be inspectedfor signs of wear or damage atleast once a month.

Replace the tire if:. The indicators at three or

more places around the tirecan be seen.

. There is cord or fabricshowing through the tire'srubber.

. The tread or sidewall iscracked, cut, or snaggeddeep enough to show cord orfabric.

. The tire has a bump, bulge,or split.

. The tire has a puncture, cut,or other damage that cannotbe repaired well because ofthe size or location of thedamage.

Tire RotationTires should be rotated every12 000 km (7,500 mi). SeeScheduled Maintenance onpage 11‑2.

The purpose of a regular tirerotation is to achieve a uniformwear for all tires on the vehicle.This will ensure that the vehiclecontinues to perform most like itdid when the tires were new.


10-58 Vehicle Care

Any time you notice unusualwear, rotate the tires as soon aspossible and check wheelalignment. Also check fordamaged tires or wheels. SeeWhen It Is Time for New Tireson page 10‑59 and WheelReplacement on page 10‑64.

When rotating the vehicle's tires,always use the correct rotationpattern shown here.

Do not include the compactspare tire in the tire rotation.

After the tires have beenrotated, adjust the front and rearinflation pressures as shown onthe Tire and Loading Informationlabel. See Tire Pressure onpage 10‑51 and Vehicle LoadLimits on page 9‑12.

Reset the Tire Pressure MonitorSystem. See Tire PressureMonitor Operation onpage 10‑54.

Make certain that all wheel nutsare properly tightened. See“Wheel Nut Torque” underCapacities and Specifications onpage 12‑2.

{ WARNING

Rust or dirt on a wheel, or on theparts to which it is fastened, canmake wheel nuts become looseafter time. The wheel could comeoff and cause an accident. When

(Continued)

WARNING (Continued)

changing a wheel, remove anyrust or dirt from places where thewheel attaches to the vehicle. Inan emergency, use a cloth or apaper towel to do this; but be sureto use a scraper or wire brushlater, if needed, to get all the rustor dirt off. See If a Tire Goes Flaton page 10‑65.

Lightly coat the center of thewheel hub with wheel bearinggrease after a wheel change ortire rotation to prevent corrosionor rust build-up. Do not getgrease on the flat wheelmounting surface or on thewheel nuts or bolts.


Vehicle Care 10-59

When It Is Time for NewTiresFactors such as maintenance,temperatures, driving speeds,vehicle loading, and road conditionsaffect the wear rate of the tires.

Treadwear indicators are one way totell when it is time for new tires.Treadwear indicators appear whenthe tires have only 1.6 mm (1/16 in)or less of tread remaining. See TireInspection on page 10‑57 and TireRotation on page 10‑57 for moreinformation.

The rubber in tires ages over time.This also applies for the spare tire,if the vehicle has one, even if it isnever used. Multiple conditionsincluding temperatures, loadingconditions, and inflation pressuremaintenance affect how fast agingtakes place. Tires will typically needto be replaced due to wear beforethey may need to be replaceddue to age. Consult the tiremanufacturer for more informationon when tires should be replaced.

Vehicle Storage

Tires age when stored normallymounted on a parked vehicle. Parka vehicle that will be stored for atleast a month in a cool, dry, cleanarea away from direct sunlight toslow aging. This area should be freeof grease, gasoline, or othersubstances that can deterioraterubber.

Parking for an extended period cancause flat spots on the tires thatmay result in vibrations whiledriving. When storing a vehicle for

at least a month, remove the tires orraise the vehicle to reduce theweight from the tires.

Buying New TiresGM has developed and matchedspecific tires for the vehicle. Theoriginal equipment tires installedon the vehicle, when it was new,were designed to meet GeneralMotors Tire Performance CriteriaSpecification (TPC Spec)system rating. If you needreplacement tires, GM stronglyrecommends that you get tireswith the same TPC Spec rating.This way, the vehicle willcontinue to have tires that aredesigned to give the sameperformance and vehicle safety,during normal use, as theoriginal tires.


10-60 Vehicle Care

GM's exclusive TPC Specsystem considers over a dozencritical specifications that impactthe overall performance ofthe vehicle, including brakesystem performance, ride andhandling, traction control, andtire pressure monitoringperformance. GM's TPC Specnumber is molded onto the tire'ssidewall near the tire size. If thetires have an all‐season treaddesign, the TPC Spec numberwill be followed by an MS formud and snow. See TireSidewall Labeling on page 10‑44for additional information.

GM recommends replacing tiresin sets of four. This is becauseuniform tread depth on all tireswill help keep the vehicleperforming most like it did whenthe tires were new. Replacingless than a full set of tires canaffect the braking and handlingperformance of the vehicle. See

Tire Inspection on page 10‑57and Tire Rotation on page 10‑57for information on proper tirerotation.

{ WARNING

Tires could explode duringimproper service. Attempting tomount or dismount a tire couldcause injury or death. Only yourdealer or authorized tire servicecenter should mount or dismountthe tires.

{ WARNING

Mixing tires could cause youto lose control while driving.If you mix tires of differentsizes, brands, or types (radialand bias-belted tires), thevehicle may not handleproperly, and you could have

(Continued)

WARNING (Continued)

a crash. Using tires of differentsizes, brands, or types mayalso cause damage to thevehicle. Be sure to use thecorrect size, brand, and typeof tires on all wheels. It is allright to drive with the compactspare temporarily, as it wasdeveloped for use on thevehicle. See Compact SpareTire on page 10‑83.

{ WARNING

Using bias-ply tires on thevehicle may cause the wheelrim flanges to develop cracksafter many miles of driving.A tire and/or wheel could failsuddenly and cause a crash.Use only radial-ply tires withthe wheels on the vehicle.


Vehicle Care 10-61

If you must replace the vehicle'stires with those that do not havea TPC Spec number, make surethey are the same size, loadrange, speed rating, andconstruction type (radial andbias‐belted tires) as the vehicle'soriginal tires.

Vehicles that have a tirepressure monitoring systemcould give an inaccuratelow‐pressure warning if non‐TPCSpec rated tires are installed onthe vehicle. Non‐TPC Specrated tires may give alow‐pressure warning that ishigher or lower than the properwarning level you would get withTPC Spec rated tires. See TirePressure Monitor System onpage 10‑53.

The vehicle's original equipmenttires are listed on the Tire andLoading Information label. SeeVehicle Load Limits onpage 9‑12 for more informationabout the Tire and LoadingInformation label and its locationon the vehicle.

Different Size Tires andWheelsIf wheels or tires are installed thatare a different size than the originalequipment wheels and tires, vehicleperformance, including its braking,ride and handling characteristics,stability, and resistance to rollovermay be affected. If the vehicle haselectronic systems such as antilockbrakes, rollover airbags, tractioncontrol, and electronic stabilitycontrol, the performance of thesesystems can also be affected.

{ WARNING

If different sized wheels are used,there may not be an acceptablelevel of performance and safety iftires not recommended for thosewheels are selected. Thisincreases the chance of a crashand serious injury. Only use GMspecific wheel and tire systemsdeveloped for the vehicle, andhave them properly installed by aGM certified technician.

See Buying New Tires onpage 10‑59 and Accessories andModifications on page 10‑3 foradditional information.


10-62 Vehicle Care

Uniform Tire QualityGradingQuality grades can be foundwhere applicable on the tiresidewall between tread shoulderand maximum section width. Forexample:

Treadwear 200 Traction AATemperature A

The following information relatesto the system developed by theUnited States National HighwayTraffic Safety Administration(NHTSA), which grades tires bytreadwear, traction, andtemperature performance. Thisapplies only to vehicles sold inthe United States. The gradesare molded on the sidewalls ofmost passenger car tires. TheUniform Tire Quality Grading(UTQG) system does not apply

to deep tread, winter-type snowtires, space-saver, or temporaryuse spare tires, tires withnominal rim diameters of10 to 12 inches (25 to 30 cm),or to some limited-productiontires.

While the tires available onGeneral Motors passenger carsand light trucks may vary withrespect to these grades, theymust also conform to federalsafety requirements andadditional General Motors TirePerformance Criteria (TPC)standards.

All Passenger Car Tires MustConform to Federal SafetyRequirements In Addition ToThese Grades.

Treadwear

The treadwear grade is acomparative rating based on thewear rate of the tire when testedunder controlled conditions on aspecified government testcourse. For example, a tiregraded 150 would wear one anda half (1½) times as well on thegovernment course as a tiregraded 100. The relativeperformance of tires dependsupon the actual conditions oftheir use, however, and maydepart significantly from thenorm due to variations in drivinghabits, service practicesand differences in roadcharacteristics and climate.


Vehicle Care 10-63

Traction – AA, A, B, C

The traction grades, fromhighest to lowest, are AA, A, B,and C. Those grades representthe tire's ability to stop on wetpavement as measured undercontrolled conditions onspecified government testsurfaces of asphalt andconcrete. A tire marked C mayhave poor traction performance.Warning: The traction gradeassigned to this tire is based onstraight-ahead braking tractiontests, and does not includeacceleration, cornering,hydroplaning, or peak tractioncharacteristics.

Temperature – A, B, C

The temperature grades are A(the highest), B, and C,representing the tire's resistanceto the generation of heat and itsability to dissipate heat whentested under controlled

conditions on a specified indoorlaboratory test wheel. Sustainedhigh temperature can cause thematerial of the tire to degenerateand reduce tire life, andexcessive temperature can leadto sudden tire failure. The gradeC corresponds to a level ofperformance which allpassenger car tires must meetunder the Federal Motor SafetyStandard No. 109. Grades B andA represent higher levels ofperformance on the laboratorytest wheel than the minimumrequired by law. Warning: Thetemperature grade for this tire isestablished for a tire that isproperly inflated and notoverloaded. Excessive speed,underinflation, or excessiveloading, either separately or incombination, can cause heatbuildup and possible tire failure.

Wheel Alignment and TireBalanceThe tires and wheels were alignedand balanced at the factory toprovide the longest tire life and bestoverall performance. Adjustments towheel alignment and tire balancingwill not be necessary on a regularbasis. However, check thealignment if there is unusual tirewear or if the vehicle is pulling toone side or the other. If the vehiclevibrates when driving on a smoothroad, the tires and wheels mightneed to be rebalanced. See yourdealer for proper diagnosis.


10-64 Vehicle Care

Wheel ReplacementReplace any wheel that is bent,cracked, or badly rusted orcorroded. If wheel nuts keep comingloose, the wheel, wheel bolts, andwheel nuts should be replaced.If the wheel leaks air, replace it.Some aluminum wheels can berepaired. See your dealer if any ofthese conditions exist.

Your dealer will know the kind ofwheel that is needed.

Each new wheel should have thesame load-carrying capacity,diameter, width, offset, and bemounted the same way as theone it replaces.

Replace wheels, wheel bolts, wheelnuts, or Tire Pressure MonitorSystem (TPMS) sensors with newGM original equipment parts.

{ WARNING

Using the wrong replacementwheels, wheel bolts, or wheelnuts can be dangerous. It couldaffect the braking and handling ofthe vehicle. Tires can lose air,and cause loss of control, causinga crash. Always use the correctwheel, wheel bolts, and wheelnuts for replacement.

Notice: The wrong wheel canalso cause problems with bearinglife, brake cooling, speedometeror odometer calibration,headlamp aim, bumper height,vehicle ground clearance, and tireor tire chain clearance to thebody and chassis.

See If a Tire Goes Flat onpage 10‑65 for more information.

Used Replacement Wheels

{ WARNING

Replacing a wheel with a usedone is dangerous. How it hasbeen used or how far it has beendriven may be unknown. It couldfail suddenly and cause a crash.When replacing wheels, use anew GM original equipmentwheel.


Vehicle Care 10-65

Tire Chains

{ WARNING

Do not use tire chains. There isnot enough clearance. Tire chainsused on a vehicle without theproper amount of clearance cancause damage to the brakes,suspension or other vehicle parts.The area damaged by the tirechains could cause you to losecontrol of the vehicle and you orothers may be injured in a crash.

(Continued)

WARNING (Continued)

Use another type of tractiondevice only if its manufacturerrecommends it for use on thevehicle and tire size combinationand road conditions. Follow thatmanufacturer's instructions. Tohelp avoid damage to the vehicle,drive slowly, readjust or removethe device if it is contacting thevehicle, and do not spin thevehicle's wheels. If you do findtraction devices that will fit, installthem on the front tires.

If a Tire Goes FlatIt is unusual for a tire to blowout,especially if the tires are maintainedproperly. See Tires. If air goes out ofa tire, it is much more likely to leakout slowly. But if there is ever ablowout, here are a few tips aboutwhat to expect and what to do:

If a front tire fails, the flat tirecreates a drag that pulls the vehicletoward that side. Take your foot offthe accelerator pedal and grip thesteering wheel firmly. Steer tomaintain lane position, and thengently brake to a stop, well off theroad, if possible.


10-66 Vehicle Care

AA rear blowout, particularly on acurve, acts much like a skid andmay require the same correction asused in a skid. Stop pressing theaccelerator pedal and steer tostraighten the vehicle. It may bevery bumpy and noisy. Gently braketo a stop, well off the road,if possible.

{ WARNING

Driving on a flat tire will causepermanent damage to the tire.Re-inflating a tire after it hasbeen driven on while severelyunderinflated or flat may cause ablowout and a serious crash.Never attempt to re-inflate a tirethat has been driven on whileseverely underinflated or flat.Have your dealer or an authorizedtire service center repair orreplace the flat tire as soon aspossible.

{ WARNING

Lifting a vehicle and gettingunder it to do maintenance orrepairs is dangerous without theappropriate safety equipment andtraining. If a jack is provided withthe vehicle, it is designed only forchanging a flat tire. If it is used foranything else, you or others couldbe badly injured or killed if thevehicle slips off the jack. If a jackis provided with the vehicle, onlyuse it for changing a flat tire.

If a tire goes flat, avoid further tireand wheel damage by driving slowlyto a level place, well off the road,if possible. Turn on the hazardwarning flashers. See HazardWarning Flashers on page 6‑4.

{ WARNING

Changing a tire can bedangerous. The vehicle can slipoff the jack and roll over or fallcausing injury or death. Find alevel place to change the tire. Tohelp prevent the vehicle frommoving:

1. Set the parking brake firmly.

2. Put an automatictransmission shift lever inP (Park), or shift a manualtransmission to 1 (First) orR (Reverse).

3. Turn off the engine and donot restart while the vehicleis raised.

4. Do not allow passengers toremain in the vehicle.

5. Place wheel blocks on bothsides of the tire at theopposite corner of the tirebeing changed.


Vehicle Care 10-67

This vehicle may come with a jackand spare tire or a tire sealant andcompressor kit. To use the jackingequipment to change a spare tiresafely, follow the instructions below.Then see Tire Changing onpage 10‑75. To use the tire sealantand compressor kit, see TireSealant and Compressor Kit onpage 10‑67.

When the vehicle has a flat tire (B),use the following example as aguide to assist you in the placementof wheel blocks (A).

A. Wheel Block

B. Flat Tire

The following information explainshow to repair or change a tire.

Tire Sealant andCompressor Kit

{ WARNING

Idling a vehicle in an enclosedarea with poor ventilation isdangerous. Engine exhaust mayenter the vehicle. Engine exhaustcontains Carbon Monoxide (CO)which cannot be seen or smelled.It can cause unconsciousnessand even death. Never run theengine in an enclosed area thathas no fresh air ventilation. Formore information, see EngineExhaust on page 9‑22.


10-68 Vehicle Care

{ WARNING

Overinflating a tire could causethe tire to rupture and you orothers could be injured. Be sureto read and follow the tire sealantand compressor kit instructionsand inflate the tire to itsrecommended pressure. Do notexceed the recommendedpressure.

{ WARNING

Storing the tire sealant andcompressor kit or otherequipment in the passengercompartment of the vehicle couldcause injury. In a sudden stop orcollision, loose equipment couldstrike someone. Store the tiresealant and compressor kit in itsoriginal location.

If this vehicle has a tire sealant andcompressor kit, there may not be aspare tire, tire changing equipment,and on some vehicles there may notbe a place to store a tire.

The tire sealant and compressorcan be used to temporarily sealpunctures up to 6 mm (¼ in) in thetread area of the tire. It can also beused to inflate an under inflated tire.

If the tire has been separated fromthe wheel, has damaged sidewalls,or has a large puncture, the tire istoo severely damaged for the tiresealant and compressor kit to beeffective. See Roadside AssistanceProgram (U.S. and Canada) onpage 13‑8 or Roadside AssistanceProgram (Mexico) on page 13‑10.

Read and follow all of the tiresealant and compressor kitinstructions.

The kit includes:

A. On/Off Button

B. Selector Switch (Sealant/Air orAir Only)

C. Pressure Relief Button

D. Pressure Gauge

E. Air Only Hose (Black)

F. Sealant/Air Hose (Clear)

G. Power Plug


Vehicle Care 10-69

Tire Sealant

Read and follow the safe handlinginstructions on the label adhered tothe compressor.

Check the tire sealant expirationdate on the sealant canister. Thesealant canister should be replacedbefore its expiration date.Replacement sealant canisters areavailable at your local dealer. See“Removal and Installation of theSealant Canister” following.

There is only enough sealant to sealone tire. After usage, the sealantcanister and sealant/air hoseassembly must be replaced. See“Removal and Installation of theSealant Canister” following.

Using the Tire Sealant andCompressor Kit to TemporarilySeal and Inflate aPunctured Tire

Follow the directions closely forcorrect sealant usage.

When using the tire sealant andcompressor kit during coldtemperatures, warm the kit in aheated environment for five minutes.This will help to inflate the tirefaster.

If a tire goes flat, avoid further tireand wheel damage by driving slowlyto a level place. Turn on the hazardwarning flashers. See HazardWarning Flashers on page 6‑4.

See If a Tire Goes Flat onpage 10‑65 for other importantsafety warnings.

Do not remove any objects thathave penetrated the tire.

1. Remove the tire sealant andcompressor kit from its storagelocation. See Storing the TireSealant and Compressor Kit onpage 10‑74.

2. Unwrap the sealant/air hose (F)and the power plug (G).

3. Place the kit on the ground.

Make sure the tire valve stem ispositioned close to the groundso the hose will reach it.

4. Remove the valve stem cap fromthe flat tire by turning itcounterclockwise.


10-70 Vehicle Care

5. Attach the sealant/air hose (F)onto the tire valve stem. Turn itclockwise until it is tight.

6. Plug the power plug (G) into theaccessory power outlet in thevehicle. Unplug all items fromother accessory power outlets.See Power Outlets on page 5‑7.

If the vehicle has an accessorypower outlet, do not use thecigarette lighter.

If the vehicle only has a cigarettelighter, use the cigarette lighter.

Do not pinch the power plugcord in the door or window.

7. Start the vehicle. The vehiclemust be running while using theair compressor.

8. Turn the selector switch (B)clockwise to the Sealant + Airposition.

9. Press the on/off (A) button toturn the tire sealant andcompressor kit on.

The compressor will injectsealant and air into the tire.

The pressure gauge (D) willinitially show a high pressurewhile the compressor pushes thesealant into the tire. Once thesealant is completely dispersedinto the tire, the pressure willquickly drop and start to riseagain as the tire inflates withair only.

10. Inflate the tire to therecommended inflationpressure using the pressuregauge (D). The recommendedinflation pressure can be foundon the Tire and LoadingInformation label. See TirePressure on page 10‑51.

The pressure gauge (D) mayread higher than the actual tirepressure while the compressoris on. Turn the compressor offto get an accurate pressurereading. The compressor maybe turned on/off until thecorrect pressure is reached.

Notice: If the recommendedpressure cannot be reached afterapproximately 25 minutes, thevehicle should not be drivenfarther. The tire is too severelydamaged and the tire sealant andcompressor kit cannot inflate thetire. Remove the power plug fromthe accessory power outlet andunscrew the inflating hose fromthe tire valve. See RoadsideAssistance Program (U.S. andCanada) on page 13‑8 orRoadside Assistance Program(Mexico) on page 13‑10.


Vehicle Care 10-71

11. Press the on/off button (A) toturn the tire sealant andcompressor kit off.

The tire is not sealed and willcontinue to leak air until thevehicle is driven and thesealant is distributed in the tire;therefore, Steps 12 through18 must be done immediatelyafter Step 11.

Be careful while handling thetire sealant and compressor kitas it could be warm afterusage.

12. Unplug the power plug (G) fromthe accessory power outlet inthe vehicle.

13. Turn the sealant/air hose (F)counterclockwise to remove itfrom the tire valve stem.

14. Replace the tire valvestem cap.

15. Return the sealant/air hose (F)and the power plug (G) back intheir original locations.

16. If the flat tire was able to inflateto the recommended inflationpressure, remove themaximum speed label from thesealant canister and place it ina highly visible location. Do notexceed the speed on this labeluntil the damaged tire isrepaired or replaced.

17. Return the equipment to itsoriginal storage location in thevehicle.

18. Immediately drive the vehicle8 km (5 mi) to distribute thesealant in the tire.

19. Stop at a safe location andcheck the tire pressure. Referto Steps 1 through 11 under“Using the Tire Sealant andCompressor Kit without Sealantto Inflate a Tire (NotPunctured).”

If the tire pressure has fallenmore than 68 kPa (10 psi)below the recommendedinflation pressure, stop drivingthe vehicle. The tire is tooseverely damaged and the tiresealant cannot seal the tire.See Roadside AssistanceProgram (U.S. and Canada) onpage 13‑8 or RoadsideAssistance Program (Mexico)on page 13‑10.

If the tire pressure has notdropped more than 68 kPa(10 psi) from the recommendedinflation pressure, use thecompressor kit to inflate the tireto the recommended inflationpressure.


10-72 Vehicle Care

20. Wipe off any sealant from thewheel, tire, and vehicle.

21. Dispose of the used sealantcanister and sealant/airhose (F) assembly at a localdealer or in accordance withlocal state codes and practices.

22. Replace it with a new canisteravailable from your dealer.

23. After temporarily sealing a tireusing the tire sealant andcompressor kit, take thevehicle to an authorized dealerwithin 161 km (100 mi) ofdriving to have the tire repairedor replaced.

Using the Tire Sealant andCompressor Kit withoutSealant to Inflate a Tire(Not Punctured)

To use the air compressor to inflatea tire with air only and not sealant:

If a tire goes flat, avoid further tireand wheel damage by driving slowlyto a level place. Turn on the hazardwarning flashers. See HazardWarning Flashers on page 6‑4.

See If a Tire Goes Flat onpage 10‑65 for other importantsafety warnings.

1. Remove the tire sealant andcompressor kit from its storagelocation. See Storing the TireSealant and Compressor Kit onpage 10‑74.

2. Unwrap the air only hose (E)and the power plug (G).

3. Place the kit on the ground.

Make sure the tire valve stem ispositioned close to the groundso the hose will reach it.

4. Remove the tire valve stem capfrom the flat tire by turning itcounterclockwise.

5. Attach the air only hose (E) ontothe tire valve stem by turning itclockwise until it is tight.


Vehicle Care 10-73

6. Plug the power plug (G) into theaccessory power outlet in thevehicle. Unplug all items fromother accessory power outlets.See Power Outlets on page 5‑7.

If the vehicle has an accessorypower outlet, do not use thecigarette lighter.

If the vehicle only has a cigarettelighter, use the cigarette lighter.

Do not pinch the power plugcord in the door or window.

7. Start the vehicle. The vehiclemust be running while using theair compressor.

8. Turn the selector switch (B)counterclockwise to the Air Onlyposition.

9. Press the on/off (A) button toturn the compressor on.

The compressor will inflate thetire with air only.

10. Inflate the tire to therecommended inflationpressure using the pressuregauge (D). The recommendedinflation pressure can be foundon the Tire and LoadingInformation label. See TirePressure on page 10‑51.

The pressure gauge (D) mayread higher than the actual tirepressure while the compressoris on. Turn the compressor offto get an accurate reading. Thecompressor may be turned on/off until the correct pressure isreached. If the tire is inflatedhigher than the recommendedpressure, press the pressurerelief button (C), if equipped,until the proper pressurereading is reached. This optionis only functional when usingthe air only hose (E).

11. Press the on/off button (A) toturn the tire sealant andcompressor kit off.

Be careful while handling thetire sealant and compressor kitas it could be warm afterusage.

12. Unplug the power plug (G) fromthe accessory power outlet inthe vehicle.

13. Disconnect the air onlyhose (E) from the tirevalve stem, by turning itcounterclockwise, and replacethe tire valve stem cap.

14. Return the air only hose (E)and the power plug (G) back totheir original locations.

15. Return the equipment to itsoriginal storage location in thevehicle.


10-74 Vehicle Care

Removal and Installation of theSealant Canister

To remove the sealant canister:

1. Remove the plastic cover.

2. Unscrew the connector (B) fromthe canister (A).

3. Pull up on the canister (A) toremove it.

4. Replace with a new canisterwhich is available from yourdealer.

5. Push the new canister intoplace.

6. Screw the connector (B) to thecanister (A).

7. Slide the plastic cover back on.

Storing the Tire Sealantand Compressor KitThe tire sealant and compressor kitis located in the trunk.

1. Open the trunk. See Trunk onpage 2‑9.

2. Lift the cover.

3. Turn the retainer clockwise andremove the tire sealant andcompressor kit.

To store the tire sealant andcompressor kit, reverse the steps.


Vehicle Care 10-75

Tire Changing

Removing the Spare Tire andTools

The equipment you will need is inthe trunk.


2. Remove the spare tire cover.

3. Turn the wing nutcounterclockwise and remove it.Then remove the compact sparetire. See Compact Spare Tire onpage 10‑83 for more information.

4. Remove the wing nut holding thejack in place.

5. Remove the jack and wheelwrench from the trunk.

Tire Changing Tools

The tools you will be using includethe wheel wrench (A) and jack (B).

1. Turn the wing nutcounterclockwise to loosenwheel wrench.

2. Unhook the wheel wrench fromthe jack.


10-76 Vehicle Care

3. Extend the handle on the wheelwrench by pressing the buttonand pulling on the end of thewrench. You must do this beforeusing the wheel wrench.

Removing the Flat Tire andInstalling the Spare Tire

1. Do a safety check beforeproceeding. See If a Tire GoesFlat on page 10‑65.

2. If the vehicle has a wheel coveror hubcap that has plastic wheelnut caps, loosen the plastic nutcaps. You might need to use thewheel wrench to loosen them.Do not pry off wheel covers orcenter caps that have plasticwheel nut caps.

3. Remove the wheel cover orcenter cap from the wheel tolocate the wheel nuts.

If the vehicle has a wheel coveror hubcap without plastic wheelnut caps, gently pry on the edgeof the plastic wheel trim toremove it from the wheel tolocate the wheel nuts.

4. Use the wrench to loosen all thewheel nuts. Do not removethem yet.


Vehicle Care 10-77

5. Position the lift head at the jacklocation nearest the flat tire.Make sure all of the jack lifthead is touching the jackingflange under the body. Do notplace the jack under a bodypanel.

6. Put the compact spare tire nearthe flat tire.

{ WARNING

Getting under a vehicle when it isjacked up is dangerous. If thevehicle slips off the jack, youcould be badly injured or killed.Never get under a vehicle when itis supported only by a jack.

{ WARNING

Raising the vehicle with the jackimproperly positioned candamage the vehicle and evenmake the vehicle fall. To helpavoid personal injury and vehicledamage, be sure to fit the jack lifthead into the proper locationbefore raising the vehicle.

7. Raise the vehicle by turning thewrench clockwise. Raise thevehicle far enough off theground so there is enough roomfor the compact spare tire to fit.


10-78 Vehicle Care

8. Remove all of the wheel nuts.

9. Remove the flat tire.

{ WARNING

Rust or dirt on a wheel, or on theparts to which it is fastened, canmake wheel nuts become looseafter time. The wheel could comeoff and cause an accident. Whenchanging a wheel, remove anyrust or dirt from places where thewheel attaches to the vehicle. In

(Continued)

WARNING (Continued)

an emergency, use a cloth or apaper towel to do this; but be sureto use a scraper or wire brushlater, if needed, to get all the rustor dirt off. See If a Tire Goes Flaton page 10‑65.

10. Remove any rust or dirt fromthe wheel bolts, mountingsurfaces and spare wheel.

11. Install the compact spare tire.

{ WARNING

Never use oil or grease on boltsor nuts because the nuts mightcome loose. The vehicle's wheelcould fall off, causing a crash.

12. Put the wheel nuts back onwith the rounded end towardthe wheel. Tighten each nut byhand or with the wrench untilthe wheel is held againstthe hub.


Vehicle Care 10-79

13. Lower the vehicle by turningthe wrench counterclockwise.Lower the jack completely.

{ WARNING

Wheel nuts that are improperly orincorrectly tightened can causethe wheels to become loose orcome off. The wheel nuts shouldbe tightened with a torque wrenchto the proper torque specificationafter replacing. Follow the torquespecification supplied by the

(Continued)

WARNING (Continued)

aftermarket manufacturer whenusing accessory locking wheelnuts. See Capacities andSpecifications on page 12‑2 fororiginal equipment wheel nuttorque specifications.

Notice: Improperly tightenedwheel nuts can lead to brakepulsation and rotor damage. Toavoid expensive brake repairs,evenly tighten the wheel nuts inthe proper sequence and to theproper torque specification. SeeCapacities and Specifications onpage 12‑2 for the wheel nuttorque specification.

14. Tighten the wheel nuts firmly ina crisscross sequence, asshown, with the wheel wrench.

Notice: Wheel covers will not fiton the vehicle's compact spare.If you try to put a wheel cover onthe compact spare, the cover orthe spare could be damaged.

Do not try to put a wheel cover onyour compact spare tire. It will notfit. Store the wheel cover and wheelnut caps in the trunk until you havethe flat tire repaired or replaced.


10-80 Vehicle Care

Storing a Flat Tire and Tools

{ WARNING

Storing a jack, a tire, or otherequipment in the passengercompartment of the vehicle couldcause injury. In a sudden stop orcollision, loose equipment couldstrike someone. Store all these inthe proper place.

To store the flat tire and jack in thecompact spare tire compartment:


2. Remove the bolt extension (inthe yellow sleeve) from the jackand remove the center cap fromthe wheel.

3. Collapse the wrench using thesame button used to extend it.

4. Attach the wrench to the jack byplacing the tab on the wrenchinto the hole on the side of thejack. Then place the wrenchhandle over the tab on the sideof the jack.

5. Raise the jack to the heightshown and lock the wrench ontothe jack.


Vehicle Care 10-81

6. Place the jack over the bolt (A)on the floor, making sure itcontacts the bolt. Thread thejack retainer nut until it contactsthe jack.

7. With the valve stem up, placethe tire on the compartment floorwith the rear of the tire under thetrim panel. The tire may not laycompletely flat.

8. Line up the bolt with the wheelcenter.

9. With the yellow cap in place toprevent the wheel from beingscratched, screw the boltextension onto the bolt throughthe wheel center hole.

10. Remove the yellow cap fromthe bolt extension.

11. Secure the tire and wheel withthe larger wing nut.

A. Cover

B. Wing Nut

C. Extension

D. Flat Tire (valve stem up)

E. Nut

F. Jack

G. Bolt

The compact spare is for temporaryuse only. Replace the compactspare tire with a full-size tire assoon as you can. See CompactSpare Tire on page 10‑83.


10-82 Vehicle Care

Storing the Spare Tire andTools

{ WARNING

Storing a jack, a tire, or otherequipment in the passengercompartment of the vehicle couldcause injury. In a sudden stop orcollision, loose equipment couldstrike someone. Store all these inthe proper place.


2. Collapse the wrench using thesame button used to extend it.

3. Attach the wrench to the jack byplacing the tab on the wrenchinto the hole on the side of thejack. Then place the wrenchhandle over the tab on the sideof the jack.

4. Raise the jack to the heightshown and lock the wrench ontothe jack.

5. Place the jack in the spare tirewell. Make sure the stow boltgoes through the hole in thecenter of the wrench on the jack,with the base of the jack towardsthe front of the vehicle. Turn thejack retainer nut until it firmlycontacts the wrench. Do notover tighten.


Vehicle Care 10-83

6. Place the compact spare into thetire compartment with the stowbolt going through the centerhole of the wheel.

7. Turn the spare tire retainer nutuntil it firmly contacts the wheel.Do not over tighten.

Compact Spare Tire

{ WARNING

Driving with more than onecompact spare tire at a time couldresult in loss of braking andhandling. This could lead to acrash and you or others could beinjured. Use only one compactspare tire at a time.

If this vehicle has a compact sparetire it was fully inflated when thevehicle was new, however, it canlose air after a time. Check theinflation pressure regularly. It shouldbe 60 psi (420 kPa).

After installing the compact spareon the vehicle, stop as soon aspossible and make sure the sparetire is correctly inflated. Thecompact spare is made to performwell at speeds up to 65 mph(105 km/h) for distances up to3,000 miles (5 000 km), so you canfinish your trip and have the full-sizetire repaired or replaced at yourconvenience. Of course, it is best toreplace the spare with a full-size tireas soon as possible. The spare tirewill last longer and be in goodshape in case it is needed again.

Notice: When the compact spareis installed, do not take thevehicle through an automatic carwash with guide rails. Thecompact spare can get caught onthe rails which can damage thetire, wheel and other parts of thevehicle.

Do not use the compact spare onother vehicles.

Do not mix the compact spare tire orwheel with other wheels or tires.They will not fit. Keep the spare tireand its wheel together.

Notice: Tire chains will not fit thecompact spare. Using them candamage the vehicle and candamage the chains too. Do notuse tire chains on the compactspare.


10-84 Vehicle Care

Jump StartingFor more information about thevehicle battery, see Battery onpage 10‑26.

If the battery has run down, youmay want to use another vehicleand some jumper cables to startyour vehicle. Be sure to use thefollowing steps to do it safely.

{ WARNING

Batteries can hurt you. They canbe dangerous because:

. They contain acid that canburn you.

. They contain gas that canexplode or ignite.

. They contain enoughelectricity to burn you.

If you do not follow these stepsexactly, some or all of thesethings can hurt you.

Notice: Ignoring these stepscould result in costly damage tothe vehicle that would not becovered by the warranty.

Trying to start the vehicle bypushing or pulling it will notwork, and it could damage thevehicle.

1. Check the other vehicle. It musthave a 12-volt battery with anegative ground system.

Notice: Only use a vehicle thathas a 12-volt system with anegative ground for jumpstarting. If the other vehicle doesnot have a 12-volt system with anegative ground, both vehiclescan be damaged.

2. Get the vehicles close enoughso the jumper cables can reach,but be sure the vehicles arenot touching each other. If theyare, it could cause a groundconnection you do not want. Youwould not be able to start your

vehicle, and the bad groundingcould damage the electricalsystems.

To avoid the possibility of thevehicles rolling, set the parkingbrake firmly on both vehiclesinvolved in the jump startprocedure. Put an automatictransmission in P (Park) or amanual transmission inN (Neutral) before setting theparking brake.

Notice: If the radio or otheraccessories are left on during thejump starting procedure, theycould be damaged. The repairswould not be covered by thewarranty. Always turn off theradio and other accessories whenjump starting the vehicle.

3. Turn off the ignition on bothvehicles. Unplug unnecessaryaccessories plugged into thecigarette lighter or the accessorypower outlet. Turn off the radioand all lamps that are not


Vehicle Care 10-85

needed. This will avoid sparksand help save both batteries.And it could save the radio!

4. Open the hoods and locate thebatteries. Find the positive (+)and negative (−) terminallocations on each vehicle. Yourvehicle's positive (+) terminaland negative (–) terminal arelocated under a black cover onthe battery. See EngineCompartment Overview onpage 10‑6 for more informationon location. Remove the coverto access the positive (+) andnegative (–) terminals.

{ WARNING

An electric fan can start up evenwhen the engine is not runningand can injure you. Keep hands,clothing and tools away from anyunderhood electric fan.

{ WARNING

Using a match near a battery cancause battery gas to explode.People have been hurt doing this,and some have been blinded.Use a flashlight if you need morelight.

Be sure the battery has enoughwater. You do not need to addwater to the battery installed inyour new vehicle. But if a batteryhas filler caps, be sure the rightamount of fluid is there. If it is low,add water to take care of thatfirst. If you don't, explosive gascould be present.

Battery fluid contains acid thatcan burn you. Do not get it onyou. If you accidentally get it inyour eyes or on your skin, flushthe place with water and getmedical help immediately.

{ WARNING

Fans or other moving engineparts can injure you badly. Keepyour hands away from movingparts once the engine is running.

5. Check that the jumper cables donot have loose or missinginsulation. If they do, you couldget a shock. The vehicles couldbe damaged too.

Before you connect the cables,here are some things you shouldknow. Positive (+) will go topositive (+) or to a remotepositive (+) terminal if the vehiclehas one. Negative (−) will go to aheavy, unpainted metal enginepart or to a remote negative (−)terminal if the vehicle has one.


10-86 Vehicle Care

Do not connect positive (+) tonegative (−) or you will get ashort that would damage thebattery and maybe other partstoo. And do not connect thenegative (−) cable to thenegative (−) terminal on the deadbattery because this can causesparks.

6. Connect the red positive (+)cable to the positive (+) terminalof the dead battery. Use aremote positive (+) terminal if thevehicle has one.

7. Do not let the other end touchmetal. Connect it to thepositive (+) terminal of thegood battery. Use a remotepositive (+) terminal if the vehiclehas one.

8. Now connect the blacknegative (−) cable to thenegative (−) terminal of the goodbattery. Use a remotenegative (−) terminal if thevehicle has one.

Do not let the other end touchanything until the next step. Theother end of the negative (−)cable does not go to the deadbattery. It goes to a heavy,unpainted metal engine part orto a remote negative (−) terminalon the vehicle with the deadbattery.

9. Connect the other end of thenegative (−) cable at least18 inches (45 cm) away from thedead battery, but not nearengine parts that move. Theelectrical connection is just asgood there, and the chance ofsparks getting back to thebattery is much less.

10. Now start the vehicle with thegood battery and run theengine for a while.

11. Try to start the vehicle that hadthe dead battery. If it will notstart after a few tries, itprobably needs service.


Vehicle Care 10-87

Notice: If the jumper cables areconnected or removed in thewrong order, electrical shortingmay occur and damage thevehicle. The repairs would not becovered by the vehicle warranty.Always connect and remove thejumper cables in the correctorder, making sure that thecables do not touch each other orother metal.

Jumper Cable Removal

A. Heavy, Unpainted Metal EnginePart or Remote Negative (–)Terminal

B. Good Battery or RemotePositive (+) and RemoteNegative (–) Terminals

C. Dead Battery or RemotePositive (+) Terminal

To disconnect the jumper cablesfrom both vehicles, do the following:

1. Disconnect the blacknegative (−) cable from thevehicle that had the deadbattery.

2. Disconnect the blacknegative (−) cable from thevehicle with the good battery.

3. Disconnect the red positive (+)cable from the vehicle with thegood battery.

4. Disconnect the red positive (+)cable from the other vehicle.

5. Return the caps over thepositive (+) and negative (−)terminals to their originalpositions.


10-88 Vehicle Care

Towing

Towing the VehicleNotice: To avoid damage, thedisabled vehicle should be towedwith all four wheels off theground. Care must be taken withvehicles that have low groundclearance and/or specialequipment. Always flatbed on acar carrier.

Consult your dealer or aprofessional towing service if thedisabled vehicle must be towed.See Roadside Assistance Program(U.S. and Canada) on page 13‑8 orRoadside Assistance Program(Mexico) on page 13‑10.

To tow the vehicle behind anothervehicle for recreational purposes,such as behind a motor home, see“Recreational Vehicle Towing” in thissection.

Recreational VehicleTowingRecreational vehicle towing meanstowing the vehicle behind anothervehicle – such as behind a motorhome. The two most common typesof recreational vehicle towing areknown as dinghy towing and dollytowing. Dinghy towing is towing thevehicle with all four wheels on theground. Dolly towing is towing thevehicle with two wheels on theground and two wheels up on adevice known as a dolly.

Here are some important things toconsider before recreational vehicletowing:. What's the towing capacity of the

towing vehicle? Be sure to readthe tow vehicle manufacturer'srecommendations.

. How far will the vehicle betowed? Some vehicles haverestrictions on how far and howlong they can tow.

. Does the vehicle have theproper towing equipment? Seeyour dealer or traileringprofessional for additionaladvice and equipmentrecommendations.

. Is the vehicle ready to betowed? Just as preparing thevehicle for a long trip, make surethe vehicle is prepared to betowed.


Vehicle Care 10-89

Dinghy Towing

When dinghy towing, the vehicleshould be run at the beginning ofeach day and at each RV fuel stopfor about five minutes. This willensure proper lubrication oftransmission components.

To dinghy tow the vehicle from thefront with all four wheels on theground:

1. Position the vehicle to tow andthen secure it to the towingvehicle.

2. Shift the transmission to P (Park)and turn the ignition toLOCK/OFF.


4. To prevent the battery fromdraining while the vehicle isbeing towed, remove thefollowing fuse from theinstrument panel fuse block:(IGN SENSOR). See InstrumentPanel Fuse Block on page 10‑38for more information.

5. Turn the ignition to ACC/ACCESSORY.

6. Shift the transmission toN (Neutral).


Remember to reinstall the IGNSENSOR fuse once the destinationhas been reached.

Notice: If 105 km/h (65mph) isexceeded while towing thevehicle, it could be damaged.Never exceed 105 km/h (65mph)while towing the vehicle.

Notice: Towing the vehicle fromthe rear could damage it. Also,repairs would not be covered bythe vehicle warranty. Never havethe vehicle towed from the rear.


10-90 Vehicle Care

Dolly Towing

Tow the vehicle with the two rearwheels on the ground and the frontwheels on a dolly:

To tow the vehicle with two wheelson the ground and a dolly:

1. Put the front wheels on a dolly.

2. Put the gear shift lever inP (Park).


4. Remove the key from theignition.

5. Secure the vehicle to the dolly.


Notice: Towing the vehicle fromthe rear could damage it. Also,repairs would not be covered bythe vehicle warranty. Never havethe vehicle towed from the rear.

Appearance Care

Exterior Care

Cleaning Exterior Lamps/Lenses

Use only lukewarm or cold water, asoft cloth, and a car washing soapto clean exterior lamps and lenses.Follow instructions under “Washingthe Vehicle” later in this section.

Finish Care

Occasional waxing or mild polishingof the vehicle by hand may benecessary to remove residue fromthe paint finish. Approved cleaningproducts can be obtained from yourdealer.

If the vehicle has a basecoat/clearcoat paint finish, the clearcoatgives more depth and gloss to thecolored basecoat. Always usewaxes and polishes that arenon-abrasive and made for abasecoat/clearcoat paint finish.


Vehicle Care 10-91

Notice: Machine compounding oraggressive polishing on abasecoat/clearcoat paint finishmay damage it. Use onlynon-abrasive waxes and polishesthat are made for a basecoat/clearcoat paint finish on thevehicle.

Foreign materials such as calciumchloride and other salts, ice meltingagents, road oil and tar, tree sap,bird droppings, chemicals fromindustrial chimneys, etc., candamage the vehicle's finish if theyremain on painted surfaces. Washthe vehicle as soon as possible.If necessary, use non-abrasivecleaners that are marked safe forpainted surfaces to remove foreignmatter.

Exterior painted surfaces aresubject to aging, weather, andchemical fallout that can take theirtoll over a period of years. To keepthe paint finish looking new, keepthe vehicle garaged or coveredwhenever possible.

Protecting Exterior Bright MetalParts

Bright metal parts should becleaned regularly to keep theirluster. Wash with water or usechrome polish on chrome orstainless steel trim, if necessary.

Use special care with aluminumtrim. To avoid damaging protectivetrim, never use auto or chromepolish, steam, or caustic soap toclean aluminum. A coating of wax,rubbed to high polish, isrecommended for all bright metalparts.

Washing the Vehicle

To preserve the vehicle's finish,keep it clean by washing it often.

Do not wash the vehicle in directsunlight and use a carwashing soap.

Notice: Do not use cleaningagents that are petroleum basedor that contain acid or abrasives,as they can damage the paint,metal, or plastic on the vehicle.

Approved cleaning products canbe obtained from your dealer.Follow all manufacturerdirections regarding correctproduct usage, necessary safetyprecautions, and appropriatedisposal of any vehicle careproduct. Certain cleaners containchemicals that can damage theemblems or nameplates on thevehicle. Check the cleaningproduct label. If it states that itshould not be used on plasticparts, do not use it on the vehicleor damage may occur and itwould not be covered by thewarranty.

Rinse the vehicle well, beforewashing and after, to remove allcleaning agents completely. If theyare allowed to dry on the surface,they could stain.

Dry the finish with a soft, cleanchamois or an all-cotton towel toavoid surface scratches and waterspotting.


10-92 Vehicle Care

High pressure car washes couldcause water to enter the vehicle.Avoid using high pressure washescloser than 30 cm (12 in) to thesurface of the vehicle. Use of powerwashers exceeding 8,274 kPa(1,200 psi) can result in damage orremoval of paint and decals.

Notice: Conveyor systems onsome automatic car washes coulddamage the vehicle. There maynot be enough clearance for theundercarriage. Check with the carwash manager before using theautomatic car wash.

Weatherstrips

Silicone grease on weatherstrips willmake them last longer, seal better,and not stick or squeak. Applysilicone grease with a clean cloth.During very cold, damp weatherfrequent application may berequired. See Recommended Fluidsand Lubricants on page 11‑6.

Wheels and Trim—Aluminumor Chrome

The vehicle may have eitheraluminum or chrome-plated wheels.

Keep the wheels clean using a soft,clean cloth with mild soap andwater. Rinse with clean water. Afterrinsing thoroughly, dry with a soft,clean towel. A wax may then beapplied.

Notice: Chrome wheels and otherchrome trim may be damaged ifthe vehicle is not washed afterdriving on roads that have beensprayed with magnesium, calciumor sodium chloride. Thesechlorides are used on roads forconditions such as ice and dust.Always wash the chrome withsoap and water after exposure.

Notice: Do not use strong soaps,chemicals, abrasive polishes,cleaners, brushes, or cleanersthat contain acid on aluminum orchrome-plated wheels, becausethe surface could be damaged.The repairs would not be covered

by the vehicle warranty. Use onlyapproved cleaners on aluminumor chrome-plated wheels.

Notice: Never drive a vehicle thathas aluminum or chrome-platedwheels through an automatic carwash that uses silicone carbidetire cleaning brushes, as thiscould cause damage. The repairswould not be covered by thevehicle warranty.

Notice: Driving the vehiclethrough an automatic car washthat has silicone carbide tirecleaning brushes, could damagethe aluminum or chrome-platedwheels. The repairs would not becovered by the vehicle warranty.Never drive a vehicle that hasaluminum or chrome-platedwheels through an automatic carwash that uses silicone carbidetire cleaning brushes.


Vehicle Care 10-93

Windshield and Wiper Blades

Clean the outside of the windshieldwith glass cleaner.

Clean the rubber blades using alint‐free cloth or paper towel soakedwith windshield washer fluid or amild detergent. Wash the windshieldthoroughly when cleaning theblades. Bugs, road grime, sap, anda buildup of vehicle wash/waxtreatments may cause wiperstreaking. Replace the wiper bladesif they are worn or damaged.

Wipers can be damaged by:. Extreme dusty conditions. Sand and salt. Heat and sun. Snow and ice, without proper

removal

Tires

Use a stiff brush with tire cleaner toclean the tires.

Notice: Using petroleum-basedtire dressing products on thevehicle may damage the paintfinish and/or tires. When applyinga tire dressing, always wipe offany overspray from all paintedsurfaces on the vehicle.

Sheet Metal Damage

If the vehicle is damaged andrequires sheet metal repair orreplacement, make sure the bodyrepair shop applies anti-corrosionmaterial to parts repaired orreplaced to restore corrosionprotection.

Original manufacturer replacementparts will provide the corrosionprotection while maintaining thevehicle warranty.

Finish Damage

Any stone chips, fractures, or deepscratches in the finish should berepaired right away. Bare metal willcorrode quickly and may developinto major repair expense.

Minor chips and scratches can berepaired with touch-up materialsavailable from your dealer. Largerareas of finish damage can becorrected in your dealer's body andpaint shop.

Underbody Maintenance

Chemicals used for ice and snowremoval and dust control can collecton the underbody. If these are notremoved, corrosion and rust candevelop on the underbody partssuch as fuel lines, frame, floor pan,and exhaust system even thoughthey have corrosion protection.


10-94 Vehicle Care

At least every spring, flush thesematerials from the underbody withplain water. Clean any areas wheremud and debris can collect. Dirtpacked in close areas of the frameshould be loosened before beingflushed. Your dealer or anunderbody car washing system cando this.

Chemical Paint Spotting

Some weather and atmosphericconditions can create a chemicalfallout. Airborne pollutants can fallupon and attack painted surfaces onthe vehicle. This damage can taketwo forms: blotchy, ring-shapeddiscolorations, and small, irregulardark spots etched into the paintsurface.

Interior CareThe interior will continue to look itsbest if it is cleaned often. Dust anddirt can accumulate on theupholstery and cause damage tothe carpet, fabric, leather, andplastic surfaces. Stains should beremoved quickly as extreme heatcould cause them to set rapidly.

Lighter colored interiors mayrequire more frequent cleaning.Newspapers and garments that cantransfer color to home furnishingscan also transfer color to theinterior.

Remove dust from small buttonsand knobs with a small brush withsoft bristles.

Your dealer has products forcleaning the interior. When cleaningthe interior, only use cleanersspecifically designed for thesurfaces that are being cleaned.

Permanent damage can result fromusing cleaners on surfaces forwhich they were not intended. Applythe cleaner directly to the cleaningcloth to prevent over-spray. Removeany accidental over-spray fromother surfaces immediately.

Notice: Using abrasive cleanerswhen cleaning glass surfaces onthe vehicle, could scratch theglass and/or cause damage to therear window defogger. Whencleaning the glass on the vehicle,use only a soft cloth and glasscleaner.

Cleaners can contain solvents thatcan become concentrated in theinterior. Before using cleaners, readand adhere to all safety instructionson the label. While cleaning theinterior, maintain adequateventilation by opening the doors andwindows.


Vehicle Care 10-95

Do not clean the interior using thefollowing cleaners or techniques:. Never use a knife or any other

sharp object to remove a soilfrom any interior surface.

. Never use a stiff brush. It cancause damage.

. Never apply heavy pressure orrub aggressively with a cleaningcloth. Use of heavy pressure candamage the interior and doesnot improve the effectiveness ofsoil removal.

. Avoid laundry detergents ordishwashing soaps withdegreasers. Using too muchsoap will leave a residue thatleaves streaks and attracts dirt.For liquid cleaners, about20 drops per 3.78 L (1 gal) ofwater is a good guide. Use onlymild, neutral-pH soaps.

. Do not heavily saturate theupholstery while cleaning.

. Cleaners that contain solventscan damage the interior.

Fabric/Carpet

Use a vacuum cleaner with a softbrush attachment to remove dustand loose dirt. A canister vacuumwith rotating brushes in the nozzlemay only be used on floor carpetand carpeted floor mats. For soils,always try to remove them first withplain water or club soda. Beforecleaning, gently remove as much ofthe soil as possible using one of thefollowing techniques:. For liquids: gently blot the

remaining soil with a papertowel. Allow the soil to absorbinto the paper towel until nomore can be removed.

. For solid dry soils: remove asmuch as possible and thenvacuum.

To clean:

1. Saturate a lint-free, clean whitecloth with water or club soda.

2. Remove excess moisture.

3. Start on the outside edge of thesoil and gently rub toward thecenter. Continue cleaning, usinga clean area of the cloth eachtime it becomes soiled.

4. Continue to gently rub thesoiled area.

5. If the soil is not completelyremoved, use a mild soapsolution and repeat the cleaningprocess with plain water.

If any of the soil remains, acommercial fabric cleaner or spotlifter may be necessary. Test a smallhidden area for colorfastness beforeusing a commercial upholsterycleaner or spot lifter. If the locallycleaned area gives any impressionthat a ring formation may result,clean the entire surface.

A paper towel can be used to blotexcess moisture from the fabric orcarpet after the cleaning process.


10-96 Vehicle Care

Leather

Leather, and lighter colored leatherin particular, will need more frequentcleaning to prevent the buildup ofdust, dirt, and colors transferredfrom other items so that these donot become permanent stains.

To remove dust, a soft clothdampened with water can be used.If a more thorough cleaning isnecessary, a soft cloth dampenedwith a mild soap solution can beused. Your dealer has a GMapproved leather cleaner availablethat provides superior cleaningperformance when used regularlyon finished automotive leathers.Allow the leather to dry naturally. Donot use heat, steam, spot lifters orspot removers, or shoe polish onleather. Many commercial leathercleaners and coatings that are soldto preserve and protect leather maypermanently change theappearance and feel of the leatherand are not recommended. Do notuse silicone or wax-based products,or those containing organic solvents

to clean the interior because theycan alter the appearance byincreasing the gloss in anon-uniform manner.

Instrument Panel, Vinyl, andOther Plastic Surfaces

To remove dust, a soft clothdampened with water can be used.If a more thorough cleaning isnecessary, a clean soft clothdampened with a mild soap solutioncan be used to gently remove dustand dirt. Never use spot lifters orremovers on plastic surfaces. Manycommercial cleaners and coatingsthat are sold to preserve and protectsoft plastic surfaces maypermanently change theappearance and feel of the interiorand are not recommended. Do notuse silicone or wax-based products,or those containing organic solventsto clean the interior because theycan alter the appearance byincreasing the gloss in anon-uniform manner.

Some commercial products mayincrease gloss on the instrumentpanel. The increase in gloss maycause annoying reflections in thewindshield and even make it difficultto see through the windshield undercertain conditions.

Notice: Air fresheners containsolvents that may cause damageto plastics and painted surfaces.Follow the manufacturer’sinstructions when using airfresheners in the vehicle. If airfreshener comes in contact withpaint or a plastic surface, blotimmediately with a soft cloth.Damage caused by using airfresheners would not be coveredby the vehicle warranty.


Vehicle Care 10-97

Care of Safety Belts

Keep belts clean and dry.

{ WARNING

Do not bleach or dye safety belts.It may severely weaken them. Ina crash, they might not be able toprovide adequate protection.Clean safety belts only with mildsoap and lukewarm water.

Floor Mats

{ WARNING

If a floor mat is the wrong size oris not properly installed, it caninterfere with the acceleratorpedal and/or brake pedal.Interference with the pedals cancause unintended accelerationand/or increased stoppingdistance which can cause a crashand injury. Make sure the floormat does not interfere with theaccelerator or brake pedal.

Use the following guidelines forproper floor mat usage.. The original equipment floor

mats were designed for yourvehicle. If the floor mats needreplacing, it is recommendedthat GM certified floor mats bepurchased. Non-GM floor matsmay not fit properly and mayinterfere with the accelerator orbrake pedal. Always check thatthe floor mats do not interferewith the pedals.

. Use the floor mat with thecorrect side up. Do not turnit over.

. Do not place anything on top ofthe driver side floor mat.

. Use only a single floor mat onthe driver side.

. Do not place one floor mat ontop of another.


10-98 Vehicle Care

The driver side floor mat is held inplace by two hooks.

Removing and Replacing theFloor Mat

1. Pull up on the rear of the mat toremove it from the hooks.

2. Reinstall the floor mat by liningup the openings in the floor matover the hooks and push it downinto position.

3. Make sure the floor mat isproperly secured and verify thatit does not interfere with theaccelerator or brake pedals.


Service and Maintenance 11-1

Service andMaintenance

General InformationGeneral Information . . . . . . . . . . 11-1

Scheduled MaintenanceScheduled Maintenance . . . . . 11-2

Recommended Fluids,Lubricants, and PartsRecommended Fluids andLubricants . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-6

Maintenance ReplacementParts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-7

Maintenance RecordsMaintenance Records . . . . . . . . 11-8

General InformationNotice: Maintenance intervals,checks, inspections,recommended fluids, andlubricants are necessary to keepthis vehicle in good workingcondition. Damage caused byfailure to follow scheduledmaintenance might not becovered by the vehicle warranty.

As the vehicle owner, you areresponsible for the scheduledmaintenance in this section. Werecommend having your dealerperform these services. Propervehicle maintenance helps to keepthe vehicle in good workingcondition, improves fuel economy,and reduces vehicle emissions forbetter air quality.

Because of all the different wayspeople use vehicles, maintenanceneeds vary. The vehicle might needmore frequent checks and services.Please read the information underScheduled Maintenance. To keepthe vehicle in good condition, seeyour dealer.

The maintenance schedule is forvehicles that:. Carry passengers and cargo

within recommended limits onthe Tire and Loading Informationlabel. See Vehicle Load Limitson page 9‑12.

. Are driven on reasonable roadsurfaces within legal drivinglimits.

. Use the recommended fuel. SeeRecommended Fuel onpage 9‑35.


11-2 Service and Maintenance

{ WARNING

Performing maintenance work canbe dangerous. Some jobs cancause serious injury. Performmaintenance work only if youhave the required know-how andthe proper tools and equipment.If in doubt, see your dealer tohave a qualified technician do thework. See Doing Your OwnService Work on page 10‑4.

At your dealer, you can be certainthat you will receive the highestlevel of service available. Yourdealer has specially trained servicetechnicians, uses genuinereplacement parts, as well as,up‐to‐date tools and equipment toensure fast and accuratediagnostics.

The proper replacement parts,fluids, and lubricants to use arelisted in Recommended Fluids andLubricants on page 11‑6 andMaintenance Replacement Parts onpage 11‑7. We recommend the useof genuine parts from your dealer.

Rotation of New Tires

To maintain ride, handling, andperformance of the vehicle, it isimportant that the first rotationservice for new tires be performed.Tires should be rotated every12 000 km/7,500 miles. See TireRotation on page 10‑57.

ScheduledMaintenanceWhen the Change Oil SoonMessage Displays

Change engine oil and filter. SeeEngine Oil on page 10‑9. AnEmission Control Service.

When the CHANGE OIL SOONmessage displays, service isrequired for the vehicle as soon aspossible, within the next 1 000 km/600 miles. If driving under the bestconditions, the engine oil life systemmight not indicate the need forvehicle service for more than a year.The engine oil and filter must bechanged at least once a year andthe oil life system must be reset.



Your dealer has trained servicetechnicians who will perform thiswork and reset the system. If theengine oil life system is resetaccidentally, service the vehiclewithin 5 000 km/3,000 miles sincethe last service. Reset the oil lifesystem whenever the oil is changed.See Engine Oil Life System onpage 10‑13.

Every Engine Oil Change. Change engine oil and filter.

Reset oil life system. SeeEngine Oil on page 10‑9 andEngine Oil Life System onpage 10‑13. An EmissionControl Service.

. Engine coolant level check. SeeEngine Coolant on page 10‑16.

. Engine cooling systeminspection. Visual inspection ofhoses, pipes, fittings, andclamps and replacement,if needed.

. Windshield washer fluid levelcheck. See Washer Fluid onpage 10‑23.

. Windshield wiper bladeinspection for wear, cracking,or contamination and windshieldand wiper blade cleaning,if contaminated. See ExteriorCare on page 10‑90. Worn ordamaged wiper bladereplacement. See Wiper BladeReplacement on page 10‑29.

. Tire inflation pressures check.See Tire Pressure onpage 10‑51.

. Tire wear inspection. See TireInspection on page 10‑57.

. Rotate tires if necessary. SeeTire Rotation on page 10‑57.

. Fluids visual leak check (orevery 12 months, whicheveroccurs first). A leak in anysystem must be repaired and thefluid level checked.

. Engine air cleaner filterinspection. See Engine AirCleaner/Filter on page 10‑14.

. Brake system inspection (orevery 12 months, whicheveroccurs first).

. Steering and suspensioninspection. Visual inspection fordamaged, loose, or missingparts or signs of wear.



. Body hinges and latches, keylock cylinders, folding seathardware, and rear compartmenthinges lubrication. SeeRecommended Fluids andLubricants on page 11‑6. Morefrequent lubrication may berequired when the vehicle isexposed to a corrosiveenvironment. Applying siliconegrease on weatherstrips with aclean cloth makes them lastlonger, seal better, and not stickor squeak.

. Restraint system componentcheck. See Safety SystemCheck on page 3‑24.

. Fuel system inspection fordamage or leaks.

. Exhaust system and nearby heatshields inspection for loose ordamaged components.

Additional Required Services

Every 12 000 km/7,500Miles. Rotate tires. Tires should be

rotated every 12 000 km/7,500 miles. See Tire Rotationon page 10‑57.

At Each Fuel Stop. Engine oil level check. See

Engine Oil on page 10‑9.. Engine coolant level check. See

Engine Coolant on page 10‑16.. Windshield washer fluid level

check. See Washer Fluid onpage 10‑23.

Once a Month. Tire inflation check. See Tire

Pressure on page 10‑51.. Tire wear inspection. See Tire

Inspection on page 10‑57.. Sunroof track and seal

inspection, if equipped. SeeSunroof on page 2‑18.

Once a Year. See Starter Switch Check on

page 10‑27.. See Automatic Transmission

Shift Lock Control FunctionCheck on page 10‑27.

. See Ignition Transmission LockCheck on page 10‑28.

. See Park Brake and P (Park)Mechanism Check onpage 10‑28.

. Accelerator pedal check fordamage, high effort, or binding.Replace if needed.

. If the vehicle has a Tire Sealantand Compressor Kit, check thesealant expiration date printedon the instruction label of the kit.See Tire Sealant andCompressor Kit on page 10‑67.

. Underbody flushing service.



. Hood/Decklid/Liftgate/LiftglassSupport Gas Strut Service:Visually inspect gas strut,if equipped, for signs of wear,cracks, or other damage. Checkthe hold open ability of the gasstrut. Contact your dealer ifservice is required.

First Engine Oil Change AfterEvery 80 000 km/50,000Miles. Engine air cleaner filter

replacement. See Engine AirCleaner/Filter on page 10‑14.

. Automatic transmission fluidchange (severe service) forvehicles mainly driven in heavycity traffic in hot weather, in hillyor mountainous terrain, whenfrequently towing a trailer,or used for taxi, police,or delivery service. SeeAutomatic Transmission Fluid onpage 10‑14.

. Evaporative control systeminspection. Check all fuel andvapor lines and hoses for properhook‐up, routing, and condition.Check that the purge valve,if the vehicle has one, worksproperly. Replace as needed. AnEmission Control Service. TheU.S. Environmental ProtectionAgency or the California AirResources Board hasdetermined that the failure toperform this maintenance itemwill not nullify the emissionwarranty or limit recall liabilityprior to the completion of thevehicle's useful life. We,however, urge that allrecommended maintenanceservices be performed at theindicated intervals and themaintenance be recorded.

First Engine Oil Change AfterEvery 160 000 km/100,000Miles. Automatic transmission fluid

change (normal service). SeeAutomatic Transmission Fluid onpage 10‑14.

. Spark plug replacement andspark plug wires inspection. AnEmission Control Service.

First Engine Oil Change AfterEvery 240 000 km/150,000Miles. Engine cooling system drain,

flush, and refill (or every fiveyears, whichever occurs first).See Cooling System onpage 10‑16. An EmissionControl Service.

. Engine drive belts inspection forfraying, excessive cracks,or obvious damage (or every10 years, whichever occursfirst). Replace, if needed.



Recommended Fluids, Lubricants, and Parts

Recommended Fluids and Lubricants

Usage Fluid/Lubricant

Engine Oil

The engine requires engine oil approved to the dexos specification. Oilsmeeting this specification can be identified with the dexos certificationmark. Look for and use only an engine oil that displays the dexoscertification mark of the proper viscosity grade. See Engine Oil onpage 10‑9.

Engine Coolant50/50 mixture of clean, drinkable water and use only DEX-COOL Coolant.See Engine Coolant on page 10‑16.

Hydraulic Brake SystemDOT 3 Hydraulic Brake Fluid (GM Part No. 88862806, inCanada 88862807).

Windshield Washer Optikleen® Washer Solvent.

Hydraulic Power Steering System (ifequipped)

GM Power Steering Fluid (GM Part No. 89021184, in Canada 89021186).

Automatic Transmission DEXRON®-VI Automatic Transmission Fluid.

Key Lock CylindersMulti-Purpose Lubricant, Superlube (GM Part No. 12346241, inCanada 10953474).

Hood Latch Assembly, SecondaryLatch, Pivots, Spring Anchor, and

Release Pawl

Lubriplate Lubricant Aerosol (GM Part No. 12346293, in Canada 992723)or lubricant meeting requirements of NLGI #2, Category LB or GC-LB.



Usage Fluid/Lubricant

Hood and Door Hinges Multi-Purpose Lubricant, Superlube (GM Part No. 12346241, inCanada 10953474).

Weatherstrip ConditioningWeatherstrip Lubricant (GM Part No. 3634770, in Canada 10953518) orDielectric Silicone Grease (GM Part No. 12345579, in Canada 992887).

Maintenance Replacement PartsReplacement parts identified below by name, part number, or specification can be obtained from your dealer.

Part GM Part Number ACDelco Part Number

Engine Air Cleaner/Filter 22676970 A1627C

Engine Oil Filter

2.4L L4 Engine 12605566 PF457G

3.6L V6 Engine 89017524 PF48

Spark Plugs

2.4L L4 Engine 12625058 41-103

3.6L V6 Engine 12622561 41-109

Wiper Blades

Driver Side – 60.0 cm (23.6 in) 25800624 —

Passenger Side – 53.0 cm (21.0 in) 25800623 —



Maintenance RecordsAfter the scheduled services are performed, record the date, odometer reading, who performed the service, and thetype of services performed in the boxes provided. Retain all maintenance receipts.

Maintenance Record

DateOdometerReading

Serviced By Services Performed



Maintenance Record (cont.)

Date OdometerReading




Maintenance Record (cont.)

Date OdometerReading



Technical Data 12-1

Technical Data

Vehicle IdentificationVehicle IdentificationNumber (VIN) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-1

Service Parts IdentificationLabel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-1

Vehicle DataCapacities andSpecifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-2

Engine Drive Belt Routing . . . 12-4

Vehicle Identification

Vehicle IdentificationNumber (VIN)

This legal identifier is in the frontcorner of the instrument panel, onthe left side of the vehicle. It can beseen through the windshield fromoutside. The VIN also appears onthe Vehicle Certification and ServiceParts labels and certificates of titleand registration.

Engine Identification

The eighth character in the VIN isthe engine code. This codeidentifies the vehicle's engine,specifications, and replacementparts. See “Engine Specifications”under Capacities and Specificationson page 12‑2 for the vehicle'sengine code.

Service PartsIdentification LabelThis label, on the inside of the glovebox, has the following information:. Vehicle Identification

Number (VIN).. Model designation.. Paint information.. Production options and special

equipment.

Do not remove this label from thevehicle.


12-2 Technical Data

Vehicle Data

Capacities and Specifications

ApplicationCapacities

Metric English

Air Conditioning Refrigerant R134aFor the air conditioning system refrigerant chargeamount, see the refrigerant label located under the

hood. See your dealer for more information.

Engine Cooling System

2.4L L4 Engine 7.1 L 7.5 qt

3.6L V6 Engines 9.4 L 9.9 qt

Engine Oil with Filter

2.4L L4 Engine 4.7 L 5.0 qt

3.6L V6 Engine 5.2 L 5.5 qt

Fuel Tank 61.7 L 16.3 gal


Technical Data 12-3

ApplicationCapacities

Metric English

Transmission Fluid*

6 — Speed Automatic Transmission(RPO X23F) — (Drain and Refill)

5.0 L 5.3 qt

6 — Speed Automatic Transmission(RPO 6T70) — (Drain and Refill)

6.0 L 6.3 qt

Wheel Nut Torque 140Y 100 ft lb

*See Automatic Transmission Fluid on page 10‑14 for information on checking fluid level.

All capacities are approximate. When adding, be sure to fill to the approximate level, as recommended in thismanual. Recheck fluid level after filling.

Engine Specifications

Engine VIN Code Transmission Spark Plug Gap

2.4L L4 Engine U Automatic 1.01 mm (0.040 in)

2.4L L4 Engine 1 Automatic 1.01 mm (0.040 in)

3.6L V6 Engine 7 Automatic 1.10 mm (0.044 in)


12-4 Technical Data

Engine Drive Belt Routing

2.4L L4 Engine

3.6L V6 Engine


Customer Information 13-1

CustomerInformation

Customer InformationCustomer SatisfactionProcedure (U.S. andCanada) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-1

Customer SatisfactionProcedure (Mexico) . . . . . . . . 13-3

Customer Assistance Offices(U.S. and Canada) . . . . . . . . . 13-5

Customer Assistance Offices(Mexico) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-5

Customer Assistance for TextTelephone (TTY) Users (U.S.and Canada) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-6

Online Owner Center . . . . . . . . 13-6GM Mobility ReimbursementProgram (U.S. andCanada) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-7

Roadside Assistance Program(U.S. and Canada) . . . . . . . . . 13-8

Roadside AssistanceProgram (Mexico) . . . . . . . . . 13-10

Scheduling ServiceAppointments (U.S. andCanada) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-10

Courtesy TransportationProgram (U.S. andCanada) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-11

Collision Damage Repair(U.S. and Canada) . . . . . . . . 13-12

Service PublicationsOrdering Information . . . . . . 13-15

Reporting Safety DefectsReporting Safety Defects tothe United StatesGovernment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-16

Reporting Safety Defects tothe CanadianGovernment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-17

Reporting Safety Defects toGeneral Motors . . . . . . . . . . . 13-17

Vehicle Data Recording andPrivacyVehicle Data Recording andPrivacy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-17

Event Data Recorders . . . . . . 13-18OnStar® . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-19Radio FrequencyIdentification (RFID) . . . . . . . 13-19

Radio FrequencyStatement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-19

Customer Information

Customer SatisfactionProcedure (U.S. andCanada)Your satisfaction and goodwill areimportant to your dealer and toChevrolet. Normally, any concernswith the sales transaction or theoperation of the vehicle will beresolved by the dealer's sales orservice departments. Sometimes,however, despite the best intentionsof all concerned, misunderstandingscan occur. If your concern has notbeen resolved to your satisfaction,the following steps should be taken:

STEP ONE: Discuss your concernwith a member of dealershipmanagement. Normally, concernscan be quickly resolved at that level.If the matter has already beenreviewed with the sales, service,or parts manager, contact the ownerof the dealership or the generalmanager.


13-2 Customer Information

STEP TWO: If after contacting amember of dealership management,it appears your concern cannot beresolved by the dealership withoutfurther help, in the U.S., call theChevrolet Customer AssistanceCenter at 1-800-222-1020. InCanada, call General Motors ofCanada Customer CommunicationCentre at 1-800-263-3777 (English),or 1-800-263-7854 (French).

We encourage you to call thetoll-free number in order to give yourinquiry prompt attention. Have thefollowing information available togive the Customer Assistancerepresentative:. Vehicle Identification

Number (VIN). This is availablefrom the vehicle registration ortitle, or the plate at the top left ofthe instrument panel and visiblethrough the windshield.

. Dealership name and location.

. Vehicle delivery date andpresent mileage.

When contacting Chevrolet,remember that your concern willlikely be resolved at a dealer'sfacility. That is why we suggestfollowing Step One first.

STEP THREE — U.S. Owners:Both General Motors and yourdealer are committed to makingsure you are completely satisfiedwith your new vehicle. However,if you continue to remain unsatisfiedafter following the procedureoutlined in Steps One and Two, youcan file with the Better BusinessBureau (BBB) Auto Line® Programto enforce your rights.

The BBB Auto Line Program is anout-of-court program administeredby the Council of Better BusinessBureaus to settle automotivedisputes regarding vehicle repairs orthe interpretation of the New VehicleLimited Warranty. Although you maybe required to resort to this informaldispute resolution program prior tofiling a court action, use of theprogram is free of charge and yourcase will generally be heard within

40 days. If you do not agree with thedecision given in your case, youmay reject it and proceed with anyother venue for relief availableto you.

You may contact the BBB AutoLine Program using the toll-freetelephone number or write them atthe following address:

BBB Auto Line ProgramCouncil of Better BusinessBureaus, Inc.4200 Wilson BoulevardSuite 800Arlington, VA 22203-1838

Telephone: 1-800-955-5100www.dr.bbb.org/goauto

This program is available in all50 states and the District ofColumbia. Eligibility is limited byvehicle age, mileage, and otherfactors. General Motors reservesthe right to change eligibilitylimitations and/or discontinue itsparticipation in this program.



STEP THREE — CanadianOwners: In the event that you donot feel your concerns have beenaddressed after following theprocedure outlined in Steps Oneand Two, General Motors of CanadaLimited wants you to be aware of itsparticipation in a no-chargeMediation/Arbitration Program.General Motors of Canada Limitedhas committed to binding arbitrationof owner disputes involvingfactory-related vehicle serviceclaims. The program provides forthe review of the facts involved byan impartial third party arbiter, andmay include an informal hearingbefore the arbiter. The program isdesigned so that the entire disputesettlement process, from the timeyou file your complaint to the finaldecision, should be completed inabout 70 days. We believe ourimpartial program offers advantagesover courts in most jurisdictionsbecause it is informal, quick, andfree of charge.

For further information concerningeligibility in the Canadian MotorVehicle Arbitration Plan (CAMVAP),call toll-free 1-800-207-0685, or callthe General Motors CustomerCommunication Centre,1-800-263-3777 (English),1-800-263-7854 (French),or write to:

The Mediation/Arbitration Programc/o Customer CommunicationCentreGeneral Motors of Canada LimitedMail Code: CA1-163-0051908 Colonel Sam DriveOshawa, Ontario L1H 8P7

Your inquiry should be accompaniedby the Vehicle IdentificationNumber (VIN).

Customer SatisfactionProcedure (Mexico)

Did you get the Warranty ExtensionPlan? This plan is recommended byGeneral Motors to supplement thewarranty included with the newvehicle purchase.

See your dealer for details.



Customer AssistanceProcedure

Owner satisfaction and goodwill arevery important to your dealer andGeneral Motors.

Normally, any problem with thetransaction, sale, or usage of thevehicle must be handled by yourdealer sales or service departments.However, we recognize that despitethe good intentions of all partiesinvolved, sometimes amisunderstanding may occur.

If you have a problem that has notbeen satisfactorily handled throughthe normal means, we suggest thefollowing steps:

STEP ONE

Explain your case to the dealerservice agent, service manager,dealer sales agent, or salesmanager, depending on your case.

Make sure that they have allnecessary information. They areinterested in your continualsatisfaction.

STEP TWO

If you are not satisfied, pleasecontact the general manager or thedealership owner to ask for theirhelp. If they are not able to resolveyour case, ask them to contact theright people at General Motors forsupport, if needed.

STEP THREE

If your case is not resolved in areasonable amount of time by yourdealer, please call the GeneralMotors Customer AssistanceCenter (CAC) and provide thefollowing information:. Name. Address. Phone number. Model year. Brand. Vehicle Identification

Number (VIN). Mileage. Delivery date. Description of the problem. Dealership name. Dealership address



See Customer Assistance Offices(U.S. and Canada) on page 13‑5 orCustomer Assistance Offices(Mexico) on page 13‑5 for moreinformation.

Customer AssistanceOffices (U.S. and Canada)Chevrolet encourages customers tocall the toll-free number forassistance. However, if a customerwishes to write or e-mail Chevrolet,the letter should be addressed to:

United States

Chevrolet Motor DivisionChevrolet Customer AssistanceCenterP.O. Box 33170Detroit, MI 48232-5170www.Chevrolet.com

1-800-222-10201-800-833-2438 (For TextTelephone Devices (TTYs))Roadside Assistance:1-800-243-8872

From Puerto Rico:

1-800-496-9992 (English)1-800-496-9993 (Spanish)

From U.S. Virgin Islands:

1-800-496-9994

Canada

General Motors of Canada LimitedCustomer Communication Centre,Mail Code: CA1-163-0051908 Colonel Sam DriveOshawa, Ontario L1H 8P7www.gm.ca

1-800-263-3777 (English)1-800-263-7854 (French)1-800-263-3830 (For TextTelephone devices (TTYs))Roadside Assistance:1-800-268-6800

Overseas

Please contact the local GeneralMotors Business Unit.

Mexico, Central America, andCaribbean Islands/Countries(Except Puerto Rico and U.S.Virgin Islands)

General Motors de Mexico, S. deR.L. de C.V.Customer Assistance CenterAv. Ejercito Nacional #843Col. GranadaC.P. 11520, Mexico, D.F.

01-800-466-0800Long Distance: 011-52-53 29 0800

Customer AssistanceOffices (Mexico)To contact the Customer AssistanceCenter (CAC), use the phonenumbers listed in this section.Customer assistance is availableMonday through Friday, 08:00 to20:00 hours, and Saturdays from08:00 to 15:00 hours.

All e-mail inquiries to the CustomerAssistance Center (CAC) should besent to: [email protected].



Mexico

From Mexico City

5329-0811

From Other Mexico Locations

01-800-466-0811

United States and Canada

1-866-466-8190

Costa Rica

00-800-052-1005

Guatemala

1-800-999-5252

Panama

00-800-052-0001

Dominican Republic

1-888-751-5301

El Salvador

800-6273

Honduras

800-0122-6101

Customer Assistance forText Telephone (TTY)Users (U.S. and Canada)To assist customers who are deaf,hard of hearing, or speech-impairedand who use Text Telephones(TTYs), Chevrolet has TTYequipment available at its CustomerAssistance Center. Any TTYuser in the U.S. can communicatewith Chevrolet by dialing:1-800-833-2438. TTY users inCanada can dial 1-800-263-3830.

Online Owner Center

Chevrolet Owner Center (U.S.)www.chevyownercenter.com

Information andservices customized for yourspecific vehicle — all in oneconvenient place.. Digital owner manual, warranty

information, and more.. Storage for online service and

maintenance records.. Chevrolet dealer locator for

service nationwide.. Exclusive privileges and offers.. Recall notices for your specific

vehicle.. OnStar and GM Cardmember

Services Earnings summaries.



Other Helpful Links

Chevrolet — www.chevrolet.com

Chevrolet Merchandise —www.chevymall.com

Help Center — www.chevrolet.com/pages/mds/helpcenter/faq.do. FAQ. Contact Us

My GM Canada www.gm.ca

My GM Canada is apassword-protected section ofwww.gm.ca where you can saveinformation on GM vehicles, getpersonalized offers, and use handytools and forms with greater ease.

Here are a few of the valuable toolsand services you will haveaccess to:. My Showroom: Find and save

information on vehicles andcurrent offers in your area.

. My Dealers: Save details suchas address and phone numberfor each of your preferred GMdealers.

. My Driveway: Access quick linksto parts and service estimates,check trade-in values,or schedule a serviceappointment by adding thevehicles you own to yourdriveway profile.

. My Preferences: Manage yourprofile and use tools and formswith greater ease.

To sign up, visit the My GM.casection within www.gm.ca.

GM MobilityReimbursement Program(U.S. and Canada)

This program is available toqualified applicants for costreimbursement of eligibleaftermarket adaptive equipmentrequired for the vehicle, such ashand controls or a wheelchair/scooter lift for the vehicle.

For more information on the limitedoffer, visit www.gmmobility.com orcall the GM Mobility AssistanceCenter at 1-800-323-9935. TextTelephone (TTY) users, call1-800-833-9935.



General Motors of Canada alsohas a Mobility Program. Call1-800-GM-DRIVE (463-7483) fordetails. TTY users call1-800-263-3830.

Roadside AssistanceProgram (U.S. andCanada)For U.S.‐purchased vehicles, call1‐800‐243‐8872; (Text Telephone(TTY): 1‐888‐889‐2438).

For Canadian‐purchased vehicles,call 1-800-268-6800.

Service is available 24 hours a day,365 days a year.

Calling for Assistance

When calling Roadside Assistance,have the following informationready:. Your name, home address, and

home telephone number.. Telephone number of your

location.. Location of the vehicle.. Model, year, color, and license

plate number of the vehicle.. Odometer reading, Vehicle

Identification Number (VIN), anddelivery date of the vehicle.

. Description of the problem.

Coverage

Services are provided up to 5 years/160 000 km (100,000mi), whichevercomes first.

In the U.S., anyone driving thevehicle is covered. In Canada, aperson driving the vehicle withoutpermission from the owner is notcovered.

Roadside Assistance is not a part ofthe New Vehicle Limited Warranty.Chevrolet and General Motors ofCanada Limited reserve the right tomake any changes or discontinuethe Roadside Assistance program atany time without notification.

Chevrolet and General Motors ofCanada Limited reserve the right tolimit services or payment to anowner or driver if they decide theclaims are made too often, or thesame type of claim is made manytimes.



Services Provided. Emergency Fuel Delivery:

Delivery of enough fuel for thevehicle to get to the nearestservice station.

. Lock‐Out Service: Service tounlock the vehicle if you arelocked out. A remote unlock maybe available if you have OnStar.For security reasons, the drivermust present identificationbefore this service is given.

. Emergency Tow From a PublicRoad or Highway: Tow to thenearest Chevrolet dealer forwarranty service, or if the vehiclewas in a crash and cannot bedriven. Assistance is also givenwhen the vehicle is stuck in thesand, mud, or snow.

. Flat Tire Change: Service tochange a flat tire with the sparetire. The spare tire, if equipped,must be in good condition andproperly inflated. It is the owner'sresponsibility for the repair orreplacement of the tire if it is notcovered by the warranty.

. Battery Jump Start: Service tojump start a dead battery.

Services Not Included inRoadside Assistance. Impound towing caused by

violation of any laws.. Legal fines.. Mounting, dismounting,

or changing of snow tires,chains, or other traction devices.

. Towing or services for vehiclesdriven on a non-public road orhighway.

Services Specific to CanadianPurchased Vehicles. Fuel Delivery: Reimbursement

is approximately $5 Canadian.Diesel fuel delivery may berestricted. Propane and otherfuels are not provided throughthis service.

. Lock-Out Service: Vehicleregistration is required.

. Trip Routing Service: Detailedmaps of North America areprovided when requested eitherwith the most direct route or themost scenic route. There is alimit of six requests per year.Additional travel information isalso available. Allow threeweeks for delivery.



. Trip Interruption Benefits andAssistance: Must beover 250 kilometers fromwhere your trip was started toqualify. General Motors ofCanada Limited requirespre-authorization, originaldetailed receipts, and a copyof the repair orders. Onceauthorization has been received,the Roadside Assistance advisorwill help to make arrangementsand explain how to receivepayment.

. Alternative Service: Ifassistance cannot be providedright away, the RoadsideAssistance advisor may givepermission to get localemergency road service. You willreceive payment, up to $100,after sending the original receiptto Roadside Assistance.Mechanical failures may becovered, however any cost forparts and labor for repairs notcovered by the warranty are theowner responsibility.

Roadside AssistanceProgram (Mexico)Roadside Assistance is available24 hours a day, 365 days ofthe year.

For detailed information aboutRoadside Assistance, please seethe brochure provided with your newvehicle or visit our website at:www.chevrolet.com.mx. Navigatethe site and click on “Asistencia enel Camino.” E-mail correspondenceshould be sent to:[email protected].

To contact Roadside Assistance byphone, use the following numbers:

Mexico

01-800-466-0800

United States

1-866-466-8901

Canada

1-800-268-6800

Scheduling ServiceAppointments (U.S. andCanada)When the vehicle requires warrantyservice, contact the dealer andrequest an appointment. Byscheduling a service appointmentand advising the service consultantof your transportation needs, thedealer can help minimize yourinconvenience.

If the vehicle cannot be scheduledinto the service departmentimmediately, keep driving it until itcan be scheduled for service,unless, of course, the problem issafety related. If it is, please call thedealership, let them know this, andask for instructions.

If the dealer requests you to bringthe vehicle for service, you areurged to do so as early in the workday as possible to allow for thesame day-repair.



Courtesy TransportationProgram (U.S. andCanada)To enhance your ownershipexperience, we and our participatingdealers are proud to offer CourtesyTransportation, a customer supportprogram for vehicles with theBumper-to-Bumper (Base WarrantyCoverage period in Canada),extended powertrain, and/orhybrid‐specific warranties in boththe U.S. and Canada.

Several Courtesy Transportationoptions are available to assist inreducing inconvenience whenwarranty repairs are required.

Courtesy Transportation is not apart of the New Vehicle LimitedWarranty. A separate bookletentitled “Warranty and OwnerAssistance Information” furnishedwith each new vehicle providesdetailed warranty coverageinformation.

Transportation Options

Warranty service can generally becompleted while you wait. However,if you are unable to wait, GM helpsto minimize inconvenience byproviding several transportationoptions. Depending on thecircumstances, the dealer canoffer one of the following:

Shuttle Service

Shuttle service is the preferredmeans of offering CourtesyTransportation. Dealers may provideshuttle service to get you to yourdestination with minimal interruptionof your daily schedule. This includesone‐way or round‐trip shuttle servicewithin reasonable time and distanceparameters of the dealer's area.

Public Transportation or FuelReimbursement

If the vehicle requires overnightwarranty repairs, and publictransportation is used instead of thedealer's shuttle service, the expensemust be supported by originalreceipts and can only be up to themaximum amount allowed by GMfor shuttle service. In addition, forU.S. customers, should you arrangetransportation through a friend orrelative, limited reimbursement forreasonable fuel expenses may beavailable. Claim amounts shouldreflect actual costs and besupported by original receipts. Seethe dealer for information regardingthe allowance amounts forreimbursement of fuel or othertransportation costs.



Courtesy Rental Vehicle

The dealer may arrange to provideyou with a courtesy rental vehicle orreimburse you for a rental vehiclethat you obtain if the vehicle is keptfor an overnight warranty repair.Rental reimbursement will be limitedand must be supported by originalreceipts. This requires that you signand complete a rental agreementand meet state/provincial, local, andrental vehicle provider requirements.Requirements vary and may includeminimum age requirements,insurance coverage, credit card,etc. You are responsible for fuelusage charges and may also beresponsible for taxes, levies, usagefees, excessive mileage, or rentalusage beyond the completion of therepair.

It may not be possible to provide alike vehicle as a courtesy rental.

Additional ProgramInformation

All program options, such as shuttleservice, may not be available atevery dealer. Please contact thedealer for specific informationabout availability. All CourtesyTransportation arrangements will beadministered by appropriate dealerpersonnel.

General Motors reserves theright to unilaterally modify, change,or discontinue CourtesyTransportation at any time and toresolve all questions of claimeligibility pursuant to the terms andconditions described herein at itssole discretion.

Collision Damage Repair(U.S. and Canada)If the vehicle is involved in acollision and it is damaged, have thedamage repaired by a qualifiedtechnician using the properequipment and quality replacementparts. Poorly performed collisionrepairs diminish the vehicle resalevalue, and safety performance canbe compromised in subsequentcollisions.

Collision Parts

Genuine GM Collision parts are newparts made with the same materialsand construction methods as theparts with which the vehicle wasoriginally built. Genuine GMCollision parts are the best choice toensure that the vehicle's designedappearance, durability, and safetyare preserved. The use of GenuineGM parts can help maintain the GMNew Vehicle Limited Warranty.



Recycled original equipment partsmay also be used for repair. Theseparts are typically removed fromvehicles that were total losses inprior crashes. In most cases, theparts being recycled are fromundamaged sections of the vehicle.A recycled original equipment GMpart may be an acceptable choice tomaintain the vehicle's originallydesigned appearance and safetyperformance; however, the history ofthese parts is not known. Such partsare not covered by the GM NewVehicle Limited Warranty, and anyrelated failures are not covered bythat warranty.

Aftermarket collision parts are alsoavailable. These are made bycompanies other than GM and maynot have been tested for the vehicle.As a result, these parts may fitpoorly, exhibit premature durability/corrosion problems, and may notperform properly in subsequentcollisions. Aftermarket parts are notcovered by the GM New Vehicle

Limited Warranty, and any vehiclefailure related to such parts is notcovered by that warranty.

Repair Facility

GM also recommends that youchoose a collision repair facility thatmeets your needs before you everneed collision repairs. The dealermay have a collision repair centerwith GM-trained technicians andstate‐of‐the‐art equipment, or beable to recommend a collision repaircenter that has GM-trainedtechnicians and comparableequipment.

Insuring The Vehicle

Protect your investment in the GMvehicle with comprehensive andcollision insurance coverage. Thereare significant differences in thequality of coverage afforded byvarious insurance policy terms.

Many insurance policies providereduced protection to the GMvehicle by limiting compensation fordamage repairs by usingaftermarket collision parts. Someinsurance companies will notspecify aftermarket collision parts.When purchasing insurance, werecommend that you ensure that thevehicle will be repaired with GMoriginal equipment collision parts.If such insurance coverage is notavailable from your currentinsurance carrier, consider switchingto another insurance carrier.

If the vehicle is leased, the leasingcompany may require you to haveinsurance that ensures repairs withGenuine GM Original EquipmentManufacturer (OEM) parts orGenuine Manufacturer replacementparts. Read the lease carefully, asyou may be charged at the end ofthe lease for poor quality repairs.



If a Crash Occurs

If there has been an injury, callemergency services for help. Do notleave the scene of a crash until allmatters have been taken care of.Move the vehicle only if its positionputs you in danger, or you areinstructed to move it by a policeofficer.

Give only the necessary informationto police and other parties involvedin the crash.

For emergency towing seeRoadside Assistance Program (U.S.and Canada) on page 13‑8 orRoadside Assistance Program(Mexico) on page 13‑10.

Gather the following information:. Driver name, address, and

telephone number.. Driver license number.. Owner name, address, and

telephone number.. Vehicle license plate number.. Vehicle make, model, and

model year.. Vehicle Identification

Number (VIN).. Insurance company and policy

number.. General description of the

damage to the other vehicle.

Choose a reputable repair facilitythat uses quality replacement parts.See “Collision Parts” earlier in thissection.

If the airbag has inflated, see WhatWill You See After an AirbagInflates? on page 3‑31.

Managing the Vehicle DamageRepair Process

In the event that the vehicle requiresdamage repairs, GM recommendsthat you take an active role in itsrepair. If you have a pre-determinedrepair facility of choice, take thevehicle there, or have it towed there.Specify to the facility that anyrequired replacement collision partsbe original equipment parts, eithernew Genuine GM parts or recycledoriginal GM parts. Remember,recycled parts will not be covered bythe GM vehicle warranty.



Insurance pays the bill for the repair,but you must live with the repair.Depending on your policy limits,your insurance company mayinitially value the repair usingaftermarket parts. Discuss this withthe repair professional, and insist onGenuine GM parts. Remember,if the vehicle is leased, you may beobligated to have the vehiclerepaired with Genuine GM parts,even if your insurance coveragedoes not pay the full cost.

If another party's insurancecompany is paying for the repairs,you are not obligated to accept arepair valuation based on thatinsurance company's collision policyrepair limits, as you have nocontractual limits with that company.In such cases, you can have controlof the repair and parts choices aslong as the cost stays withinreasonable limits.

Service PublicationsOrdering Information

Service Manuals

Service Manuals have the diagnosisand repair information on theengines, transmission, axle,suspension, brakes, electrical,steering, body, etc.

Service Bulletins

Service Bulletins give additionaltechnical service informationneeded to knowledgeably serviceGeneral Motors cars and trucks.Each bulletin contains instructionsto assist in the diagnosis andservice of the vehicle.

Owner Information

Owner publications are writtenspecifically for owners and intendedto provide basic operationalinformation about the vehicle. TheOwner Manual includes theMaintenance Schedule for allmodels.

In-Portfolio: Includes a Portfolio,Owner Manual, and WarrantyBooklet.

RETAIL SELL PRICE:$35.00 (U.S.) plus handling andshipping fees.

Without Portfolio: OwnerManual only.

RETAIL SELL PRICE:$25.00 (U.S.) plus handling andshipping fees.



Current and Past Models

Technical Service Bulletins andManuals are available for currentand past model GM vehicles.

ORDER TOLL FREE:1-800-551-4123 Monday - Friday8:00 AM - 6:00 PM Eastern Time

For Credit Card Orders Only(VISA-MasterCard-Discover), visitHelm, Inc. at: www.helminc.com.

Or write to:

Helm, IncorporatedP.O. Box 07130Detroit, MI 48207

Prices are subject to change withoutnotice and without incurringobligation. Allow ample time fordelivery.

All listed prices are quoted in U.S.funds. Make checks payable in U.S.funds.

Reporting SafetyDefects

Reporting Safety Defectsto the United StatesGovernmentIf you believe that your vehiclehas a defect which could causea crash or could cause injury ordeath, you should immediatelyinform the National HighwayTraffic Safety Administration(NHTSA) in addition to notifyingGeneral Motors.

If NHTSA receives similarcomplaints, it may open aninvestigation, and if it finds thata safety defect exists in a groupof vehicles, it may order a recalland remedy campaign.

However, NHTSA cannotbecome involved in individualproblems between you, yourdealer, or General Motors.

To contact NHTSA, you may callthe Vehicle Safety Hotlinetoll-free at 1-888-327-4236(TTY: 1-800-424-9153); go tohttp://www.safercar.gov; orwrite to:

Administrator, NHTSA1200 New Jersey Avenue, S.E.Washington, D.C. 20590

You can also obtain otherinformation about motorvehicle safety fromhttp://www.safercar.gov.



Reporting Safety Defectsto the CanadianGovernmentIf you live in Canada, and youbelieve that the vehicle has a safetydefect, notify Transport Canadaimmediately, and notify GeneralMotors of Canada Limited. Callthem at 1-800-333-0510 or write to:

Transport CanadaRoad Safety Branch2780 Sheffield RoadOttawa, Ontario K1B 3V9

Reporting Safety Defectsto General MotorsIn addition to notifying NHTSA(or Transport Canada) in a situationlike this, notify General Motors.

Call 1-800-222-1020, or write:

Chevrolet Motor DivisionChevrolet Customer AssistanceCenterP.O. Box 33170Detroit, MI 48232-5170

In Canada, call 1-800-263-3777(English) or 1-800-263-7854(French), or write:

General Motors of Canada LimitedCustomer Communication Centre,Mail Code: CA1-163-0051908 Colonel Sam DriveOshawa, Ontario L1H 8P7

Vehicle DataRecording andPrivacyThis GM vehicle has a number ofsophisticated computers that recordinformation about the vehicle’sperformance and how it is driven.For example, the vehicle usescomputer modules to monitor andcontrol engine and transmissionperformance, to monitor theconditions for airbag deploymentand deploy airbags in a crash, and,if so equipped, to provide antilockbraking to help the driver control thevehicle. These modules may storedata to help the dealer technicianservice the vehicle. Some modulesmay also store data about how youoperate the vehicle, such as rate offuel consumption or average speed.These modules may also retain theowner’s personal preferences, suchas radio pre-sets, seat positions,and temperature settings.



Event Data RecordersThis vehicle has an Event DataRecorder (EDR). The main purposeof an EDR is to record, in certaincrash or near crash-like situations,such as an airbag deployment orhitting a road obstacle, data that willassist in understanding how avehicle's systems performed. TheEDR is designed to record datarelated to vehicle dynamics andsafety systems for a short period oftime, typically 30 seconds or less.The EDR in this vehicle is designedto record such data as:. How various systems in the

vehicle were operating.. Whether or not the driver and

passenger safety belts werebuckled/fastened.

. How far, if at all, the driver waspressing the accelerator and/orbrake pedal.

. How fast the vehicle wastraveling.

This data can help provide a betterunderstanding of the circumstancesin which crashes and injuries occur.

Important: EDR data is recordedby the vehicle only if a non-trivialcrash situation occurs; no data isrecorded by the EDR under normaldriving conditions and no personaldata (e.g., name, gender, age,and crash location) is recorded.However, other parties, such aslaw enforcement, could combinethe EDR data with the type ofpersonally identifying data routinelyacquired during a crashinvestigation.

To read data recorded by an EDR,special equipment is required, andaccess to the vehicle or the EDR isneeded. In addition to the vehiclemanufacturer, other parties, such aslaw enforcement, that have thespecial equipment, can read theinformation if they have access tothe vehicle or the EDR.

GM will not access this data orshare it with others except: with theconsent of the vehicle owner or,if the vehicle is leased, with theconsent of the lessee; in responseto an official request by police orsimilar government office; as part ofGM's defense of litigation throughthe discovery process; or, asrequired by law. Data that GMcollects or receives may also beused for GM research needs or maybe made available to others forresearch purposes, where a need isshown and the data is not tied to aspecific vehicle or vehicle owner.



OnStar®

If the vehicle is equipped with anactive OnStar system, that systemmay also record data in crash ornear crash‐like situations. TheOnStar Terms and Conditionsprovides information on datacollection and use and is availablein the OnStar glove box kit, atwww.onstar.com (U.S.) orwww.onstar.ca (Canada), or bypressing theQ button andspeaking to an advisor.

Radio FrequencyIdentification (RFID)RFID technology is used in somevehicles for functions such as tirepressure monitoring and ignitionsystem security, as well as inconnection with conveniences suchas key fobs for remote door locking/unlocking and starting, andin-vehicle transmitters for garagedoor openers. RFID technology inGM vehicles does not use or recordpersonal information or link with anyother GM system containingpersonal information.

Radio FrequencyStatementThis vehicle has systems thatoperate on a radio frequency thatcomply with Part 15 of the FederalCommunications Commission (FCC)rules and with Industry CanadaStandards RSS‐210/220/310.

Operation is subject to the followingtwo conditions:

1. The device may not causeinterference.

2. The device must accept anyinterference received, includinginterference that may causeundesired operation of thedevice.

Changes or modifications to any ofthese systems by other than anauthorized service facility could voidauthorization to use this equipment.



2 NOTES


INDEX i-1

AAccessories andModifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-3

Accessory Power . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-20Add-On ElectricalEquipment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-47

AdjustmentsLumbar, Front Seats . . . . . . . . . . . 3-4

Air Cleaner/Filter, Engine . . . . . 10-14Air Conditioning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-5Air Vents . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-9Airbag SystemCheck . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-38How Does an AirbagRestrain? . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-30

Passenger SensingSystem . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-32

What Makes an AirbagInflate? . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-30

What Will You See Afteran Airbag Inflates? . . . . . . . . . .3-31

When Should an AirbagInflate? . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-29

Where Are the Airbags? . . . . . .3-27

AirbagsAdding Equipment to theVehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-37

Passenger Status Indicator . . .5-13Readiness Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-13Servicing Airbag-EquippedVehicles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-36

System Check . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-25Alarm SystemAnti-Theft . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-11

AM-FM Radio . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-7AntennaSatellite Radio . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7-15

Anti-TheftAlarm System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-11

Antilock BrakeSystem (ABS) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-27Warning Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-19

Appearance CareExterior . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-90Interior . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-94

Assistance Program,Roadside . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-8, 13-10

Audio Players . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-15CD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7-15

Audio SystemBackglass Antenna . . . . . . . . . . .7-15Radio Reception . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7-14Theft-Deterrent Feature . . . . . . . . 7-2

AutomaticClimate Control System . . . . . . . . 8-5Door Locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-8Headlamp System . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-3

Automatic Transmission . . . . . . . 9-24Fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-14Manual Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-25Shift Lock ControlFunction Check . . . . . . . . . . . 10-27

Auxiliary Devices . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-20

BBattery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-26Jump Starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-84Load Management . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-6Power Protection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-7

Blade Replacement, Wiper . . . 10-29Bluetooth . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-25Brake System Warning Light . . . 5-18


i-2 INDEX

Brakes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-24Antilock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-27Assist . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-28Fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-25Parking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-28System Messages . . . . . . . . . . . .5-26

Braking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-3Break-In, New Vehicle . . . . . . . . . 9-16Bulb Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-34Back-Up Lamps . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-33Fog Lamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-4Halogen Bulbs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-30Headlamp Aiming . . . . . . . . . . . 10-29Headlamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-30License Plate Lamps . . . . . . . 10-34Taillamps, TurnSignal andStoplamps . . . . . . . . . 10-30, 10-32

Buying New Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-59

CCalibration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-4CaliforniaFuel Requirements . . . . . . . . . . .9-36Perchlorate MaterialsRequirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .10-3

Warning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .10-3Canadian Vehicle Owners . . . . . . . . iiiCapacities andSpecifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-2

Carbon MonoxideEngine Exhaust . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-22Trunk . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-9Winter Driving . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-9

Cautions, Danger, andWarnings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . iv

CD Player . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-15Center Console Storage . . . . . . . . 4-3Chains, Tire . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-65ChargingSystem Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-15

CheckEngine Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-15IgnitionTransmission Lock . . . . . . . . 10-28

Child RestraintsInfants and YoungChildren . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-41

Lower Anchors andTethers for Children . . . . . . . . .3-48

Older Children . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-39Securing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-55, 3-57Systems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-43

CleaningExterior Care . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-90Interior Care . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-94

Climate Control Systems . . . . . . . 8-1Air Conditioning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-1Automatic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-5Heating . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-1

Clock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-5Cluster, Instrument . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-9


INDEX i-3

Collision Damage Repair . . . . . 13-12Compact Spare Tire . . . . . . . . . . 10-83Compass . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-4Compressor Kit, TireSealant . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-67

Control of a Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-3Convenience Net . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-3Convex Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-13CoolantEngine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-16Engine TemperatureGauge . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-11

Engine TemperatureWarning Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-20

Cooling System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-16Courtesy TransportationProgram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-11

Cruise Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-32Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-22Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-26

Cupholders . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-1

Customer Assistance . . . . . . . . . . 13-6Offices . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .13-5Text Telephone (TTY)Users . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .13-6

Customer InformationService PublicationsOrdering Information . . . . . . 13-15

Customer SatisfactionProcedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-1, 13-3

DDamage Repair, Collision . . . . . 13-12Danger, Warnings, andCautions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . iv

Data Recorders, Event . . . . . . . 13-18Daytime RunningLamps (DRL) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-2

Defensive Driving . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-2Delayed Headlamps . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-3Delayed Locking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-8Devices, Auxiliary . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-20Dome Lamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-5

DoorAjar Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-26Ajar Reminder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-7Delayed Locking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-8Locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-7Power Locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-7

Driver InformationCenter (DIC) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-22

DrivingCharacteristics andTowing Tips . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-42

Defensive . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-2Drunk . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-2Highway Hypnosis . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-8Hill and Mountain Roads . . . . . . . 9-8If the Vehicle is Stuck . . . . . . . . . 9-11Loss of Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-6Off-Road Recovery . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-6Vehicle Load Limits . . . . . . . . . . .9-12Wet Roads . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-7Winter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-9

Driving for Better FuelEconomy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-21


i-4 INDEX

EE85 Fuel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-37Electrical Equipment,Add-On . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-47

Electrical SystemEngine CompartmentFuse Block . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-36

Fuses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-35Instrument Panel FuseBlock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-38

Overload . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-35Rear Compartment FuseBlock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-40

Electronic Stability Control . . . . . 9-31Electronic Stability Control(ESC)/Traction ControlSystem (TCS) IndicatorWarning Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-19

EngineAir Cleaner/Filter . . . . . . . . . . . 10-14Check and Service EngineSoon Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-15

Engine (cont.)Compartment Overview . . . . . . .10-6Coolant . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-16Coolant TemperatureGauge . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-11

Coolant TemperatureWarning Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-20

Cooling System . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-16Drive Belt Routing . . . . . . . . . . . .12-4Exhaust . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-22Heater . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-19Overheated ProtectionOperating Mode . . . . . . . . . . . 10-21

Overheating . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-20Power Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-26Pressure Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-21Running While Parked . . . . . . . .9-23Starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-18

Engine OilLife System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-13Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-26

Entry/Exit Lighting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-5Equipment, Towing . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-47

Event Data Recorders . . . . . . . . 13-18Extender, Safety Belt . . . . . . . . . . 3-23Exterior Lamp Controls . . . . . . . . . 6-1Exterior Lamps Off Reminder . . . 6-2

FFilter,Engine Air Cleaner . . . . . . . . . 10-14

Flash-to-Pass . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-2Flashers, Hazard Warning . . . . . . 6-4Flat Tire . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-65Changing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-75

Floor Mats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-97FluidAutomatic Transmission . . . . 10-14Brakes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-25Power Steering . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-22Washer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-23

Fog LampsBulb Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-4

Front SeatsAdjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-3Heated . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-7


INDEX i-5

Front Storage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-2Fuel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-35Additives . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-36E85 (85% Ethanol) . . . . . . . . . . .9-37Filling a Portable FuelContainer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-40

Filling the Tank . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-39Fuels in Foreign Countries . . . .9-36Gasoline Specifications . . . . . . .9-36Gauge . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-10Recommended . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-35Requirements, California . . . . .9-36System Messages . . . . . . . . . . . .5-27

Fuel EconomyDriving . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-21

Fuses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-35Engine CompartmentFuse Block . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-36

Instrument Panel FuseBlock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-38

Rear Compartment FuseBlock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-40

GGasolineSpecifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-36

GaugesEngine CoolantTemperature . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-11

Fuel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-10Odometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-10Speedometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-10Tachometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-10Trip Odometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-10Warning Lights andIndicators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-8

General InformationService and Maintenance . . . . . 11-1Towing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-41Vehicle Care . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .10-2

Glove Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-1GM Mobility ReimbursementProgram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-7

HHalogen Bulbs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-30Hazard Warning Flashers . . . . . . . 6-4Head Restraints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-2HeadlampsAiming . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-29Automatic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-3Bulb Replacement . . . . . . . . . . 10-30Daytime RunningLamps (DRL) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-2

Delayed . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-3Flash-to-Pass . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-2High-Beam On Light . . . . . . . . . .5-22High/Low Beam Changer . . . . . . 6-2

Heated Front Seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-7Heated Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-14HeaterEngine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-19

Heating and AirConditioning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-1, 8-5

High-Beam On Light . . . . . . . . . . . 5-22


i-6 INDEX

High-Speed Operation . . . . . . . . 10-52Highway Hypnosis . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-8Hill and Mountain Roads . . . . . . . . 9-8Hood . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-5Horn . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-3How to Wear Safety BeltsProperly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-13

IIgnition Positions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-16Ignition Transmission LockCheck . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-28

Immobilizer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-12Infants and Young Children,Restraints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-41

Infotainment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-1Instrument Cluster . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-9Instrument PanelStorage Area . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-1

Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . iii

JJump Starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-84

KKey and Lock Messages . . . . . . . 5-27Keyless EntryRemote (RKE) System . . . . . . . . 2-3

Keys . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-2

LLabeling, Tire Sidewall . . . . . . . . 10-44Lamp Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-27LampsDaytime Running (DRL) . . . . . . . 6-2Dome . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-5Exterior Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-1Exterior Lamps OffReminder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-2

License Plate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-34Malfunction Indicator . . . . . . . . .5-15Reading . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-5

Lap-Shoulder Belt . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-18LATCH SystemReplacing Parts After aCrash . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-55

LATCH, Lower Anchors andTethers for Children . . . . . . . . . . 3-48

LightElectronic Stability Control(ESC)/Traction ConrolSystem (TCS) IndicatorWarning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-19

LightingEntry/Exit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-5Illumination Control . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-5Parade Dimming . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-6

LightsAirbag Readiness . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-13Antilock Brake System(ABS) Warning . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-19

Brake System Warning . . . . . . .5-18Charging System . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-15Cruise Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-22


INDEX i-7

Lights (cont.)Engine CoolantTemperature Warning . . . . . . .5-20

Engine Oil Pressure . . . . . . . . . .5-21Flash-to-Pass . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-2High-Beam On . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-22High/Low Beam Changer . . . . . . 6-2Safety Belt Reminders . . . . . . . .5-12Security . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-22Tire Pressure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-20

LocksAutomatic Door . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-8Delayed Locking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-8Door . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-7Lockout Protection . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-8Power Door . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-7Safety . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-8

Loss of Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-6Low-Profile Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-44Lower Anchors and Tethersfor Children (LATCHSystem) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-48

Lumbar Adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-4Front Seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-4

MMaintenanceRecords . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-8

Maintenance ScheduleRecommended Fluids andLubricants . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-6

Scheduled Maintenance . . . . . . 11-2Malfunction Indicator Lamp . . . . 5-15Manual Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-25MessagesAirbag System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-29Brake System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-26Door Ajar . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-26Engine Oil . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-26Engine Power . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-26Fuel System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-27Key and Lock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-27Lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-27Ride Control System . . . . . . . . . .5-27Service Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-29Tire . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-29Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-25Vehicle Reminder . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-30Washer Fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-30

MirrorsAutomatic DimmingRearview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-14

Convex . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-13Heated . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-14Manual Rearview . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-14Power . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-14

Monitor System, TirePressure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-53

NNet, Convenience . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-3New Vehicle Break-In . . . . . . . . . . 9-16

OOdometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-10Trip . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-10

Off-RoadRecovery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-6

OilEngine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .10-9


i-8 INDEX

Oil (cont.)Engine Oil Life System . . . . . 10-13Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-26Pressure Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-21

Older Children, Restraints . . . . . 3-39Online Owner Center . . . . . . . . . . 13-6OnStar® System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-23Operation, InfotainmentSystem . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-3

OutletsPower . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-7

Overheated EngineProtectionOperating Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-21

Overheating, Engine . . . . . . . . . . 10-20

PParade Dimming . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-6ParkShifting Into . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-20Shifting Out of . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-21

ParkingBrake . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-28Brake and P (Park)Mechanism Check . . . . . . . . 10-28

Over Things That Burn . . . . . . .9-22Passenger Airbag StatusIndicator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-13

Passenger Sensing System . . . 3-32Perchlorate MaterialsRequirements, California . . . . . 10-3

PersonalizationVehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-30

PhoneBluetooth . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7-25

PowerDoor Locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-7Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-14Outlets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-7Protection, Battery . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-7Retained Accessory (RAP) . . .9-20Seat Adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-4Steering Fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-22Windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-16

Pregnancy, Using SafetyBelts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-23

PrivacyRadio FrequencyIdentification (RFID) . . . . . . . 13-19

ProgramCourtesy Transportation . . . . .13-11

Proposition 65 Warning,California . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-3

RRadio FrequencyIdentification (RFID) . . . . . . . . 13-19Statement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-19

RadiosAM-FM Radio . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-7Reception . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7-14Satellite . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7-10

Reading Lamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-5Rear Seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-8


INDEX i-9

Rearview Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-14Automatic Dimming . . . . . . . . . . .2-14

Reclining Seatbacks . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-5Recommended Fluids andLubricants . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-6

Recommended Fuel . . . . . . . . . . . 9-35RecordsMaintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-8

Recreational VehicleTowing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-88

Reimbursement Program,GM Mobility . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-7

Remote Keyless Entry(RKE) System . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-2, 2-3

Remote Vehicle Start . . . . . . . . . . . 2-5Replacement Bulbs . . . . . . . . . . . 10-34Replacement PartsAirbags . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-38Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-7

Replacing Airbag System . . . . . . 3-38Replacing LATCH SystemParts After a Crash . . . . . . . . . . . 3-55

Replacing Safety BeltSystem Parts After aCrash . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-24

Reporting Safety DefectsCanadian Government . . . . . . 13-17General Motors . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-17U.S. Government . . . . . . . . . . . 13-16

RestraintsWhere to Put . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-45

Retained AccessoryPower (RAP) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-20

Ride Control Systems . . . . . . . . . 9-31Electronic Stability (ESC) . . . . .9-31Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-27

RoadsDriving, Wet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-7

Roadside AssistanceProgram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-8, 13-10

RoofSunroof . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-18

Rotation, Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-57Routing, Engine Drive Belt . . . . . 12-4Running the Vehicle WhileParked . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-23

SSafety Belts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-9Care . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-24Extender . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-23How to Wear Safety BeltsProperly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-13

Lap-Shoulder Belt . . . . . . . . . . . .3-18Reminders . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-12Replacing After a Crash . . . . . .3-24Use During Pregnancy . . . . . . . .3-23

Safety Defects ReportingCanadian Government . . . . . . 13-17General Motors . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-17U.S. Government . . . . . . . . . . . 13-16

Safety Locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-8Safety System Check . . . . . . . . . . 3-24Satellite Radio . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-10Scheduled Maintenance . . . . . . . 11-2Scheduling Appointments . . . . . 13-10Sealant Kit, Tire . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-67


i-10 INDEX

SeatsAdjustment, Front . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-3Head Restraints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-2Heated Front . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-7Lumbar Adjustment, Front . . . . . 3-4Power Adjustment, Front . . . . . . 3-4Rear . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-8Reclining Seatbacks . . . . . . . . . . . 3-5

Securing ChildRestraints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-55, 3-57

SecurityLight . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-22Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-11

ServiceAccessories andModifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .10-3

Doing Your Own Work . . . . . . . .10-4Engine Soon Light . . . . . . . . . . . .5-15Maintenance Records . . . . . . . . 11-8Maintenance, GeneralInformation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-1

Service (cont.)Parts Identification Label . . . . .12-1Publications OrderingInformation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-15

Scheduling Appointments . . . 13-10Vehicle Messages . . . . . . . . . . . .5-29

Servicing the Airbag . . . . . . . . . . . 3-36Shift Lock Control FunctionCheck, AutomaticTransmission . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-27

ShiftingInto Park . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-20Out of Park . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-21

Signals, Turn andLane-Change . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-4

Spare TireCompact . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-83

Specifications andCapacities . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-2

Speedometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-10Start Vehicle, Remote . . . . . . . . . . 2-5

Starter Switch Check . . . . . . . . . 10-27Starting the Engine . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-18Steering . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-4Fluid, Power . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-22Wheel Adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-2Wheel Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-2

Storage AreasCenter Console . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-3Convenience Net . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-3Front . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-2Glove Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-1Instrument Panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-1

Storing the Tire Sealantand Compressor Kit . . . . . . . . . 10-74

Stuck Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-11Sun Visors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-18Sunroof . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-18Symbols . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ivSystemInfotainment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-1


INDEX i-11

TTachometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-10TaillampsTurn Signal, andStoplamps . . . . . . . . . 10-30, 10-32

Text Telephone (TTY) Users . . . 13-6Theft-Deterrent Systems . . . . . . . 2-12Immobilizer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-12

Time . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-5TiresBuying New Tires . . . . . . . . . . . 10-59Chains . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-65Changing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-75Compact Spare . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-83Designations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-47Different Size . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-61If a Tire Goes Flat . . . . . . . . . . 10-65Inflation Monitor System . . . . 10-54Inspection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-57Low Profile . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-44Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-29

Tires (cont.)Pressure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-52Pressure Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-20Pressure Monitor System . . . 10-53Rotation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-57Sealant andCompressor Kit . . . . . . . . . . . 10-67

Sealant and CompressorKit, Storing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-74

Sidewall Labeling . . . . . . . . . . . 10-44Terminology andDefinitions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-48

Uniform Tire QualityGrading . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-62

Wheel Alignment and TireBalance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-63

Wheel Replacement . . . . . . . . 10-64When It Is Time for NewTires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-59

Winter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-43

TowingDriving Characteristics . . . . . . . .9-42Equipment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-47General Information . . . . . . . . . .9-41Recreational Vehicle . . . . . . . . 10-88Trailer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-45Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-88

TractionControl System (TCS) . . . . . . . .9-29

Trailer Towing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-45TransmissionAutomatic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-24Fluid, Automatic . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-14

Transportation Program,Courtesy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-11

Trip Odometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-10Trunk . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-9Turn and Lane-ChangeSignals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-4


i-12 INDEX

UUniform Tire QualityGrading . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-62

Using this Manual . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . iv

VVehicleCanadian Owners . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . iiiControl . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-3IdentificationNumber (VIN) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .12-1

Load Limits . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-12Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-25Personalization . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-30Reminder Messages . . . . . . . . . .5-30Remote Start . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-5Security . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-11Towing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-88

Vehicle CareStoring the Tire Sealantand Compressor Kit . . . . . . . 10-74

Tire Pressure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-51Vehicle IdentificationService Parts IdentificationLabel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .12-1

Ventilation, Air . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-9Visors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-18

WWarningBrake System Light . . . . . . . . . . .5-18

Warning Lights, Gauges, andIndicators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-8

Warnings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ivCautions and Danger . . . . . . . . . . . .ivHazard Flashers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-4

Washer Fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-23Washer Fluid Messages . . . . . . . 5-30

WheelsAlignment and TireBalance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-63

Different Size . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-61Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-64

When It Is Time for NewTires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-59

Where to Put the Restraint . . . . 3-45Windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-15Power . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-16

WindshieldWiper/Washer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-3

Winter Driving . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-9Winter Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-43Wiper Blade Replacement . . . . 10-29

Documents

2011 Chevrolet Malibu Owner Manual M · PDF file2011 Chevrolet Malibu Owner Manual M Service and Maintenance ... Chevrolet Malibu Owner Manual - 2011 Black plate ... slogans, vehicle